executivesummary 5 - east midlands councils · foreword 4 executivesummary 5 chapter1introduction...

Foreword 4

Executive Summary 5

Chapter 1 Introduction 11

Chapter 2 Key Points and Actions 18

Chapter 3 Housing 29Introduction 29Policy 2 Promoting Better Design 32Policy 13 Regional Housing Provision 35Policy 14 Regional Priorities for Affordable Housing 39Policy 15 Regional Priorities for Affordable Rural Housing 44Policy 16 Regional Priorities for Provision for Gypsies and Travellers 45Policy 17 Regional Priorities for Managing the Release of Land for Housing 45Impact of the Credit Crunch 48

Chapter 4 Economy 50Introduction 50Data Issues 54Policy 18 Regional Priorities for the Economy 55Policy 19 Regional Priority Areas for Regeneration 56Policy 20 Regional Priorities for Employment Land 59Policy 21 Strategic Distribution 68Policy 22 Regional Priorities for Town Centres and Retail Development 70Policy 23 Regional Priorities for Casino development 73Policy 24 Regional Priorities for Rural Diversification 74Policy 25 Regional Priorities for ICT 79Policy 41 Regional Priorities for Tourism 81Impact of the Credit Crunch 82

Chapter 5 Environment 87Introduction 88Data Issues 94Policy 26 Protecting and Enhancing the Region’s Natural and Cultural Heritage 94Policy 27 Regional Priorities for the Historic Environment 98Policy 28 Regional Priorities for Environmental and Green Infrastructure 101Policy 29 Priorities for Enhancing the Region’s Biodiversity 102Policy 30 Regional Priorities for Managing and Increasing Woodland Cover 104Policy 31 Priorities for the Management and Enhancement of the Region’s Landscape 105Policy 32 A Regional Approach to the Water Resources and Water Quality 107Policy 33 Regional Priorities for Strategic River Corridors 109Policy 34 Priorities for the Management of the Lincolnshire Coast 112Policy 35 A Regional Approach to Managing Flood Risk 113Policy 35A Regional Priorities for Air Quality 116Policy 38 Regional Priorities for Energy Reduction and Efficiency 117Policy 39 Regional Priorities for Low Carbon Energy Generation 119

| Annual Monitoring Report 2007/08

Contents

Policy 40 Regional Priorities for Culture, Sport and Recreation 121

Chapter 6 Minerals, Aggregates and Waste 125Introduction 126Data Issues 127Policy 36 Regional Priorities for Minerals 127Policy 37 Regional Priorities for Waste Management 130

Chapter 7 Transport 140Introduction 140Data Issues 143Policy 42: Regional Transport Objectives 144Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives 144Policy 44: A Regional Approach to Traffic Growth Reduction 144Policy 45: A Regional Approach to Behavioural Change 149Policy 46: Regional Priorities for Parking Levies and Road User Charging 152Policy 47: Regional Car Parking Standards 152Policy 48: A Regional Approach to Developing Public Transport Accessibility Criteria 153Policy 49: Regional Heavy Rail Priorities 154Policy 50: Regional Priorities for Bus and Light Rail Services 155Policy 51: Regional Priorities for Integrating Public Transport 156Policy 52: Regional Trunk Road Priorities 157Policy 53: Regional Major Highway Priorities 159Policy 54: Implementation of the Regional Freight Strategy 160Policy 55: Regional Priorities for Air Transport 161

Chapter 8 Sub-Areas 164Introduction 165Data Issues 165

Chapter 8 a East Midlands General Sub-area 166Policy 3 Concentrating Development in Urban Areas 167

Chapter 8 b 3 Cities Sub-area 169Policy 12: Development in the 3 Cities Sub-area 172Policy 43 Sub Regional Transport Objectives: 3 Cities 175Policy 3 Cities SRS 2 Sub Regional Priorities for Green Belt Areas 176Policy 3 Cities SRS 3 Housing Provision 177Policy 3 Cities SRS 4 Employment Land 178Policy 3 Cities SRS 5 Green Infrastructure & the National Forest 179

Chapter 8 c Northern Sub-Regional Strategy 181Policy 7 Regeneration of the Northern Sub-area 183Policy 43 Sub Regional Transport Objectives: Northern 186Northern SRS Policy 1 Sub-Regional Development Priorities 186Northern SRS Policy 2 Supporting the roles of Town and Village Centres 187Northern SRS Policy 3 Sub-Regional Employment Regeneration Priorities 188Northern SRS Policy 4 Enhancing Green Infrastructure through Development 188


Contents

Northern SRS Policy 5 Sherwood Forest Regional Park 189

Chapter 8 d Eastern Sub-area 190Policy 4 Development in the Eastern Sub-area 191Policy 5 Strategy for Lincolnshire Coastal Districts 194Policy 6 Overcoming Peripherality in the Eastern Sub-area 195Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives: Eastern Sub-area 195

Chapter 8 e Lincoln Policy Area 196LPA SRS Policy 1 Spatial Priorities for the Lincoln Policy Area 198LPA SRS Policy 2 Site Selection in the Lincoln Policy Area 199LPA SRS Policy 3 Protection of Lincoln’s Urban Fringe 201LPA SRS Policy 4 Housing Provision 203LPA SRS Policy 5 Employment Density 204LPA SRS Policy 6 Tourism, Culture & Education 204LPA SRS Policy 7 Deprivation and Exclusion 205LPA SRS Policy 8 Flood Risk and Water Management 206LPA SRS Policy 9 Sub Regional Country Park 207LPA SRS Policy 10 Lincoln Cathedral 207LPA SRS Policy 11 Sub-Regional Transport Priorities 207

Chapter 8 f Peak Sub-area 209Policy 8 Spatial Priorities in the Peak Sub-area 211Policy 9 Spatial Priorities outside the Peak District National Park 213Policy 10 Managing Tourism and Visitors in the Peak Sub-area 214Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives: Peak 215Appendices

Appendix 1 Data Sources and References 216

Appendix 2 Boundary Maps 220


Contents

ForewordThis is the seventh Regional Plan Annual Monitoring Report produced by the East MidlandsRegional Assembly as Regional Planning Body (RPB) and monitors polices containedwithin the East Midlands Regional Plan - Secretary of State’s Proposed Changes whichwas published in July 2008.

The Report builds on the partnership working established in the previous rounds of annualmonitoring, with much of the technical work undertaken by Intelligence East Midlands,overseen by the Assembly’s Monitoring and Review Advisory Group and other RegionalPlan Groups.

Monitoring is an integral part of the strategy development, implementation and reviewcycle and it represents a crucial feedback loop within the process of policy-making. Thedevelopment of monitoring reports provides a forum to highlight change in funding

allocations, programmes and projects being undertaken in the region. Ultimately the results of thesereports should be taken on board and influence future reviews of policy through the development ofaction plans.

The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 requires every Regional Planning Body to make anannual report on the implementation of the Regional Spatial Strategy to the Secretary of State. RegionalBodies and local authorities await clear guidance on whether this requirement will change in theforthcoming legislation for Single Regional Strategy (SRS). The statutory nature of monitoring has driventhe need and justification for the necessary data gathering, its handling and interpretation and thereremains a growing demand for robust evidence bases to support the development and delivery of localand regional plans (Local Development Frameworks and Regional Spatial Strategies respectively). TheRegional Assembly supports the concept that the statutory requirement should continue, allowing for themonitoring of the future SRS at a regional level and that this monitoring should link with local levelmonitoring activity; although it is acknowledged that the scope and content will change as the RegionalEconomic Strategy and Regional Spatial Strategy requirements are brought together.

In delivering this Report I would like to acknowledge the support of the Region's Planning Authoritiesand wide range of other data providers, not least our own Planning, Housing and Transport team hereat Melton Mowbray, whose time and technical expertise have contributed to its successful production.

I hope you find this Annual Monitoring Report both informative and interesting to read.

Councillor Jim Harker

Chairman of the Regional Housing, Planning and Transport Joint Board

4| Annual Monitoring Report 2007/08

Foreword

Executive SummaryThis report presents the 2007/08 Annual Monitoring Report (AMR) for the East Midlands. The AMR is of crucialimportance to the future of the East Midlands Regional Plan (Regional Spatial Strategy). As Regional plansare implemented, it is only through monitoring and analysis of performance at the local level, through documentssuch as Local Development Frameworks, that an assessment can be made as to the degree to which theRegional Plan and policies have been realised. This year’s AMR monitors policies contained within the EastMidlands Regional Plan (Regional Spatial Strategy) Secretary of State’s Proposed Changes (July 2008).

'The Credit Crunch'

Traditionally, the AMR has presented data in the reporting year with only passing reference to informationrelevant to the current year.There are many reasons for this; not least that accurate data for most topics is notavailable in the current year. However, with the credit crunch having taken a grip in the current (2008/9) financialyear it is likely that there has been a sea change in many of the datasets underpinning the AMR and regionalpolicy analysis.

Therefore, some more recent datasets that have been included in this AMR as leading indicators, for examplequarterly dwelling completions presented by the CLG starts and completions data set.

EMRA cdpVision and the Seamless Digital Chain

The Regional Monitoring system EMRA cdpvision went live on 8th August 2007. Districts, counties and unitaryauthorities have now entered their 2006/07 and 2007/08 monitoring returns through the system via the internet,which also allowed access to previous data and reports the system generates.

The Assembly continues to work with CDPSoft to ensure the system is further developed as far as possible tomeet the full recommended specification. This includes a proposed enhancement to GIS functionality, enablingGIS reporting and analysis from within the cdpvision system. CDPSoft are also working on a public websiteenabling anyone to view previous returns and run reports.

Topic Sections

This year’s AMR is divided into 6 sections, a summary of each is provided below:

Housing

In 2007/08, 84.5 per cent of new dwellings in the region on sites of 10 dwellings or more were built a densityof 30 dwellings per hectare (dph) or higher. This is a slight decrease on the 2006/07 figure of 87.1 per cent.

The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment (CABE) published the results of an audit of Buildingfor Life assessments in 2006. In the East Midlands over half the developments were assessed as ‘poor’. Noschemes were rated ‘good’, and only one rated ‘very good’.

Of the 19 local authorities who responded on the question of the number of Sustainable Drainage Schemes(SuDS) granted in 2007/08, there were 419 reported new domestic dwelling sites given planning permissionwhich were covered by a SuDs scheme, 349 of which were in Leicester. 12 business/industrial sites in theregion were also reported (by the 19 responding authorities) as being granted permission with a SuDS scheme.

The average dwelling completion rate over the 7 year period from 2001/02 to 2007/08 has been 18,907 dwellingsper annum for the region as a whole, with a 2007/08 net completions total of 20,548. If averaged over the whole25 year period the target for the East Midlands is 21,109 dwellings per annum. Coastal Lincolnshire, DerbyPeak & Dales and Peterborough (partial) HMAs all exceeded their average target during the period 2001/02to 2007/08.

In 2007/08, 15.7 per cent of new dwellings in the East Midlands were affordable compared with 11.0 per centin 2006/07. In 2007/08, figures returned for intermediate housing were 1,427, compared to 820 in 2006/07, and1,968 socially rented in 2007/08 compared with 1,552 in 2006/07. Whilst there has been an increase in theamount of affordable housing being built, rates will need to increase further in order to meet targets.


Executive Summary

Between the beginning of 2007 and the beginning of 2008 lower quartile house prices in most areas saw amuch smaller increase than in previous years or a decline. The average lower quartile house price for the firstquarter of 2008 was £109,971 in the East Midlands, similar to the first quarter of 2007, which was £110,000.This compares with a 9 per cent increase in the regional lower quartile house price between the first quartersof 2006 and 2007. The greatest fall in lower quartile house prices between the first quarters of 2007 and 2008was in Nottingham city where levels fell from £85,150 to £82,125.

Across the region the ratio of lower quartile house prices to earnings fell between 2007 and 2008. The mostaffordable area is Nottingham where lower quartile house prices were 5.9 times lower quartile income in 2008– the least affordable was Rutland with a ratio of 9.1.

Details were returned on a total of 819 permanent gypsy and traveler pitches in the region (51 of which werenew in 2007/08) and 108 temporary pitches (none new in 2007/08). 916 caravans were reported on unauthorisedencampments during 2007/08.

In 2007/08, 68.3 per cent of new dwellings were built on previously developed land (PDL), slightly down fromthe 2006/07 figure of 70.9 per cent. North Northamptonshire had the lowest proportion of new dwellings onPDL (44.6 per cent), whilst Nottingham Core HMA had the highest proportion (88.1 per cent).

According to CLG housing statistics, in the East Midlands in the third quarter of 2008, 2,330 dwellings werecompleted and 1,780 dwellings were started. These figures are a large decrease from the same quarter of2007, where 4,160 dwellings were completed and 4,070 were started. Between the third quarter of 2007 andthe third quarter of 2008 the number of dwellings completed in the East Midlands fell 44 per cent, whilst thenumber of dwellings started fell 56 per cent.

Economy

In July 2007 the Government published a review of sub-national economic development and regeneration (theSub-national Review or SNR) informed by the three principles of ensuring policy is managed at the right spatiallevel, ensuring clarity of roles and helping places to reach their potential. A consultation document entitled‘Prosperous Places: taking forward the review of the SNR’ was subsequently published on 31 March 2008setting out detailed proposals including the introduction of a Single Regional Strategy to replace existing regionaleconomic and spatial strategies.

Rates of benefit claiming are higher in all the ERDF areas than the averages for the East Midlands (13.0 percent) and England (13.5 per cent) in 2008. A total of 50.3 ha and 253,215 sqm of employment land and floorspacewere reported as developed in the ERDF districts during 2007/08.

Data from Neighbourhood Statistics on the changes in floorspace in the East Midlands shows that between2005/06 and 2006/07 retail, office and warehouse floorspace in the East Midlands increased by 1.3 per cent,1.1 per cent and 5.4 per cent respectively. These increases are all larger than those for England as whole.However, Factory floorspace decreased by 1.8 per cent between 2005/06 and 2006/07.

Data from local authorities reported that a total of 187.7 ha of employment land was developed during 2007/08.This compares with a figure of 259.1 ha in 2006/07. Total floorspace developed (732,444 square metres), wasslightly higher than the 2006/07 figure of 731,358 sqm. Also in 2007/08, 38.1 per cent of all sites were onpreviously developed land (PDL) – in 2006/07 this figure was 45.2 per cent. There were 2,793.8 ha of employmentland commitments in 2007/08, with the majority (82 per cent) for mixed employment use.

A total of 40.5 ha and 160,945 sqm of B8 floorspace was developed in the East Midlands during 2007/08 butnone could be classified as suitable for ‘strategic distribution’.

In 2007/08, 80 per cent of developed sites were accessible by public transport. Of the sites committed andunder construction, 66 per cent and 81 per cent were accessible by public transport respectively. These figuresare all higher than those for 2006/07.

The rental levels for all types of non residential property mostly declined or remained static between 2007 and2008.


Executive Summary

In 2007/08, 139,346 sqm of retail floorspace was developed, of which 107,304 sqm (77 per cent) was centrallylocated. There was a total of 135,468 sqm of retail floorspace under construction or committed, 76 per cent ofthis being in central locations.

In 2007/08, the development of a total of 19,605 sqm of leisure floorspace was completed. A further 31,966sqm was under construction and 10,969 sqm was committed.

During 2007/08 a 5,140 sqm casino was developed in a redundant retail store in Upper Parliament Street inNottingham city centre and a commitment exists for a 4,000 sqm casino as part of the Riverlights developmenton the site of the former bus station in Derby city centre.

The number of VAT registrations in the East Midlands has been increasing since 2004 (measured per 10,000population).

The Annual Business Inquiry (ABI) shows that there was a 3.3 per cent growth in jobs in the East Midlandsbetween 2006 and 2007.

The vast majority of the East Midlands has access to broadband, with 99.9 per cent having access in 2005.

Between 2006 and 2007 there was a small increase in the number of tourism related jobs in the upper tierauthorities in the East Midlands, although their proportion of all jobs remained unchanged at 7.5 per cent.

In November 2008 there were 72,724 people claiming jobseekers allowance in the East Midlands, an increaseof 20,172 (38 per cent) on the same month in 2007. Unemployment rates in November 2008 ranged from 0.8per cent in Rutland to 4.6 per cent in Leicester. The number of unemployed people in the counties of Derbyshireand Nottinghamshire rose by more than a 50 per cent. The cities of Leicester and Nottingham, whereunemployment was already higher, saw the smallest increases of 20 and 21 per cent respectively.

Environment

In September 2008, 93 per cent of the SSSI areas in the East Midlands were classed as favourable orunfavourable recovering, i.e. meeting the PSA requirements, compared with 83 per cent in England as a whole.

In 2008 there were 134 Grade I and II* buildings at risk in the East Midlands. This equates to 4.7 per cent ofall East Midlands’ Grade I and II* buildings.

East Midlands’ local authorities reported 1,082 conservation areas as of March 31st 2008. A quarter of thesehad an up-to-date published conservation area appraisal and 12 per cent had up-to-date published conservationarea management proposals. Many authorities stated that they were in the process of undertaking or developingfurther reviews/management proposals.

Only South Northamptonshire and West Lindsey have an adopted Green Infrastructure Strategy. A further 22local authorities are currently preparing Green Infrastructure Strategies.

Between 1994 and 2006 the population of all native birds showed an increase of 9 per cent, similar to thenational level.

According to the Forestry Commission, 496ha of new woodland was created in 2007/8, of which 73ha wasconiferous and 423ha was new native woodland.

As of March 2008, 34 (83 per cent) of local authorities have Landscape Character Assessments in place. Ofthese 17 (41 per cent of all authorities) include Historic Landscape Characterisation and 6 (15 per cent of allauthorities) have Landscape Character Assessment related Supplementary Planning Documents.

The Environment Agency made 81 objections to planning permissions on water quality grounds in 2006/07 inthe East Midlands. In 2007/08 there were a total of 54 objections, 25 of which were major and 29 minor.

1.6 per cent of river length in the East Midlands was of bad or poor biological quality in 2007; an improvementon the 2006 figure of 3.1 per cent. 71.2 per cent of river length was of good or very good quality and 27.1 percent fair or fairly good. Figures for chemical quality were similar with 3.3 per cent bad or poor, 21.8 per centfair or fairly good and 74.9 per cent good or very good.


Executive Summary

Lincolnshire County Council, along with the Environment Agency, emda, EMRA, GOEM and the Districts areconsidering the potential impact of flooding due to the failure and overtopping of sea defences. A coastalstrategy is being undertaken to advise on the strategic development of the coast and is expected to be completedin 2010. Stage 1 Part 1 was completed in August 2008.

In 2006, approximately 423,000 people (10 per cent of the total population of the region) were living in floodrisk areas, with over 352,000 of these in the highest risk areas. Around 211,000 properties (11 per cent of thetotal) were assessed as at risk of flooding, with 60,000 of these at significant risk.

As of March 2008, 26 authorities were wholly or partially covered by a Level 1 Strategic Flood Risk Asessment(SFRA) and 14 were wholly or partially covered by a Level 2 SFRA.

Total carbon dioxide emissions in the East Midlands in 2006 were 41 million tonnes, down from 43 milliontonnes in 2004.

Between 2005 and 2006 there was a fall in domestic energy consumption; electricity sales per domesticconsumer fell 2.4 per cent and gas 4.8 per cent. During the same period industrial gas consumption per consumerfell 2.3 per cent but industrial electrical consumption per consumer rose by 3.6 per cent.

Overall gas and electricity sales in the region for both industrial and domestic use fell between 2005 and 2006.Current annual consumption in the region is a total of 47,976 GWh of gas and 23,499 GWh of electricity.

The East Midlands is making considerable progress in generating electricity from renewable resources. In2003, approximately 433 GWhwere generated from renewable resources, compared to over 847 GWh in 2007,with a substantial increase in energy generated by wind power.

In 2005, there were 13,400 businesses in the creative industries employing 62,500 people throughout the EastMidlands.

Minerals, Aggregates & Waste

Overall rock and sand reserves fell between 2003 and 2007; Limestone and dolomite permitted reserves sawthe greatest fall, dropping 36 per cent from 2003 to 2007. Sales of rock, sand and gravel remained fairly constantover this period.

In 2007/08 planning permissions for a total of 15.7 million tonnes of sand and gravel extraction were grantedin the region.

Estimated production of recycled aggregate in the region in 2005 was 5.59 million tonnes, which is a 14 percent increase over 2003 figures. The amount disposed of as waste or sent to backfill quarry voids has alsoreduced since 2003. The recycled material was estimated to be 57 per cent of the construction, demolition andexcavation waste generated in the region, compared to 52 per cent nationally.

The existing capacity for re-use of waste accounts for 7 per cent of waste capacity (at 2005) and is expectedto rise to 20 per cent by 2020. The expectation for municipal solid waste (MSW) capacity is that it will movefrom 23 per cent being recycled in 2005 to 50 per cent being recycled by 2020. In 2007 the East Midlands hada total landfill capacity of 87,395 thousand cubic metres.

During 2007/08 the East Midlands produced a total of 2.4 million tonnes of municipal waste, 2.2 million tonnesof this was household waste; 168 thousand tonnes of this were generated at Civic Amenity sites. The amountof household waste collected per head varied from 418kg in Leicester to 530kg in Nottinghamshire.

In 2000/01, 78 per cent of the East Midland's municipal waste was disposed of via landfill. This has fallen to53 per cent in 2007/08. Levels of incineration have remained fairly constant at around 6 or 7 per cent of municipalwaste. The recycling and composting rate has increased from 15 per cent in 2000/01 to 40 per cent in 2007/08.In 2007/08 47 per cent of the East Midland's municipal waste is recycled or used to recover energy, comparedwith 45 per cent nationally. In 2007/08 the national household recycling rate was 34.5 per cent, the East Midlandsbeing the best performing region at 41.9 per cent. This figure represents a year on year increase from 13.1 percent in 2000/01.


Executive Summary

The percentage of people satisfied or fairly satisfied with the overall household waste collection service andtheir recycling facilities is collected for unitary authorities. Rutland had the highest satisfaction rate for wastecollection at 81 per cent. The highest satisfaction rate for recycling services (73 per cent) was in Derby City.

Construction and demolition waste data collected by Defra in 2005 shows that 9.8 million tonnes of constructionand demolition waste were produced in the region. 3.5 million tonnes of this (36 per cent) was disposed of orused in landfill.

In 2007 a total of 592 thousand tonnes of hazardous waste was deposited in the East Midlands. 246 thousandtonnes of this waste were recycled or re-used. 155 thousand tonnes went to landfill.

Transport

In 2007 traffic levels in the East Midlands were 41.7 million vehicle kilometres, a 1 per cent increase on the2006 figure. Between 2001 and 2007 minor rural roads saw the greatest increase, with traffic levels rising 15per cent. Traffic levels on urban A roads remained static over this period.

In the East Midlands region, 391 businesses and 1,468 schools now have travel plans (up from 356 and 1,179respectively in 2006/07). In the final quarter of 2007, 3 per cent of the East Midlands’ workforce travelled towork by bicycle. This figure has remained constant since the final quarter of 2006 and is the same as the nationallevel.

Two thirds of households have access to a peak time bus service with at least an hourly frequency between6am and 9am within a 250km walk. Only 14 per cent of households are within a 250m walk of a bus stop witha ten minute or better frequency between 6am and 9am.

Figures announced in autumn 2008 show average punctuality of passenger train services slightly up at 90.9per cent (from 89.1 per cent in the first quarter of 2007/08). 2007/08 saw a slight fall in bus journeys in theregion from 232 million in 2006/07 to 219 million. Light rail journeys (the Nottingham tram) remained constantat 10 million.

In 2007, 2,617 people were killed or seriously injured on East Midlands roads, a small increase form the 2006figure of 2,605. The number of people killed on East Midlands roads decreased from 329 in 2006 to 326 in2007.

In 2007/08, 34.5km of principal A and B roads were improved or constructed. 16.4km of these were inNorthamptonshire and 8.7km in Rutland. The proportion of principal road where maintenance should beconsidered varied from 1 per cent in Rutland to 8 per cent in Nottingham and Leicester cities.

The amount of freight lifted at East Midlands’ airports has been steadily increasing form 1993. In 2007, 275million tonnes of freight was lifted. Freight transported by road also saw a significant increase between 2006and 2007.

East Midlands Airport saw 61,500 aircraft movements in 2007. Passenger numbers increased by 15 per cent,with 5.4 million terminal passengers in 2007, compared with 4.7 million in 2006.

Sub-Areas

Urban Areas

The Regional Assembly will be continuing to refine a number of Regional Plan spatial definitions during 2009.This should help improve the monitoring of policies limited by the lack of clear geographic boundaries, includingpolicy 3 of the Regional Plan Proposed Changes Concentrating Development in Urban Areas.

Three Cities Sub Regional Strategy

In 2007/08 there were 10,081 new dwellings in the 3 Cities Sub-area. This is an increase on the 2006/07 figureof 9,421.

The proportion of population claiming a benefit is the same in the 3 Cities Sub-area as the East Midlands as awhole (13 per cent in February 2008). The 3 Cities Sub-area saw an increase of 2.6 per cent in the number ofjobs between 2006 and 2007.


Executive Summary

In 2007 the total retail floorspace in Nottingham, Derby and Leicester cities was 3,720 square metres. Thisfigure has remained relatively constant since 2001.

Pennbury and 3 possible sites in Rushcliffe - Newton/Bingham, Kingston and Cotgrave Place - are shortlistedas potential eco-town sites, with housing being build on green-belt land. A final decision on which sites aretaken forward is expected in Spring 2009.

Northern Sub Regional Strategy

Economic activity rates in the Northern Sub-area as a whole remained consistent between 2006 and 2007;Mansfield showed a significant increase in economic activity while Chesterfield and North East Derbyshire werethe only local authority areas to show a decrease.

The Northern Sub-area had a relatively high rate of working age residents claiming benefit in both 2006 and2008, although this period has shown an overall reduction of a similar size to that in the East Midlands andEngland as a whole.

The retail development in an out of centre location represents almost 50 per cent of the total recorded, not inline with regional or national policy.

Eastern Sub-area

The number of jobs in food production in the Eastern Sub-Area has remained virtually static.

Unemployment rates in Boston and South Holland increased from January 2008 to August 2008, in line withnational and regional trends. The exception to this is East Lindsey where the unemployment rate was 2.6 percent in January 2008 and 2.0 per cent in August 2008.

Production of a Coastal Strategy is currently underway and is expected to be completed in 2010. Stage 1 Part1 was completed in August 2008.

Lincoln Policy Area

2007/08 saw the completion of 976 dwellings in the Policy Area, with a total of 572 dwellings built on previouslydeveloped land. This amounts to 59 per cent of total new dwellings. This is an improvement on the figure of48.5 per cent in 2006/07.

During 2007/08, 11.6 ha of employment land was developed in the Lincoln Policy Area, creating 44 thousandsqm of floorspace. The majority, 10.4 ha (90 per cent) was on new build sites.

During 2007/08, 136 affordable dwellings were built in the Central Lincolnshire HMA. This is 7.5 per cent of alladditions to dwelling stock, considerably lower than the East Midlands average of 15.7 per cent.

A number of joint studies are looking at flood risk and water issues as part of the evidence base for the possibleJoint Core Strategy and the Lincoln Growth Point Programme of Delivery.

Peak Sub-area

Due to the unique status of the Peak National Park Authority, there is difficulty collecting some of the datarequired by the regional monitoring process. The Peak District National Park Authority is working with partnerstowards improving their databases as far as possible, particularly for the 2008/09 monitoring round.

The employment rate in the High Peak was 79.9 per cent; higher than the regional figure of 75.9 per cent. Theemployment rate in Derbyshire Dales was below the regional rate at 70.7 per cent, with a reduction from 76per cent in 2006, despite an increase in jobs in the area.

A total of 166 affordable houses were built in the Peak, Dales and Park HMA in 2007/08, 26.0 per cent of alladditions to dwelling stock. This is above the East Midlands average of 15.7 per cent.


Executive Summary

Chapter 1 Introduction1.1 This report presents the 2007/08 Annual Monitoring Report (AMR) for the East Midlands.

1.2 The East Midlands Regional Assembly commissioned Intelligence East Midlands (IEM) to work with itsofficers and Advisory Groups to produce this report commencing May 2008. The report is structured in 8 sectionsand each section presents the following:

Section 1: Introduction to the report, context for the AMR and key background information referring tothe collection of relevant data for this reportSection 2: Key Points and ActionsSection 3: HousingSection 4: Economy - covering employment, leisure and retail issuesSection 5: EnvironmentSection 6: Minerals, Aggregates and WasteSection 7: TransportSection 8: Sub Areas

1.3 For this AMR some of the tables and charts which provide supporting data have been included insupplementary data appendices for each topic at the back of Report. This should help to clarify the key messagesin the main topic chapters.

Context for the 2007/08 Annual Monitoring Report

1.4 Communities and Local Government (CLG) requires all Regional Planning Bodies (RPBs) to have robustmechanisms for monitoring and reviewing their Regional Plans (also known as Regional Spatial Strategies(RSS)). Now that Regional Plans have replaced Regional Planning Guidance (RPG), delivery will be througha wide range of other bodies. This presents further challenges, in particular the need to scrutinise policiesthrough a greater number of plans and strategies. A formal process has been developed for this to be done,particularly through the consultation arrangements for these plans and strategies.

1.5 The AMR is of crucial importance to the future of the Regional Plan. As the Regional Plan is implemented,it is only through monitoring and analysis of performance at the local level, through documents such as LocalDevelopment Frameworks, that an assessment can be made as to the degree to which the spatial strategy andpolicies have been realised. The AMR is a statutory document and a technical report and its value will furtherincrease in the years to come as indicators become standardised and consistently collected and data is builtup to allow trends over time to be recorded and analysed. Trends will give a clear indication of policy areas inwhich progress is being made and where intervention may be required.

1.6 The AMR needs to be prepared in a systematic and structured way. Wherever possible data within thereport relates to the 1 April to 31 March financial year. Some indicators are monitored on a regular basis andothers on a less frequent basis. This envisages some indicators being monitored annually and others beingmonitored on no less than a triennial basis.

1.7 The AMR should be prepared by the end of February of the following year to which it applies and ispublished following approval by the members of the Regional Housing, Planning & Transport Joint Board. It isthen circulated to all libraries and local authorities in the Region, the Government Office for the East Midlandsand partner organisations as appropriate.

The 2007/08 Annual Monitoring Report for the East Midlands

1.8 The East Midlands Regional Assembly, in its role as RPB, is required to produce an Annual MonitoringReport (AMR), which (for 2007/08) links with the East Midlands Regional Plan – Secretary of State’s ProposedChanges (July 2008) and measures the progress of policies contained within it. It is the Regional Plan (formerlyRPG/RSS8) that sets out a broad development framework for the East Midlands up to 2026. To translate theRegional Plan into a focused strategy, the Plan sets 11 objectives for the spatial development of the Region:


Chapter 1 . Introduction

Regional Core Objectives

Regional Core Objectives

To secure the delivery of sustainable development within the East Midlands, all strategies, plans andprogrammes should meet the following core objectives:

a) To ensure that the existing and future housing stock meets the needs of all communities in theregion.

b) To reduce social exclusion through:

the regeneration of disadvantaged areas,the reduction of inequalities in the location and distribution of employment, housing, health and othercommunity facilities and services, and by;responding positively to the diverse needs of different communities.

c) To protect and enhance the environmental quality of urban and rural settlements to make themsafe, attractive, clean and crime free places to live, work and invest in, through the:

promotion of ‘green infrastructure’;enhancement of the ‘urban fringe’;involvement of Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnerships; andpromotion of high quality design which reflects local distinctiveness.

d) To improve the health and mental, physical and spiritual well being of the Region’s residentsthrough improvements in:

air quality;‘affordable warmth’;the availability of good quality housing; andaccess to health, cultural, leisure and recreation facilities & services.

e) To improve economic prosperity, employment opportunities and regional competitivenessthrough:

the improvement of access to labour and markets; andensuring that sufficient good quality land and premises are available to support economic activity insectors targeted for growth by the Regional Economic Strategy.

f) To improve accessibility to jobs, homes and services through the:

promotion and integration of opportunities for walking and cycling;promotion of the use of high quality public transport; andencouragement of patterns of new development that reduce the need to travel especially by car.

g) To protect and enhance the environment through the:

protection, enhancement, sensitive use and management of the Region’s natural resources, givingparticular attention to designated sites of European importance, and cultural and historic assets;avoidance of significant harm and securing adequate mitigation or compensation for any unavoidabledamage;reducing the amount of waste produced and increasing the amount recycled or otherwise beneficiallymanaged; andrecognition of the limits to the capacity of the environment to accept further development withoutirreversible damage.



h) To achieve a ‘step change’ increase in the level of the Region’s biodiversity through:

the management and extension of habitats, both to secure net gains in biodiversity and to facilitatespecies migration to allow the biosphere to adapt to climate change; andensuring that no net loss of priority habitats or species is allowed to occur.

i) To reduce the causes of climate change by minimising emissions of C02 in order to meet thenational target through:

maximising ‘resource efficiency’ and the level of renewable energy generation;making best use of existing infrastructure;promoting sustainable design and construction; andensuring that new development, particularly major traffic generating uses, is located so as to reducethe need to travel, especially by private car.

j) To reduce the impacts of climate change, in particular the risk of damage to life and propertyfrom flooding and sea level change and the decline in water quality and resources. This will beachieved through the location, design and construction of new development in ways that include:

reducing the build up of heat island effects in urban areas;providing carbon sinks; andproviding sustainable drainage and managing flood water.

k) To minimise adverse environmental impacts of new development and promote optimum socialand economic benefits through the promotion of sustainable design and construction techniques.

1.9 The Regional Plan outlines priorities for both urban and rural communities. It is important to note thatthe core strategy within the Regional Plan provides a framework for meeting the Region’s development needsin a way that promotes sustainable patterns of development. It contains detailed policies in respect of theRegion’s 5 Sub-areas (Eastern, Northern, Peak, Southern and the Three Cities) to provide a context for theRegional Plan and more detailed Sub-Regional Spatial Strategies covering the Milton Keynes and SouthMidlands, Three Cities and Northern Sub-Regional Strategy areas as well as the Lincoln Policy Area.

1.10 The framework of Regional Plan indicators and their relationship to the Plan’s policies and core objectivesare listed in the Implementation Plans at Appendices 1 of parts 1 and 2 of the draft Regional Plan (September2006) and progress against these policies is summarised in the next chapter of this AMR and at the start ofeach section to which they apply. These indicators include the Core Output Indicators for Regional Planningdrawn up by CLG in conjunction with RPBs. Other core indicators have been identified, many of which arealready collected and established by local authorities, regional partner organisations or Government agencies.Where indicators do not provide a direct measure of a Regional Plan policy but provide background informationthese are referred to as CONTEXTUAL indicators. This classification of indicators as: Regional CORE, RSSCORE and CONTEXTUAL has been helpful in achieving universal support in the Region for the monitoringtask ahead. A number of indicators have also been identified as measuring the significant effects of policies.Monitoring significant effects enables a comparison to be made between the predicted effects and the actualeffects measured during implementation of Regional Plan policies.

1.11 It should be noted that no implementation plan was included in the Secretary of States ProposedChanges. Instead a freestanding implementation plan will shortly be drawn up by the Regional Planning Bodyand updated annually as a freestanding document to reflect progress on the key initiatives and infrastructureprojects required to deliver the Regional Plan. Therefore, for 2007/08 the draft Implementation Plan has againbeen used, updated to take into account CLG revised core output indications which were published in July2008 as well reference to new or amended policies in the Proposed Changes.

1.12 An Annual Monitoring Statement (AMS) or Report (AMR) has been produced since March 2003; thisbeing the seventh such report. Each AMR has attempted to record the situation for the appropriate RegionalPlanning Guidance or Regional Spatial Strategy, although where possible the monitoring framework is keptconsistent with earlier rounds to ensure continuity and the ability to monitor trends over time. Despite this, insome instances comparisons with earlier year’s facts and figures may not always be possible.



1.13 To produce the 2007/08 AMR, Intelligence East Midlands worked in conjunction with the East MidlandsRegional Monitoring and Review Advisory Group and have undertaken the following tasks:

Collection of Local Authority data using the regional on-line monitoring system ‘ EMRA cdpvision’ (para.1.19). Five sets of data were returned on-line by local planning authorities, county councils or unitaryauthorities (covering housing, economy, environment, minerals and waste and transport). County Councilssupported their district councils by checking data submitted to ensure consistency between districts acrosseach county;Collection of non-local authority data through consultation, interrogation and collation of national andregional data sets;Further development of a comprehensivemanagement information database. IEM has designed, developedand completed a database to capture all local and non-local authority monitoring information relating tothe Regional Plan. This will be integrated with the on-line datasets in the coming months.

1.14 Due to differing data collection arrangements around the Region, collecting consistent data from the39 district/city and 6 county councils, plus the Peak District National Park Authority, has proved challenging forall involved. Data which was initially believed to be available from regional or national sources has alsooccasionally been difficult to collect. Experience also showed that the timeliness and availability of some datawas not satisfactory. In addition the relevance of some indicators to policies remains doubtful, either becauseof policy wording or the tenuous link between the two. These matters continue to be addressed as the processmoves forward year on year. Key issues surrounding data are summarised in the relevant sections of the report.

The Impact of the Credit Crunch

1.15 Traditionally, the AMR has presented data in the reporting year with only passing reference to informationrelevant to the current year. There are many reasons for this; not least that accurate data for most topics is notavailable in the current year. However, with the credit crunch having taken a grip in the current (2008/9) financialyear it is likely that there has been a sea change in many of the datasets underpinning the AMR and regionalpolicy analysis. Many readers will be interested in the impact this will have had on trends in the AMR, particularlywithin the sections of the Report covering housing and the economy.

1.16 Despite the fact that regional spatial policy looks to the long term, clearly the implications of this changerequire commenting on. Without doing so this year’s AMR would risk becoming a document that is shelvedprior to reading due to perceived irrelevance.

1.17 As the next East Midlands Regional Plan is due to be adopted in 2009 and a further partial review isalready underway, the AMR needs to assess current policy performance in the light of the credit crunch. Thiswill help identify existing policies requiring review.

1.18 In addition, the credit crunch is likely to have an impact on the type of monitoring that is required. FutureAMRs will need to change monitoring practices to pick up the impacts of the credit crunch on regional policyand examine the success of measures put in place to address the downturn in the economy.

1.19 The key data sets most relevant to the credit crunch are those related to housing and the economy. Asstated above there is a lack of accurate current year data. However, there are some datasets that have beenincluded in this AMR as leading indicators, for example quarterly dwelling completions presented by the CLGstarts and completions data set.

EMRA cdpvision

1.20 The Regional Assembly appointed Creative Database Projects (now CDPSoft) in November 2006 todeliver a full Regional Plan monitoring system based on its cdpvision software product that enables the RegionalAssembly to meet the following general objectives:

Reduce cost, time and effort associated with monitoring the Regional Plan and submitting the AnnualMonitoring Report;Provide valuable, mutually beneficial processes and information at all levels from local authorities to theRegion;Increase the quality of the data and information and provide a valuable and growing knowledge asset;Improve the scope for querying, analysis and reporting;



Provide a ‘one stop shop’ for information and resources relating to the Regional Plan;Reduce the need for dual data entry and administration;Provide a strong foundation for the further evolution of regional monitoring and other cross functionalmonitoring, analysis and reporting.

1.21 Since 2007 Regional Monitoring Seminars are now held each summer. The 2007 and 2008 events haveincluded demonstrations of EMRA cdpvision to regional monitoring officers. The events were well attended byat least one delegate from the majority of local authorities across the East Midlands and provided an opportunityto raise any questions or concerns about the system or the annual monitoring process in general.

1.22 EMRA cdpvisionwent live on 8 August 2007. Districts, counties and unitary authorities have now enteredtheir 2006/07 and 2007/08 monitoring returns through the system via the internet, which also allowed accessto previous data and reports the system generates.

1.23 The Assembly continues to work with CDPSoft to ensure the system is further developed as far aspossible to meet the full recommended specification. This includes a proposed enhancement to GIS functionality,enabling GIS reporting and analysis from within the cdpvision system. CDPSoft are also working on a publicwebsite enabling anyone to view previous returns and run reports. CDPSoft will also enhance the approach todata transfer by creating an automated XML/CSV generator for each worksheet within cdpvision.

The Seamless Digital Chain

1.24 CDPSoft and the Assembly are also working with each county group (including the city and districtcouncils) to bring into fruition the strategic vision of a seamless digital monitoring chain whereby data storedlocally will be easily transferable to the counties and up to the region i.e. omitting the need to re-enter the samedata. The Assembly has reached an agreement with CDPSoft to achieve a seamless digital chain for the nextround of monitoring for each county group that wishes to participate, either through their own existing monitoringsystems or through a local version of cpdvision called cdpsmart. This process will also deliver a system thatdistricts can use for all of their planning/land use monitoring, analysis and reporting requirements for the RegionalPlan, LDF AMR, Community Strategy, County Return, ad-hoc queries etc. as well as removing the administrationburden of monitoring returns (such as the Regional Plan AMR).

EMRA cdpvision in the National Land Use Database Scoping Study

1.25 This major report published in September 2008 provides a detailed review of the National Land UseDatabase of Previously Developed Land (NLUD-PDL). Commissioned by English Partnerships and carried outby Kingston University, the research is based on a wide range of stakeholder interviews, workshops and surveys.A number of key recommendations to improving NLUD-PDL are put forward. One recommendation of theReport was to assess the costs and benefits of polygon data transfer and access by public bodies to planningpipeline data by looking at how EMRA cdpvision and cdpsmart in Derbyshire have begun to achieve seamlessflows of data from the county system up to the Regional Assembly.

Notes on Geography used in the Report

Peak District National Park

1.26 The boundaries of the Peak District National Park extend beyond the boundaries of Derbyshire into theWest Midlands, North West and Yorkshire & Humberside Standard Government Regions. The Regional SpatialStrategy covers the whole of the East Midlands including the part of the Peak National Park outside of Derbyshire.Wherever possible data provided in this report covers this area. However, this is not always possible and unlessstated otherwise the following apply:



Data collected directly from local authorities via cdpVision

1.27 This includes the whole of the Peak District National Park. In these tables Derbyshire refers to the partof Derbyshire which excludes the Peak Park and the East Midlands refers to the whole RSS spatial area andnot the standard government definition of the East Midlands.

1.28 The exception to this is Transport data which is collected for Local Transport Plan (LTP) areas. TheDerbyshire LTP area only includes the part of the Peak Park in Derbyshire.

Data collected from other sources

1.29 Themajority of data collected from other sources is based on district/county authorities whose boundariesare not congruent with those of the Peak Park. Whenmentioned in the document Derbyshire refers to the wholecounty and the East Midlands figures will only include the part of the Peak Park which is in Derbyshire.

Hucknall in Ashfield District

1.30 This year data collected via the cdpVision system split the Ashfield district into ‘the four wards of Hucknall’and ‘the rest of Ashfield’. Ashfield district is split across two sub-areas; Hucknall is in the Three Cities sub-areawhilst ‘the rest of Ashfield’ is in the Northern sub-area. Data presented in the housing chapter includes thewhole of Ashfield in the Nottingham Core HMA whilst data in the sub areas chapter splits Ashfield.

Data Collection Issues

1.31 Out of the 5 key sections of EMRA cdpvision which were completed by Local Planning Authoritiesbetween August and October 2008, a very good response rate was achieved, with all local authorities makinga return. However, not all local authorities were able to fully complete all sections of each return, particularlywhere new indicators reflecting new areas of policy had been developed e.g. little data was collected on newhomes developed to lifetime homes or BREEAM standards. Continuing joint working between the Assemblyand theMonitoring & Review and other RSS Advisory Groups is ensuring the indicator framework is strengthenedand where not already in place, arrangements can be made at the appropriate level to collect the information.

1.32 The report has also benefited from comments received during the following Advisory Group Meetingsattended by IEM:

Spatial Economy Advisory GroupEnvironment Advisory GroupHousing Advisory GroupRegional Technical Advisory Body on WasteMonitoring and Review Advisory GroupTransport Advisory Group

1.33 In addition, key partners who provided data included:

The Environment AgencyNatural EnglandEnglish HeritageThe Forestry CommissionEast Midlands Development AgencyEast Midlands Local AuthoritiesDepartment for Environment Food and Rural AffairsDepartment for Transport



Symbols used in the Report

1.34 The following symbols are used within the implementation charts at the beginning of each topic chapterto summarise progress being made on each Regional Plan policy:

Key to symbols

Moving in right direction or towards target

No significant change

Moving in wrong direction or away from target

Insufficient data



Chapter 2 Key Points and ActionsINTRODUCTION

2.1 A key requirement of a regional monitoring report is to assess the progress made in the policy areascontained within the Regional Plan and to identify actions required to address any shortcomings. This sectionconsiders the principal key points and actions resulting from them.

2.2 Included in this section are:

Key points and actions for this (2007/8) monitoring reportProgress on actions arising from previous monitoring reportsReport on the conformity of plans, local development frameworks and significant development applicationswith the Regional Spatial StrategyProgress with the Review of the Regional Plan

Key Points and Actions from this monitoring report

2.3 The key points below are selected from later sections.

SECTION 3 HOUSING

ActionsKey Points

With the implementation of Strategic HousingMarketAssessments and the further development of theplanning framework, increased targets in most areas

Overall the total number of affordable dwellingscompleted in 2007/08 was half the annual averagerequired by Policy 14. It is, however, a significantincrease on the previous year, reflecting a more robustpolicy framework, backed by local evidence.

give scope for higher proportions of affordablehousing to be delivered on sites in future. In theshort term, however, current market conditions willhave an impact on scheme viability, whichparticularly affects affordable housing securedthrough Section 106 agreements.

Improved monitoring of energy efficiency, design,(Building for Life) and SuDs needs to receive muchhigher priority in future. To assist with this localauthorities need more training and advice on thenew standards and on data sources.

Although the Code for Sustainable Homes becamemandatory in May 2008, it was not included in thenational Core Output Indicators published in July 2008.In contrast these did include a new design indicator,Building for Life, on which training is yet to be providedto local authorities. The lack of Government guidanceso far on both is a concern. Their challenging target ofnew housing being zero carbon by 2016 will not be metunless the data is recorded in the first place.

The Regional Assembly and its partners will monitorthe effects of the credit crunch and take it intoaccount along with longer term trends during the

The dwelling completion rate in 2007-08 for the regionas a whole remained above the longer term average,although a little below the RSS Proposed Changes

Partial Review of the Regional Plan. Trajectoriesannual average target, and did not yet reflect the impactand emerging plans for the Growth Areas andof the credit crunch. Coastal Lincolnshire, Derby, Peak

& Dales and Peterborough Partial HMAs all exceededtheir average target during the period 2001 to 2008.

Growth Points in the region demonstrate thepotential to respond to an upturn in the market inthe medium term.


Chapter 2 . Key Points and Actions

ActionsKey Points

The Regional Housing Group will co-ordinating awide range of actions being taken to support thehousing sector during the current economicdownturn. This includes the supply of public sectorland for development.

The English Regions Network Monitoring Group (onwhich the Regional Assembly is represented) isworking with CLG to provide more consistent

Although housing trajectories are a Regional CoreIndicator, producing one for the region on a consistentbasis has been a considerable challenge due to the need

guidance and examples of best practice on housingto combine data and forecasts used in over 40 localauthority trajectories which have different time periodsand may interpret CLG guidance in different ways.

trajectories. Local authorities are now more awareof the need to contribute data and forecasts toregional and HMA trajectories to 2026 in futureyears.

SECTION 4 ECONOMY

ActionsKey Points

Future AMRs will need to report in detail upon theexpected widespread repercussions and implicationsof “The Credit Crunch” for the regional economy.

The 2007/08 AMR pre-dates the current economicclimate of “The Credit Crunch”.

Continued action is required to resolve fully the fewremaining issues related to cdpvision, as well as toprogress delivery of the ‘seamless digital chain’.Particular attention needs to be paid to the resolutionof outstanding retail data issues.

The recently introduced EMRA cdpvision monitoringsystem continues to improve the effectiveness andreliability of the data collection and reporting process.

Future AMRs will need to report in detail upon theimplications of changes arising from the SNR, and inparticular, from the introduction of the SRS.

The Government is moving ahead with its proposedreview of sub-national economic development andregeneration (SNR) including the introduction of aSingle Regional Strategy (SRS).

Development of targets and indicators for all policieswithin the Economy section should be completed assoon as possible.

Targets and indicators for some policies within theEconomy section have still to be fully developed.

Completion of Employment Land Reviews at HMA orSub-area level (as advocated by Policy 20) remainsa priority, together with the need to consider theconsistency of methodology and compatibility offindings of those that have already been completed.

Completion of outstanding Employment Land Reviewsacross the Region was identified as a Key Action inthe previous AMR and whilst several of these havenow been undertaken, some are at individual authoritylevel only.



SECTION 5 ENVIRONMENT

ActionsKey Points

Defra has set milestone targets nationally for eachyear to 2010, in order to achieve its aims.

While across the Region we are nearing the nationaltarget for the condition for SSSIs there is an increasingneed to consolidate efforts to date if we are to avoid

Particular efforts need to be made in achievingfavourable condition status in Moorland andWoodlandSSSI and on the Wash SSSI.

a downward turn. The achievement of Moorland andWoodland SSSI favourable condition targets areproving challenging as are targets for The Wash.

Further significant region-wide positive change in thefarmland bird index is not likely to happen until therehas been widespread implementation of the newagri-environment schemes.

The population of both farmland and woodland birdscontinue to fluctuate in their recorded populations.

The successor to Defra's Countryside Stewardshipagri-environment scheme, the Entry and Higher Levelof the Environmental Stewardship scheme, has beenimplemented, with particularly high rates of take-upcompared to other regions; these will show biodiversitybenefits over time.

The Regional Forestry Framework for the EastMidlands; ‘Space4trees’ will guide the future work ofthe Forestry Commission and its partners in theRegion.

The figure for woodland creation is once againsignificant but falls well short of the rate required tomeet the target set out in the RSS.

The existing indicator, whilst acting as a very usefulfirst step towards gaining a better understanding ofthe Region’s diverse landscapes, needs to be refinedand further more meaningful indicators developed.

LandscapeCharacter Assessment coverage continuesto make progress across the Region but there are stillgaps in coverage at the county and district level.

There is a need for criteria based policies in LocalDevelopment Documents andSupplementary PlanningDocuments (SPDs). Work has been done in theRegion to develop detailed SPDs for use byDevelopment Control Officers. This work needsreplicating more widely.

Efforts should be made to integrate County historiclandscape characterisations into local landscapecharacter assessments.

It is therefore even more important that anunderstanding of the historic environment resource ispart of the evidence base for LDFs; landscape andurban characterisation are tools that can contribute tothis understanding.

There has been a slight increase in the numbers oflisted buildings at risk and there is emerging evidencethat designated sites will be adversely affected bygrowth proposals.



ActionsKey Points

The Region’s response to the EU Water FrameworkDirective will be led by the Environment Agency andwill be worked out over the coming months and years.

Studies by EMRA as part of the development of therevised RSS have shown that the Region will be shortof water in the future if measures are not taken toreduce water use, particularly in new developments.

The EU Water Framework Directive will continue tobe a key driver for the protection and improvement ofthe water environment for the next 25 years, with itscentral concept of integrated water resourcemanagement for water basins.

Progress is beingmade on undertaking Strategic FloodRisk Assessments, which are the responsibility of localauthorities; the role of the Environment Agency inthese studies, as set out in PPS25, needs to beestablished in each case.

A significant number of Strategic Flood RiskAssessments have either been undertaken, or areplanned, to better understated and respond todevelopment proposals in relation to flood risk.

SuDS still appears to be an issue that does not engagelocal authorities. Action is required to ensure increasedimplementation through the Regional Plan.

While improving the number supplying figures onSustainable Drainage Schemes (SuDS) is low andagain while increasing the number of planningpermission granted for developments which containingSuDS waas not as high as it should be given the clearRSS policy.

Indicators will need to be developed and workcontinued to spread the common understanding ofthe GI concept and good practice.

The understanding and use of the Green Infrastructureconcept and of the RSS policy, is growing in theregion. Suitable indicators for the new GreenInfrastructure policy do not yet exist.

The Region has seen much increased interest in winddevelopment, including development of the firstoffshore turbines in the region and the number of

The East Midlands is making considerable progressin generating electricity from renewable resources,with a substantial increase in energy generated bywind power. installations is expected to increase markedly in the

next year. The 2010 target of 122MW onshore windseems likely to be met, but there is still someway togo to the 2020 target. Lincolnshire remains the mainfocus for development, but other areas of the regionare beginning to see activity.

SECTION 6 MINERALS, AGGREGATES & WASTE

ActionsKey Points

National draft guidelines for aggregate provisionpublished for consultation in April 2008, rolling forwardthe guidelines to 2020, proposed a fall in aggregate

The Regional Plan Proposed Changes continues toreflect the national requirements for aggregateprovision as the East Midlands is the largest supplier

requirements. These guidelines are awaitingof aggregates in England. Sales of aggregates havebeen fairly constant and remain below theapportionment figure.

finalisation. Any review of the RSS will need to takethese into account on advice from the EMRAWP. In



ActionsKey Points

the meantime, the current apportionment remains inplace for the purposes of forward planning andmonitoring.

It is important for MPAs to continue their efforts tomake progress in bringing forward their developmentplans in line with the RSS.

Permitted reserves of aggregates have also fallenover the past few years. Whilst the landbank forcrushed rock still remains relatively high, sand andgravel reserves have dipped over the past year;reserves remain adequate but will need carefulmonitoring. Sand and gravel resources serve localmarkets and are susceptible to local market conditions.

Needs to progress to ensure facilities to manage thewaste in the Region come forward.

The progress to sustainable waste management isencouraging. Planning permissions saw an additionalcapacity of about 160,000 municipal waste treatmentbeing planned to be brought forward towards a targetof treating a forecasted 840,000 tonnes by 2020.

It is important that the Region and WPAs engage withthat process to ensure that the spatial dimension ofthat procurement is properly addressed to enablesuitable site to come forward.

The procurement of municipal waste facilities acrossthe Region is stimulating interest in the waste industryand commercial sector since the security of a longterm contract has the potential to satisfy the widerwaste types if facilities are developed sufficientlyflexibly enough to cater for other types of waste.

WPAs should continue to make sufficient provision intheir DPDs for these types of facilities. It is importantthat WPAs make every effort to progress their DPDsto adoption.

As a proxy for meeting targets the rate of developmentof merchant waste treatment capacity needs toincrease if the anticipated capacity gap is to be closed.

SECTION 7 TRANSPORT

ActionsKey Points

The Ptolemy model is being extended across theregion to test the impacts from traffic generated fromnew development and to assess the effect of

There is a need for the closer alignment between landuse and transportation policies.

alternative transport measures. The Assembly will usethe results of this work to inform the current review ofthe RTS.

Local Planning and Transport Authorities shouldensure that where required travel plans are provided,monitored and enforced.

Company and school travel plans are not alwayseffective in achieving modal shift.



ActionsKey Points

During 2009 local authorities should take a view onhow they wish to approach the new opportunitiesprovided by the Act.

The Local Transport Act 2008 allows local authoritiesto review the effectiveness and efficiency ofgovernance in their area and has the potential toachieve a step change in providing integrated publictransport.

The Regional Assembly, along with emda and localauthority partners will closely monitor progress to tryand ensure the scheme’s timetable is met and costsdo not overrun.

DfT have announced additional support towards halfthe cost of the A46 Newark to Widmerpool scheme.This will enable work on the scheme to start during2009.

SECTION 8 SUB-AREAS

ActionsKey Points

Urban areas

The Assembly will work with the PUA and SRCauthorities to identify spatial boundaries to assist inthe monitoring of Policy 3.

The lack of spatial definitions continues to presentbarriers to monitoring a number of policies in theRegional Plan.


The Regional Housing Group will co-ordinating a widerange of actions being taken to support the housingsector during the current economic downturn. Thisincludes the supply of public sector land fordevelopment.

As elsewhere there has been a marked reduction innew housing starts and completions in the Sub-areaas a result of the credit crunch.


The Northern Sub-Region Employment Land Studywill help emda , local authorities and the SSP respondto the economic downturn by ensuring the right landis available to meet the needs of local business andthose wishing to invest in the area.

Although the Sub-area showed modest signs ofimproved economic performance prior to the creditcrunch, the economy remains vulnerable during theeconomic downturn.

Eastern Sub Regional Strategy

The Assembly in conjunction with Lincolnshire CountyCouncil will undertake to review all indicators for theSub-area during 2009.

Many of the indicators e.g. for Policy 4 do not give acomplete picture of development in the Sub-area.

Lincoln Policy Area

A definition of ‘central Lincoln’ has been agreed andboundary map provided to the Assembly to assistmonitoring in the Policy Area. It is also hoped to agreethe definition of the Lincoln PUA before the 2008/09monitoring round.




ActionsKey Points

A Sub-Regional Housing Strategy for Lincolnshire willlook at the reasons for the low level of affordablehousing developed and how it might be increased tomeet the HMA target.

The development of affordable housing in the centralLincolnshire HMA is well below the regional average.

The Assembly in conjunction with Lincolnshire CountyCouncil will undertake to review all indicators for thePolicy Area during 2009.

Many of the indicators e.g. for Policies LPA SRS 6and LPA SRS 11 do not give a complete picture ofprogress in the Sub-area.

Peak Sub-area

The Assembly will work with the Peak District NationalPark Authority and district councils to clarify the ‘outof Peak’ boundary to assist in the monitoring of Policy9


Progress on actions arising from previous monitoring reports:

2.4 Key points and Actions arising from earlier reports that warrant further report and comment and are notincluded in this section are:

2006/07 Report Actions

UpdateAction identified

This work is underway. The Assembly has developeda good working relationship with the NPHAU and workis ongoing.

The Regional Assembly and emda are engaging withthe National Planning and Housing Advisory Unit torefine their research into the total housing provision,mix of housing types and other measures needed toaddress long-term affordability.

This is being picked up by joint work being undertakenby local authorities in HMAs, with either joint SHLAAsbeing undertaken or shared methodologies beingused.

Despite targets currently being met, consistentlyachieving the 60 per cent target for developing housingon PDL is considered challenging, because of thesignificant increase in the pace of housingdevelopment envisaged by the Regional PlanProposed Changes which will inevitably involve agreater proportion of development on greenfield sites.This needs to be recognised in interpretingyear-on-year monitoring. Strategic Housing LandAvailability Assessments (SHLAA) will greatly assistcontinued monitoring.

ERDF districts are used in the 2007/08 AMR as broadproxies for areas of relative regeneration priority,pending the Government's response to theconsultation on the draft Framework for Regenerationand subsequent dialogue within the region to identify

Working through the Spatial Economy Advisory Group,EMRA, emda and local authority partners should agreea definition before the next round of monitoring, takinginto account areas eligible for ERDF funding and therecently updated Index of Multiple Deprivation.

regeneration priority areas, which are likely to beat adetailed local or even neighbourhood level.



UpdateAction identified

A Study by Hallam Consultants looking at futureindicators to monitor environmental capacity reportedin December 2008. A number of new local authority

Indicators to measure a number of key environmentalpolicies had not been developed e.g. Greeninfrastructure, priority habitats and species.

indicators introduced for 2007/08 have begun toaddress some of the gaps in monitoring RSS policieson the environment e.g. biodiversity on designatedsites. This work is ongoing.

All Local Authorities are making good progress withLDF development. Issues such as additional wastegeneration from development are included.

Irrespective of progress in preparing Waste LDFs it isimportant for WPAs to ensure that the wasteconsequences arising out of proposals (e.g.sustainable housing, employment and othercommercial activities) contained in local developmentdocuments are addressed.

Future increases in bus patronage may besubstantially due to the introduction of concessionaryfares in 2008.

Whilst the increase in bus and light rail patronage iswelcome, in the context of regional policies and targetsit needs to be seen where this increase is comingfrom, in particular whether car drivers who previouslytravelled by car are now using public transport;understanding this will inform the implementation ofRegional Plan policies.

New indicators were developed for 2007/08 – lengthof principal A and B roads improved or constructed;and NI indicators - principal and non-principal roadsin LTP authority control where maintenance shouldbe considered.

Alternative measures to the accident reduction targetneed to be developed by the Regional Assembly inconjunction with DfT before the next round of annualmonitoring to monitor trunk road investment.

This work has yet to commence. It will now beundertaken in 2009 as part of the work to develop animplementation plan as part of the Regional Planpartial review.

The Assembly will work with Lincoln City, the districtcouncils and Lincolnshire County Councils to developor refine targets and indicators for the next round ofannual monitoring e.g. sub-regional target for trafficflows.

LDF preparation work is using the Employment LandReview to look at future employment land provision,the nature of potential provision and market response.

Following the publication of the Northern sub-regionalemployment land study, local authority and otherpartners should take action to increase thesustainability and attractiveness of the mostappropriate sites whilst reducing over-provision.



Update of actions in earlier reports

UpdateAction Identified

Progress towards the renewables targets hasimproved. On shore wind has increased significantlyand other renewables, such as biomass, are starting

The region has challenging targets for renewableenergy generation and there is uncertainty that alltargets will be met (2005/06 monitoring report).

to have some traction in the system. Micro-generationalso looks set to increase significantly as theinstruments, such code for sustainable homes andnew fiscal measures, like feed in tariffs, begin to havean influence.

The 6Cs have decided not to pursue road usercharging in the 3 cities area in the near future.Nottingham is continuing to progress implementationof a Work Place Parking Levy and its impact will bemonitored.

Existing actions are not achieving significant reductionin the rate of traffic growth. Other measures like roaduser charging and parking levies need to beinvestigated (2005/06 monitoring report).

The Regional Assembly has recently carried out aprioritisation exercise as part of the second round ofRegional Funding Allocations. This involved

The Regional Assembly consider that it is the jointremit of Local Transport Authorities, the Departmentfor Transport and the Assembly to demonstrate that

discussions with local authorities, stakeholders andnew regional trunk road highway capacity is beingplanned and managed in the most effective way(2005/06 monitoring report).

DfT to resolve how major schemes on the A46 andA453 trunk roads could be funded. Future prioritieson the regional and cities networks will be consideredas part of DfT’s proposed Delivering a SustainableTransport System (DaSTS) investigations.

Monitoring of retail and leisure sites through EMRAcdpvision has improved substantially since 2004/05.However, a number of local authorities have not

Local Authorities are urged to put in place systemsand practices to ensure that the sequential locationof proposed and developed retail and leisure facilities

committed the same level of resources for monitoringretail and leisure development as compared withemployment or housing monitoring.

can be reported upon in future AMRs. Information fromnational sources such as the Valuation Office will beused to enhance the information on majordevelopments already collected through local planningauthorities (2004/5 monitoring report).

National data on carbon emissions has improvedsignificantly and has been back calculated to showtrends. In addition there is a new indicator NI186 that

The Region should look at identifying a wider rangeof indicators to better monitor the overall progresstowards reduced carbon emissions. The provision ofbetter quality data by DTI will aid this process (2004/5monitoring report).

measures a per capita carbon emission at district level,with local large sources of carbon (i.e. those engagedin the EUETS) removed. This allows better comparisonand reduces distortion.

Regional inventories have helped to identify areas oflarge potential savings.

This was added to EMRA cdpvision for 2007/08.The Assembly should consider monitoring thecoverage of Historic Landscape CharacterisationStudies. There is also a need to consider an indicator



UpdateAction Identified

which stems from the detailed Landscape CharacterAssessments that are being prepared across theregion and used to assess characteristic changes inlandscape as well as informing the targeting of regionallandscape enhancement opportunities. This may beby way of the conformity role of the Assembly (2004/5monitoring report).

The Environment Agency and WPA’s hold recordswith regards to restoration of mineral workings. Thiscan be factored into future monitoring cycles.

Information on the restoration of mineral workings isnot collected by either the mineral planning authoritiesor the Regional Aggregates Working Party (RAWP).This needs to be addressed for future monitoringcycles (2004/5 monitoring report).

The Government has moved significantly onsupporting renewables, with new RenewableObligations Certificates (ROC) arrangements and

From the monitoring of progress on the regionaltargets for renewable energy, it has been concludedthat if the regional targets are to be met new legislation

improvements in the internal market. High energyor the scrapping of New Electricity Tradingprices have further improved the market for renewableArrangements (NETA), and additional financial

incentives are required in the very near future (2004/5monitoring report).

energy. Further financial incentives are now in thepipeline and likely to come forward over the next twoyears. The adoption of the 15 per cent EU renewableenergy target and the New Climate Change Actrequiring 80 per cent CO 2 reductions are puttingincreasing impetus on delivery of low carbontechnologies.

Report on the conformity of plans, Local Development Frameworks and significantdevelopment applications with the Regional Spatial Strategy

2.5 The Development Control Provisions of the Planning and Compensation Act 2004 came into force onthe 24 August 2005 and consequently the Regional Assembly became a statutory consultee on certain typesof major planning applications from the perspective of conformity with the Regional Spatial Strategy. TheRegional Assembly is required to report to CLG on a regular basis the number of applications received and thenumber responded to within the 21 day period.

2.6 However, it has been found that planning applications of regional significance are, almost by definition,large and complex and it is not always possible to form a properly considered response within three weeks.Where this is the case, discussions are held with the local authority case officers and, if more time is needed,an acceptable timescale agreed upon.

2.7 In the period 2007/08, 65 planning applications were received (approximating to between 1 and 1.5applications per week during the period 1 April 2007 to 31 March 2008).

2.8 The Assembly has a statutory duty to respond to consultations on Development Plan Documents (DPD’s)and any other Local Development Documents (LDD’s) on which local planning authorities require an opinion.It has issued a number of formal statements of conformity, but in the majority of cases Local DevelopmentFramework (LDF) preparation has not yet reached the stage where this has been required, although theAssembly has been consulted on Core Strategy Issues & Options/Preferred Options, draft SupplementaryPlanning Documents (SPD), Statements of Community Involvement, Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Reportsand other SPDs. The Regional Assembly received 118 such consultation documents during 2007/08.



Progress with the Review of the Regional Plan

Completion of the current Review of the Regional Plan

2.9 The closing date for comments on the Secretary of State’s Proposed Changes to the Assembly’s DraftRegional Plan (September 2006) was the 17 October 2008. Around 2,500 representations were made. Followingconsideration of these representations, the Secretary of State is expected to adopt a revised Regional Plan inSpring 2009.

Regional Plan Partial Review Project Plan

2.10 The Proposed Changes (July 2008) ask that the Assembly start work on a further Partial Review ‘assoon as possible’. The Secretary of State proposed that the following topics should be considered in the PartialReview:

Increased levels of housing provision in line with National Housing and Planning Advice Unit’s (NHPAU)advice and the latest household projections, including for Northamptonshire as part of a wider considerationof the MKSM Growth Area;A review of sustainable locations within the Nottingham Core HMA including areas currently designatedas Greenbelt;Consideration of any further New Growth Points and any provisionally accepted eco-towns;Revised affordable housing targets responding to the Strategic Housing Market Area Assessments;A review of the Regional Transport Strategy;A review of policies for Coastal Lincolnshire based on the outcome of the proposed study;A review of renewable energy targets;Aggregates apportionment up to 2021.

2.11 A Draft Project Plan for a further Partial Review of the Regional Plan, along with a SustainabilityAppraisal/SEA Scoping Report and Habitats Regulation Pre-Screening Report and a range of supportingdocuments, were published for 8 weeks consultation on the 17 October 2008.

2.12 The remaining proposed timetable for the Partial Review is set out below:

8 Weeks public consultation on:Summer 2009Options Consultation PaperSA/SEA Report on OptionsInterim Habitats Regulation Screening Report on Options

12 weeks public consultation on:26 March 2010Draft Regional Plan submitted to SoSFinal SA/SEA ReportFinal Habitats Regulation Assessment ReportPre-Submission Statement of Consultation

8-12 weeks public consultation on:March 2011Secretary of States Proposed Changes

Likely adoption by Secretary of State of revised Regional PlanAutumn 2011



Chapter 3 Housing

ActionsKey Points

With the implementation of Strategic Housing MarketAssessments and the further development of theplanning framework, increased targets in most areas

Overall the total number of affordable dwellingscompleted in 2007/08 was half the annual averagerequired by Policy 14. It is, however, a significantincrease on the previous year, reflecting a more robustpolicy framework, backed by local evidence.

give scope for higher proportions of affordable housingto be delivered on sites in future. In the short term,however, current market conditions will have an impacton scheme viability, which particularly affectsaffordable housing secured through Section 106agreements.

Improved monitoring of energy efficiency, design,(Building for Life) and SuDs needs to receive muchhigher priority in future. To assist with this localauthorities need more training and advice on the newstandards and on data sources.

Although the Code for Sustainable Homes becamemandatory in May 2008, it was not included in thenational Core Output Indicators published in July 2008.In contrast these did include a new design indicator,Building for Life, on which training is yet to be providedto local authorities. The lack of Government guidanceso far on both is a concern. Their challenging targetof new housing being zero carbon by 2016 will not bemet unless the data is recorded in the first place.

The Regional Assembly and its partners will monitorthe effects of the credit crunch and take it into accountalong with longer term trends during the Partial Review

The dwelling completion rate in 2007/08 for the regionas a whole remained above the longer term average,although a little below the RSS Proposed Changes

of the Regional Plan. Trajectories and emerging plansannual average target, and did not yet reflect thefor the Growth Areas and Growth Points in the regiondemonstrate the potential to respond to an upturn inthe market in the medium term.

impact of the credit crunch. Coastal Lincolnshire,Derby, Peak & Dales and Peterborough Partial HMAsall exceeded their average target during the period2001 to 2008.


The English Regions Network Monitoring Group (onwhich the Regional Assembly is represented) isworking with CLG to providemore consistent guidance

Although housing trajectories are a Regional CoreIndicator, producing one for the region on a consistentbasis has been a considerable challenge due to the

and examples of best practice on housing trajectories.need to combine data and forecasts used in over 40Local authorities are now more aware of the need tocontribute data and forecasts to regional and HMAtrajectories to 2026 in future years.

local authority trajectories which have different timeperiods and may interpret CLG guidance in differentways.

Introduction

3.1 This section on housing differs from the other chapters in that the spatial areas normally used are theHousing Market Areas (HMAs), used by EMRA and other regional agencies, rather than areas defined by localauthority boundaries. The area covered by each HMA is provided in the Appendix. The HMAs are seen asproviding a more coherent and identifiable geographical space for the examination of housing issues.


Chapter 3 . Housing

3.2 This year the local authority questionnaires were combined with the Housing Flows Reconciliation Form.To avoid duplication of work, these questions now form a joint Assembly/Department for Communities andLocal Government (CLG) housing return, replacing CLG’s Housing Flows Reconciliation Form which will nolonger be circulated in the East Midlands. Minor changes have been made to the questions and definitions,mainly to reflect this change. A new question has been added on ‘completions of permanent dwellings bybedroom size’; a summary of this data is in the supplementary tables or can be accessed from the database.

3.3 There are three significant effect indicators in this section - Density of New Housing, Regional and LocalHousing Trajectories, and Affordable Housing Completions by Local Authority HMA Areas.

Policies and Indicators

SourcesProgressStatusTargetsCore/Contextual

Key IndicatorsPolicy TitlePolicyNo.

LA returnsDespite a slightdecrease during2007/08 the

Increased %of sitesachieving

Regional CoreSignificantEffectIndicator

Density of newhousing

PromotingBetterDesign

2

overall trendshows densities

densities inline withGovernmentguidance

have increasedacross theregion.

LA returnsInsufficient datacollected

Minimumrating of‘very good’

RSS CoreNewdevelopmentcompliant withBREEAMstandards


To bedeveloped

RSS CoreAll new housingbuilt to ‘lifetimehomes’ standard


Increase innumber ofsites

RSS CoreDevelopmentswith SustainableDrainageSchemes(SuDS)

LA returnsThe dwellingcompletion ratein 2007/08

To meethousingprovisiontargets inPolicy 13


Regional andlocal Housingtrajectories

RegionalHousingProvision

13

remained abovethe longer termaverage,although a littlebelow the RSSProposedChanges annualaverage target.

LA returnsTotal number ofaffordabledwellings

To meetinterimaffordable


Affordablehousingcompletions byHMA areas

RegionalPriorities forAffordableHousing

14

completedhousingincreased buttargets inremain at halfPolicy 14,the annualthereafter

local targetsset in LDFs


Chapter 3 . Housing



averagerequired byPolicy 14.

CLGAcross theRegion the ratioof lower quartile

To bedeveloped

ContextualRatio of wagerates andhousing costs

housing pricesto earnings hasfallen between2007 and 2008.

To bedeveloped

Insufficient datacollected

To bedeveloped

To bedeveloped

AffordableRuralHousing

15

LA returnsInsufficientnumber of newpitches beingprovided

To meettarget forinterim pitchrequirementsset out inAppendix 2

RSS CoreNumber of newpitches provided

RegionalPriorities forProvision forGypsies andTravellers

16


Phasingpolicies inplace inLDFs

RSS CorePhasing policiesin place in LDFs

RegionalPriorities forManagingthe Releaseof Land forHousing

17

LA returnsand CLG

Proportion ofdwellings builton PDL fell for

60 per centofcompletions

Regional CoreProportion ofhousingcompletions

the first time inachieved on2007/08 to 68.3previouslyper cent butcontinued to risein 6/10 HMAs.

developed landor throughconversions

LA returnsWork isongoing.

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreStrategicHousing LandAvailabilityAssessments(SHLAAs) inplace


Chapter 3 . Housing

Policy 2 Promoting Better Design

Policy 2

Care should be taken to encourage designsand layouts that reduce CO2 emissions andprovide resilience to future climate change,including through:

design led approaches which takeaccount of local natural and historiccharacter;minimising energy use, reducing theheat impact of urban areas, usingsensitive lighting, improving waterefficiency, providing for sustainabledrainage (SUDS) and management offlood water, reducing waste andpollution, securing energy fromdecentralised and renewable or lowcarbon energy technologies,incorporating sustainably sourced andrecycled materials wherever possible,and considering building orientation atthe start of the design process;ensuring that all urban extensions thatrequire an Environmental ImpactAssessment achieve the highest viablelevels of building sustainability;architectural design which is functional,yet which respects the beneficial aspectsof local natural and built character;making the most efficient use of land;locating and designing access from newdevelopment to local facilities on foot,by cycle or by public transport;

Policy 2 cont.

highway and parking design thatimproves both safety and the quality ofpublic space;design which helps to reduce crime andthe fear of crime, supports communitysafety, promotes vitality, maintainsamenity and privacy, and benefits thequality of life of local people; andtaking account of the need to developcarbon sinks and ‘green infrastructure’networks and provide for access to openspace and the enhancement ofbiodiversity and landscape quality.

Targets:

Increased densities in line with NationalGuidanceMinimum rating of ‘very good’ in BuildingResearch Establishment EnvironmentalAssessment Method (BREEAM) standardIncrease in number of Sustainable DrainageSchemes (SuDS)

Indicators:

Density of new housingNew development compliant with BREEAMstandardsAll new housing built to ‘lifetime homes’ standardDevelopments with Sustainable DrainageSchemes


Chapter 3 . Housing

Results:Figure 3.1 Density of NewHousing on Sites of 10 orMore Dwellings

2007/08 (per cent)

Source: Local AuthoritiesNo data for Wellingborough

Table 3.1 Percentage of New Dwellings completed at over 30dph 2005/06-2007/08 (percent)

2007/082006/072005/06

71.371.0*76.1Central Lincolnshire HMA

73.469.558.6Coastal Lincolnshire HMA

90.990.785.0Derby HMA

84.695.387.1Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

*91.7*87.8*82.7North Northamptonshire HMA

74.389.8*60.1Northern HMA

94.291.0*96.3Nottingham Core HMA

68.077.167.0Nottingham Outer HMA

47.579.133.3Peak, Dales & Park HMA

83.371.464.2Peterborough Partial HMA

97.994.489.5West Northamptonshire HMA

84.587.177.2East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*Data missing or incomplete from some authorities

05/06 no data from North East Derbyshire, Erewash, North Kesteven and Kettering06/07 no return from Corby07/08 No data for Wellingborough


Chapter 3 . Housing

3.4 Figure 3.1 and table 3.1 give details on thedensity of new housing in the East Midlands. In2007/08 84.5 per cent of new dwellings in the regionon sites of 10 dwellings or more were at a density of30 dwellings per hectare (dph) or higher. This is a slightdecrease on the 2006/07 figure of 87.1 per cent. ThePeak, Park and Dales HMA had the lowest proportionof dwellings at 30dph or over at 47.5 per cent. In WestNorthamptonshire 97.9 per cent of new dwellings wereabove 30dph.

3.5 Care needs to be taken, however, in looking atchanges between single years as the density indicatoris based on wholly completed schemes (or phases)and the outcome in any particular year can be skewed.For example, several major apartment schemes inNottingham were completed in 2007/8. The smalloverall decrease in the proportion of sites achievingthe national target density was not reflected in everyHMA. It also compares with a large increase the yearbefore. The underlying trend still appears to beupwards.

3.6 The question on BREEAM standards was onlyanswered by ten authorities, of whom only one hadany new dwellings complying with the BREEAM ‘verygood’ standard: South Holland with 11 per cent.

3.7 The question on lifetime homes standards alsohad a poor response with only eleven authorities ableto answer it. A total of seven new dwellings (inErewash) were reported to meet lifetime homesstandards. This question and the one on BREEAMstandards will be revised for 2008/09 in light ofpublication of revised RSS/LDF Core indicators andthe Code for Sustainable Homes, which becamemandatory in May 2008.

3.8 Data is, however, available from the Homes andCommunities Agency (HCA) on affordable housingschemes funded by them, both those meeting lifetimehomes standards and Eco-homes “very good” levelwhich is similar to BREEAM standards. From April2008 they also have data on the Code for SustainableHomes and Building for Life assessments availablefor such schemes.

3.9 The Commission for Architecture and the BuiltEnvironment (CABE) published the results of an auditof Building for Life assessments in 2006 (http://www.cabe.org.uk/default.aspx?contentitemid=1727).This pulled together the results of all assessmentsdone within the region up to 2006.In the East Midlandsover half the developments were assessed as ‘poor’.No schemes rated ‘good’, and only one was ‘verygood’.

3.10 Many East Midlands authorities do not monitordevelopments with Sustainable Drainage Schemes(SuDS) (22 authorities marked the questions on thenumbers of planning permissions N/A or N/R). Of the

19 authorities who did respond in 2007/08, there were419 reported new domestic dwelling sites givenplanning permission which are covered by a SuDsscheme, 349 of which were in Leicester. 12business/industrial sites in the region were reported(by the 19 responding authorities) as having SuDS.(See environment chapter for more details.)

Policy Commentary

3.11 It is encouraging to see the increase in densitiesin line with Government policy. However, it must beremembered that many of the development sites whichare currently being completed were granted permissionin a different policy context, and so average densitiesshould continue to increase as the sites currently beinggranted permission are at an average higher density.

3.12 Although the Code for Sustainable Homesbecame mandatory in May 2008, it was not includedin the national Core Output Indicators published inJuly, and is still not reflected in Building Regulations.Therefore it was felt that there was no choice but toretain BREEAM and Lifetime Homes as indicators foranother year, despite the expected low response. Thelack of Government guidance on monitoring progresstowards their challenging target of new housing beingzero carbon by 2016 is a Key Point.

3.13 In contrast a new design Core Output Indicator,Building for Life (not related to Lifetime Homes) wasintroduced in July 2008, also without sufficientguidance. Up till now an assessment has been purelyvoluntary and the limited information already availableis covered in para. 3.9. Over the next 3 years CABEplan to train at least one assessor in each LocalAuthority to use Building for Life to assess housingquality at the pre-application stage. Morecomprehensive data should therefore becomeavailable gradually over the next few years and canbe reflected when reviewing the indicators formonitoring the Regional Plan.

3.14 In Northamptonshire, as in many of the otherareas, high quality design is of critical importance. InNorth Northamptonshire, the Joint Planning Unit haverecently appointed a new design advisor, part-fundedby CABE to promote high quality sustainable design.In addition, a Supplementary Planning Document onSustainable Design was adopted in July 2008 and setsthe policy context for new development.

3.15 Low reporting rates on SUDS are an ongoingnational issue. In the East Midlands the priority is touse any resources to work together to help localauthorities fulfil the RSS policy on SuDS and get moreschemes on the ground ahead and in addition to anyschemes that may happen because of the Code forSustainable Homes (also see Environment section.)


Chapter 3 . Housing

http://www.cabe.org.uk/default.aspx?contentitemid=1727

Policy 13 Regional Housing Provision

Policy 13

Housing provision in each HMA should be made at the average annual rates set out below:

Total Provision(2001-26)

2016-262011-162006-112001-06HMA

49,6502,1401,9801,8801,790Central Lincs .

13,45020820880950Coastal Lincs.

44,7501,6101,9302,1501,650Derby

97,0004,0304,0504,0603,230Leicester & Leics.

66,0752,7952,7952,6052,225North Northamptonshire

36,7001,6301,4701,3601,250Northern

70,5003,3802,8202,4602,060Nottingham Core

43,4502,0301,7401,5401,350Nottingham Outer

12,500500500500500Peak, Dales & Park

31,5001,0801,3101,3501,480Peterborough Partial

62,1502,6502,6402,3202,170West Northamptonshire

527,72521,86522,05521,10518,655East Midlands

For full details at district level see appendix table H.3

A redistribution of District and County apportionments to meet the HMA minima via sound jointCore Strategies will be acceptable, provided that the policy of urban concentration for the PrincipalUrban Areas (PUA) as summarised below is achieved:

Per cent of area within oradjoining PUA

Housing Market Area

44Central Lincolnshire

55Derby

47Leicester & Leicestershire

65Northampton

78Nottingham Core

Targets

As above

Indicators:

Regional and local housing trajectories

Results:

3.16 This policy gives individual targets for districtand unitary authorities (see appendix table H.3),although a redistribution of county and district figuresto meet HMA targets via Joint Core Strategies isacceptable provided certain proportions ofdevelopment are in Principal Urban Areas (PUAs). Italso includes in figures for Lincoln, Corby andNorthampton any provision in urban extensionsextending across their boundaries.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Table 3.2 Housing Completions 2001-2008

ProposedAnnualAverage

CompletionRate 2001 to

2026

AverageAnnual


2008Net Completions

2007/08Net Completions

2001-07

1,9861,7041,77510,151Central Lincolnshire HMA

5389741,0375,779Coastal Lincolnshire HMA

1,7901,8082,46110,193Derby HMA

3,8803,4393,80920,263Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

2,6431,8292,19310,611North Northants HMA

1,4681,2831,4707,513Northern HMA

2,8202,2842,97013,021Nottingham Core HMA

1,7381,3401,1648,213Nottingham Outer HMA

#8426559PDNPA*

5005595943,316Peak, Dales (exc. PDNPA) HMA

1,2601,4891,5368,884Peterborough (Partial) HMA

2,4862,1731,58713,627West Northants HMA

21,10918,96520,622112,130TOTAL

Source: Local Authorities*The Peak Authority is separated from Peak, Dales and Park HMA in these tables. The Peak authority has no housing provision target butthe RSS assumes 48 per year net additional dwellings for future years within the housing trajectories.

Figure 3.2 Comparison of the Average Annual CompletionRate 2001 to 2008 with the Proposed Completion Rate 2001

to 2026

Source: Local Authorities


Chapter 3 . Housing

Table 3.3 Housing Provision and Supply, as of March 31st 2008

AdditionalProvisionRequired toMeet Target

RequiredProvision2001 to2026

Newdwellingsallocated inlocal plansand LDDs

New dwellingswith

outstandingplanning

permissions

TotalProvision2001 to2008

22,92049,6503,13511,66911,926Central Lincolnshire HMA

48313,4501,9794,1726,816Coastal Lincolnshire HMA

19,48144,7503,9708,64512,654Derby HMA

39,25297,00012,93120,74524,072Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

38,56666,0754,19110,51412,804North Northamptonshire HMA

18,83436,7002,4126,4718,983Northern HMA

35,37770,5008,78510,34715,991Nottingham Core HMA

23,06943,4501,3629,6429,377Nottingham Outer HMA

##N/A200585PDNP*

6,10712,5003642,1193,910Peak, Dales (exc. PDNP)

10,77331,5003,0827,22510,420Peterborough Partial HMA

33,44862,1509,8083,68015,214West Northamptonshire HMA

247,525527,72552,01995,429132,752East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*The Peak Authority is separated from Peak, Dales and Park HMA in these tables. The Peak authority has no housing provision target butthe RSS assumes 48 per year net additional dwellings for future years within the housing trajectories.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Figure 3.3 Completions and Projected Completions compared with RSS Targets EastMidlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesSee supplementary section for more detail on the data used to create this trajectory

3.17 Housing trajectories provide a mechanism forbringing together information on completions,permissions and planned change in the supply ofhousing. The trajectories are a way of assessingprogress towards the planned future supply of houses.They are produced following CLG guidance in andsupporting PPS3: Housing. They are intended toindicate the levels of provision already identified, butthe information is not designed to indicate detailedrequirements, e.g. for allocations in future LocalDevelopment Frameworks (LDFs).

3.18 The Regional Assembly have collated past andprojected annual net additional dwellings for eachHousing Market Area (see appendix table H.5 andH.6) from local authorities, despite their AMRtrajectories not being produced on a consistent basis.Housing trajectories for each HMA are available in theappendix. Figure 3.3 is the trajectory for the EastMidlands as a whole. The regional trajectory previouslypublished was produced for the EiP into the RegionalPlan and is now two years out of date. It was also by5 year periods, not annual as required by Governmentguidance.

3.19 Trajectories for Sub-Regional Strategies whichcover Growth Areas and Growth Points are includedin the Sub-Areas Section and in the current MiltonKeynes/South Midlands AMR. These were producedfollowing specific guidance for the relevantProgrammes of Delivery submitted to CLG in October2008.

3.20 The targets given above are from the RSSProposed Changes which is a continuing process.Table 3.2 gives details on completions which havetaken place from the start of the monitoring period in2001. The average completion rate over the 7 yearperiod has been 18,965 dwellings per annum, the2007/08 net completions figure was 20,622. Ifaveraged over the whole 25 year period the target forthe East Midlands is 21,109 dwellings per annum.Figure 3.2 compares the average completion rate 2001to 2008 with the averaged target for 2001 to 2006.Coastal Lincolnshire, Derby Peak & Dales andPeterborough Partial HMAs all exceeded their averagetarget during the period 2001 to 2008.


Chapter 3 . Housing

3.21 Table 3.3 gives details of future housing supplyvia either planning permissions or allocations in LDDs.If these figures are taken into account a further 247,525dwellings will be required in the East Midlands by 2026.

Policy Commentary

3.22 Whilst it is acknowledged that housingtrajectories are a key Core Indicator, as required byPPS3, the challenge in providing them has been raisednationally with CLG. There is a particular issue withCore Output Indicator H2(c) Net additional dwellingsin future years, due to inconsistent guidance from CLGand its use by them for different purposes. Forinstance, the trajectories for Growth Areas and GrowthPoints generally include housing sites not yet formallycommitted, in order to demonstrate that the growth isdeliverable over the whole Regional Plan period to2026. (These sites are not included in Table 3.3.)Elsewhere the emphasis is on a 5 year supply ofdevelopable sites for National Indicator 159, to whichthis element of supply does not generally contribute.

3.23 In addition to the housing supply in Table 3.3local authorities have identified considerable furtherhousing capacity, initially through Urban CapacityStudies, now being replaced by Strategic HousingLand Availability Assessments (SHLAAs), and alsothrough planned urban extensions not yet formallyapproved.

3.24 In the Coastal Lincolnshire HMA this meansthat no additional provision is currently required, whichis not surprising as the total provision in Policy 13 wasbased on existing commitments pending thecompletion of the Coastal Strategy. The same policyapplies to South Holland, the effect being maskedwithin the Peterborough Partial HMA totals.

3.25 The completion rate in 2007/08 for the regionas a whole remained above the longer term average,and did not yet reflect the impact of the “credit crunch”.Quarterly figures for starts and completions have beenadded at the end of this chapter, however, to showshorter term trends not apparent in the annual figures.It was slightly below the annual average required forthe whole Regional Plan period.

3.26 Completion rates in West Northamptonshirehad previously performed well against targets but sawa fall in the level of completions in the past year,mirroring the national situation. Possibly more worryingis the reduction in the level of starts. In NorthNorthamptonshire, completion rates have risen steadilyfrom a very low base level at the start of the Plan.

3.27 However, delivery agencies in both HMAs areworking to address the delivery issues and ensure thatthe necessary infrastructure is secured to enabledelivery to gather pace quickly when the housing

market picks up again. The recently adopted JointCore Strategy in North Northamptonshire ensures thata robust planning framework is in place to shape theplanned growth. Progress has also beenmade inWestNorthamptonshire to develop a robust policy context.

3.28 In Leicester there has been amarked reductionin housing completions during 2007/08 as the effectsof the ‘credit crunch’ have slowed down both newhousing starts and completions; city centre apartmentdevelopments have beenmost affected by the housingmarket downturn.

3.29 The 2007/08 net additional dwellings developedin the Derby Housing Market Area (HMA) is 38 percent above the draft Regional Plan annualised2001-2026 housing provision target of 1,790. Takinginto account completions from 2001, the annualresidual requirement is 1,778 indicating that supplyover the period is a little above the average target.Outstanding planning permissions and allocationsprovide a further 12,615 dwellings and additionaldwellings have been identified through a PUAStrategicHousing Land Availability Study. Core Strategies andsite allocations documents will identify further sites toensure a continuing supply in the longer term.

3.30 Nottingham Core HMA has experienced anincrease in dwellings at a greater rate than other HMAsin the 3 Cities Sub-area and in 2007/08 netcompletions exceeded the RSS requirement.

Policy 14 Regional Priorities for AffordableHousing

Policy 14

LDFs, housing strategies and investmentplans should have regard to the prioritiesidentified in the Regional Housing Strategy,and include policies seeking the provision ofa mix of dwellings in terms of size, type,affordability and location, having regard tothe existing local stock, in order to help createinclusive communities which provide widerhousing opportunity and choice. As part oftheir LDFs local planning authorities shouldadopt affordable housing targets in line withthe conclusions of the most up to date HMAAssessments for their area. For monitoringpurposes indicative affordable housingtargets are set out below, representing thetotal amount of affordable housing for eachHMA for the period 2001-26. These targets donot represent a maximum for each HMA.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Targets:

See table 3.4

Indicators:

Affordable housing completions by HMA areasRatio of wage rates and housing costs

Results:

3.31 This section looks at two measures ofaffordability. The first is numbers of purpose built‘affordable homes’. Secondly data on house prices isconsidered in order to assess how affordable thegeneral housing stock of the East Midlands is.

Table 3.4 Affordable Housing Built 2007/08

TargetsPercentage of total additions

to dwelling stockNumber of New Dwellings

AverageAnnualRequire-ment

Total2001-26TotalInter-

mediateSocialrentedTotalInter-

mediateSocialrented

57614,4007.56 .01.513610828Central LincolnshireHMA

2205,50020.97.613.322983146Coastal LincolnshireHMA

59214,80013.46 .07.4356160196Derby HMA

1,28032,00015.03.811.2601152449Leicester &Leicestershire HMA

68817,20011.83.88 .027890188North NorthamptonshireHMA

48412,10010 .02.67.315541114Northern HMA

84821,20014.67.17.5458223235Nottingham Core HMA

43610,90011.13.47.71374295Nottingham Outer HMA

2927,30026.010.215.816665101Peak, Dales & Park HMA

44011,00019.58.810.7300136164Peterborough PartialHMA

87221,80036.420.615.9579327252West NorthamptonshireHMA

6,736168,40015.76.69.13,3951,4271,968East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesNote the definitions used here differ from NI 155, which includes acquisitions

3.32 The new affordable housing targets set out inthe RSS proposed changes are expressed as numbersof dwellings as oppose to the percentages used inprevious years. An average annual number has beencalculated to give an indication of how HMAs are

performing although it should be noted that the targetapplies only to the whole twenty-five year period,2001-26. Table 3.4 compares figures for 2007/08 withthese targets.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Table 3.5 Affordable Housing Built 2006/07 and 2007/08

2007/082006/07*

1,9681,552Social rented

Number of New Dwellings 1,427820Intermediate

3,3952,513*Total

9.16.8Social rentedPercentage of total additions to dwellingstock 6.63.6Intermediate

15.711.0*Total

Source: Local Authorities*Note the Peak Park and Daventry could not provide an accurate split for their affordable housing figures, therefore social rented andintermediate will sum to less than total affordable. No Return from North Kesteven for intermediate housing

3.33 The new targets are also no longer splitbetween Social Rented and Intermediate Housing.This split is provided for information only, as it isavailable based on the previous monitoringrequirements. In 2007/08, 15.7 per cent of newdwellings in the East Midlands were affordablecompared with 11.0 per cent in 2006/07. In 2007/08,

figures returned for intermediate housing were 1,427,compared to 820 in 2006/07, and 1,968 socially rentedin 2007/08 compared with 1,552 in 2006/07 (Table3.5). Whilst there has been an increase in the amountof affordable housing being built, rates will need toincrease further in order to meet targets.

Table 3.6 Affordable Housing Built from 2001/02

Total Requirement 2001-26Affordable Dwellings Built

2001/02 to 2007/08

14,400403Central Lincolnshire HMA

5,5001,071Coastal Lincolnshire HMA

14,8001,257Derby HMA

32,0002,885Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

17,2001,391North Northamptonshire HMA

12,100527Northern HMA

21,2001,605Nottingham Core HMA

10,900748Nottingham Outer HMA

7,300539Peak, Dales & Park HMA

11,000937Peterborough Partial HMA

21,8001,964West Northamptonshire HMA

168,40013,327East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesNote earlier local authority returns on affordable housing were incomplete and the figures presented above represent a minimumNote the definitions used here differ from NI 155, which includes acquisitions

3.34 Data from past monitoring rounds, in table 3.6,shows that, since 2001, there have been 13,327affordable dwellings built in the region. This figure isan under-estimate as not all authorities were able to

provide data in earlier years; however this figure stillonly represents 8 per cent of the total East Midlandsaffordable housing target of 168,400 dwellings by2026.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Figure 3.4 Lower Quartile House Prices First Quarter of theYear 2004 to 2008

Source: CLG Housing Statistics

3.35 Alongside purpose built affordable housing, theaffordability of housing in the general market has alsobeen considered. Figure 3.4 shows that lower quartilehouse prices in the first quarter of the year rosesteadily between 2004 and 2007. Between thebeginning of 2007 and the beginning of 2008 lowerquartile house prices in most areas saw a muchsmaller increase than in previous years or a decline.The lower quartile house price for the first quarter of

2008 was £109,971 in the East Midlands, similar tothe first quarter of 2007, which was £110,000. Thiscompares with a 9 per cent increase in the regionallower quartile house price between the first quartersof 2006 and 2007. The greatest fall in lower quartilehouse prices between the first quarters of 2007 and2008 was in Nottingham city where levels fell from£85,150 to £82,125.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Table 3.7 Ratio of lower quartile house price to lower quartile earnings 2005 to 2008

2008200720062005

4.916.315.004.86Derby

6.336.666.326.15Derbyshire

6.646.696.386.33Leicester

7.297.827.287.35Leicestershire

7.277.777.337.19Lincolnshire

7.287.307.157.01Northamptonshire

4.865.225.245.30Nottingham

6.176.586.376.13Nottinghamshire

9.069.809.669.00Rutland

6.596.886.786.47East Midlands

6.987.257.126.82England


Figure 3.5 Ratio of Lower Quartile House Prices to LowerQuartile Earnings 2008

Source: CLG Housing Statistics(c) Crown Copyright. All rights reserved. East Midlands Regional Assembly, 100038615, 2008


Chapter 3 . Housing

3.36 The affordability of the housing market in anarea can be measured through a comparison ofaverage annual lower quartile house prices and lowerquartile income levels (table 3.7). Across the regionthe ratio of lower quartile house prices to earnings hasfallen between 2007 and 2008. The most affordablearea is Nottingham where lower quartile house priceswere 5.9 times lower quartile income in 2008 – theleast affordable area was Rutland with a ratio of 9.1.Figure 3.5 shows affordability figures at a district level.

Policy Commentary

3.37 Overall the total number of affordable dwellingscompleted in 2007/08 was half the annual averagerequired by Policy 14. The only HMA in which thenumeric target was marginally exceeded wasLincolnshire Coastal, although higher percentages ofall completions were achieved in two other HMAs,West Northamptonshire and Peak, Dales and Park.

3.38 Levels of affordable dwellings delivered inNorthamptonshire have increased considerably. Thedevelopment of a robust planning framework, basedupon evidence in the Strategic Housing MarketAssessments, together with significantly more HCAfunding, have ensured that higher targets are beingimplemented to address need. The Regional Assemblytook the decision to allocate more funding. The NorthNorthamptonshire Core Strategy sets out the targetsfor each of the four local authority areas, andauthorities in West Northamptonshire are at anadvanced stage in the production of a SupplementaryPlanning Document to address these affordabilityissues.

3.39 Many of the developments currently being builtwere granted permission in a policy context with loweraffordable housing targets. With the implementationof Strategic Housing Market Assessments and thefurther development of the planning framework,increased targets in most areas give scope for higherproportions of affordable housing to be delivered onsites in future. In the short term, however, currentmarket conditions will have an impact on schemeviability, which particularly affects affordable housingsecured through Section 106 agreements.

3.40 Once the final Regional Plan has beenpublished the definition for affordable housingcompletions will be amended to be consistent withNI155, which includes acquisitions.

3.41 The very recent fall in house price to earningsratios should be seen in the context of the considerablerise over a number of years previously, which madeowner-occupation un-affordable to a much greaterproportion of households. This remains the underlyingissue behind the need for the policy and in the shortterm any improvement in these ratios can only help.

3.42 The geographic variation in house price toearnings ratios should also be seen in the context ofthe socio-economic conditions covered in the Economysection and the RES Evidence Base. The lowest ratiosare generally in areas where low average earningsare a problem in itself, whereas the highest are usuallyin rural areas where many properties are purchasedby in-migrants using equity or investment incomewhichwill not be reflected in earnings figures.

Policy 15 Regional Priorities for AffordableRural Housing

Policy 15

New housing in rural areas should contributeto:

creating sustainable rural communitiesthrough a choice of well designedhomes;addressing affordability issues byproviding appropriate levels of housingin suitable locations;maintaining the distinctive character ofrural areas and respecting the quality oftranquillity;strengthening rural enterprise andsupporting economic growth,particularly linkages betweensettlements and their hinterlands; andcompact, sustainable patterns ofdevelopment which facilitate access tojobs and services.

Targets and Indicators

To be developed

Policy commentary

3.43 This is a new policy in Proposed Changes tothe Regional Plan, hence there are no targets andindicators yet. The principle of this policy is welcomedto address a particularly pressing issue. There is aview, however, expressed in response to theconsultation, that Policy 15 as worded is not specificenough to be measurable. If the final wording werebased on para. 3.1.13 of the Proposed Changes asrecommended in the Panel Report it would be possibleto develop indicators to measure some of the policymechanisms listed, such as rural exception sites,separate targets in LDFs and site size thresholds.


Chapter 3 . Housing

3.44 Within the Peak District National Park,affordable housing designs are locally distinctive andto a high standard and in locations chosen by the socialproviders or in direct response to locally justified need,often in small compact settlements.

Policy 16 Regional Priorities for Provisionfor Gypsies and Travellers

Policy 16

Local Authorities and other relevant publicbodies should work together acrossadministrative boundaries to identify land foradditional pitch provision based on clearlyevidenced assessments of need.

LDFs shouldmake provision for theminimumadditional pitch requirements set out inAppendix 2 of RSS Proposed Changes

Targets:

To meet target for interim pitch requirements setout in Appendix 2 of RSS Proposed Changes

Indicators:

Number of pitches provided

Results:

3.45 Several authorities could not provide allrequested information on gypsies and travellers. Someauthorities could not provide a breakdown intopermanent and transit because of uncertainty aboutthe meaning of ‘transit site’. This requirement wasintroduced at a late stage following publication of theRSS and LDF Core Output Indicators. A transit sitewould be one where the occupant has a set leavingdate, which at present rarely occurs.

3.46 Details were returned on 819 permanent pitches(51 of which were new in 2007/08) and 108 temporarypitches (no new pitches in 2007/08). 916 caravanswere reported in unauthorised encampments. Seeappendix table H.10 for more detail.

Policy Commentary

3.47 Gypsy and Traveller AccommodationAssessments have been completed across the EastMidlands and used to derive the minimum additionalpitch requirements set out in Appendix 2 of theRegional Plan Proposed Changes. Some of these

targets have been the subject of objections, which willbe considered prior to publication of the final RegionalPlan.

3.48 Of the 51 new pitches recorded in 2007/08 35were provided in two sites in North and South Kesteven(Lincolnshire).

Policy 17 Regional Priorities for Managingthe Release of Land for Housing

Policy 17

Local Authorities, developers and relevantpublic bodies should work acrossadministrative boundaries in all of theRegion’s HMAs to ensure that the release ofsites is managed to achieve a sustainablepattern of development.

In the following HMAs there will need to becross-regional working to achieve this:

Northern (Sheffield/Rotherham) HMA -with the Yorkshire and Humber region.Peak, Dales and Park HMA - with theNorth West and West Midlands regions.Peterborough (Partial) HMA - with theEast of England region

LDFs should contain policies to manage therelease of housing across both local planningauthority areas and the wider HMA area.

To achieve this, in the following HMAs jointdevelopment plan documents will beexpected, with the development of joint CoreStrategies across HMAs particularlyencouraged:

Derby HMA and the West MidlandsCentral Lincolnshire HMALeicester and Leicestershire HMANorth Northamptonshire HMANottingham Core HMA and HucknallWest Northamptonshire HMA

Targets:

Phasing policies in place in HMAs listed in Policy17 of RSS Proposed Changes60 per cent completions on Previously DevelopedLand (PDL)

Indicators:

Phasing policies in place in LDFs


Chapter 3 . Housing

Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessments(SHLAAs) in placeProportion of completions achieved on previouslydeveloped land or through conversions

Results:

3.49 The responses to the online survey by localauthorities show 10 have working arrangements acrosslocal authority boundaries in LDF/Local Plan policiesand 30 do not. Four have across HMA arrangementsin LDF/Local Plan policies.. These cover the NorthNorthamptonshire HMA, for which a Joint CoreStrategy was adopted in June 2008.. Examples ofcross-border working include SHMAs and SHLAAs(see below), aligned LDF Core Strategies, siteallocation and the release of land for housing andGypsy and Traveller Needs Assessments. A list ofauthorities is supplied in the data appendix table H.11.

3.50 The question on Strategic Housing LandAvailability Assessments (SHLAAs) replaces theprevious years’ question on Urban Capacity Studies.SHLAAs are required by national planning policy, setout in Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing (PPS3)and concentrate on the availability of suitable sites forhousing development. Joint work is being undertakenby local authorities in HMAs, with either joint SHLAAsbeing undertaken or sharedmethodologies being used.The only exception to this is West Lindsey, where theSHLAA is already published. Discussions are takingplace on amalgamating a joint Lincoln-North KestevenSHLAA with West Lindsey’s SHLAA so that it coversthe whole of the Central Lincolnshire HMA.

3.51 Two sources of information have been used toanalyse housing development on PDL. Data returnedvia cdpVision is shown in figures 3.6 and 3.7. The CLGstatistics in table 3.8 are based on changes inOrdnance Survey data while local authority data isbased on completions through planning permissions.

Figure 3.6 Proportion of total new dwellings on Previously Developed Land (PDL)2007/08 (per cent)



Chapter 3 . Housing

Figure 3.7 Percentage of total new dwellings on PreviouslyDeveloped Land (PDL) 2004/05 to 2007/08 (per cent)

Source: Local AuthoritiesNote scale does not start at zero

3.52 In 2007/08 68.3 per cent of new dwellings wereon previously developed land, slightly down from the2006/07 figure of 70.9 per cent. North

Northamptonshire had the lowest proportion of newdwellings on PDL (44.6 per cent), whilst NottinghamCore HMA had the highest proportion (88.1 per cent).

Table 3.8 Percentage New Dwellings on PDL East Midlands (includes conversions)2003-2007 (per cent)

20072006200520042003

6268605958East MidlandsIncluding Conversions

7576777570England

5864545554East MidlandsExcludingConversions 7471676461England

Source: CLG Planning Statistics

3.53 Data from CLG for 2007 show that 58 per centof new dwellings in the East Midlands were built onPDL (62 per cent if conversions are included). Thesefigures are lower than the national levels of 75 per centincluding conversions and 74 per cent excludingconversions.

Policy Commentary

3.54 Although amended from last year, the onlinequestions still only partly capture the full and rapidlygrowing extent of joint working between local

authorities in the East Midlands. As reported last year,both HMAs in Northamptonshire have Joint PlanningUnits.

3.55 Potential arrangements for Joint CoreStrategies are also being actively considered in otherHMAs listed in Policy 17. For instance the fourauthorities covering Central Lincolnshire are exploringways of delivering a Joint Core Strategy. Sub-regionalworking arrangements are also continuing, especiallyin the Three Cities area. In addition, considerableprogress is being made on preparing joint evidence


Chapter 3 . Housing

and studies for LDFs, as well as housing strategies.Cross-regional working arrangements are alsocontinuing, for instance in the Peterborough HMA.

3.56 Where Strategic Housing Market Assessmentshave been published, the partnerships are continuingto update them, co-ordinate the development ofSub-Regional Housing Strategies, and contribute tothe development of regional housing policies.

3.57 The proportion of dwellings built on previouslydeveloped land fell for the first time in 2007/08,although it continued to rise in 6 out of 10 HMAs. InNorthamptonshire, whilst a priority has been to directnew development towards previously developed sites,the scale of growth has meant that a number ofsustainable urban extensions have been required. Thethree highest performing HMAs all have high levels ofpreviously developed land available, and await

significant development on sustainable urbanextensions to be brought forward through he planningprocess. These factors demonstrate the reasons givenin the Panel Report (quoted last year) why 60% is stilla “challenging target” in the long term.

Impact of the Credit Crunch

3.58 Although this report only monitors the financialyear 2007 to 2008, the following information ispresented to give an indication of the impact of therecent downturn in the economy.

3.59 CLG housing statistics on housing completionsare not entirely consistent with those received directfrom local authorities reported in the main Housingsection, but have the advantage of being publishedquarterly.

Table 3.9 Permanent Dwellings Completed in the East Midlands 2007 and 2008

All DwellingsLocal AuthoritiesRegistered Social

LandlordsPrivate Enterprise

4,650202704,350Q1 2007

4,520-3404,180Q2 2007

4,160-3003,870Q3 2007

5,100-3904,710Q4 2007

3,610-3503,250Q1 2008

3,650503503,260Q2 2008

2,330-3302,000Q3 2008

Source:CLG Housing Statistics

Table 3.10 Permanent Dwellings Started in the East Midlands 2007 and 2008

All DwellingsLocal AuthoritiesRegistered Social

LandlordsPrivate Enterprise

4,090201903,890Q1 2007

3,690-1503,550Q2 2007

4,070-1803,890Q3 2007

3,450-1503,300Q4 2007

3,400-2503,150Q1 2008

2,630305002,090Q2 2008

1,780-4701,310Q3 2008



Chapter 3 . Housing

Figure 3.8 Started and Completed Dwellings in the East Midlands 2007 and 2008


3.60 According to CLG housing statistics (figure 3.8,table 3.9 and table 3.10) in the East Midlands in thethird quarter of 2008 2,330 dwellings were built and1,780 dwellings were started. These figures are a largedecrease from the same quarter of 2007, where 4,160dwellings were completed and 4,070 were started.Between the third quarter of 2007 and the third quarterof 2008 the number of dwellings completed in the EastMidlands fell 44 per cent, whilst the number ofdwellings started fell 56 per cent.

3.61 For estimates of future supply to be useful,further analysis will be needed to assess the extent ofthis downturn as time goes on, to enable future supplyestimates ‘with or without economic downturn’ to bemade. These will assist housing trajectories, especiallyin establishing whether a five-year supply is realisticshould demand rise in the future. In housing supplyterms, the current downturn represents a ‘constraintto housing delivery’.


Chapter 3 . Housing

Chapter 4 Economy

ActionsKey Points

Future AMRs will need to report in detail upon theexpected widespread repercussions and implicationsof “The Credit Crunch” for the regional economy.

The 2007/08 AMR pre-dates the current economicclimate of “The Credit Crunch”.

Continued action is required to resolve fully the fewremaining issues related to cdpvision, as well as toprogress delivery of the ‘seamless digital chain’.Particular attention needs to be paid to the resolutionof outstanding retail data issues.

The recently introduced EMRA cdpvision monitoringsystem continues to improve the effectiveness andreliability of the data collection and reporting process.

Future AMRs will need to report in detail upon theimplications of changes arising from the SNR, and inparticular, from the introduction of the SRS.

The Government is moving ahead with its proposedreview of sub-national economic development andregeneration (SNR) including the introduction of aSingle Regional Strategy (SRS).

Development of targets and indicators for all policieswithin the Economy section should be completed assoon as possible.

Targets and indicators for some policies within theEconomy section have still to be fully developed.

Completion of Employment Land Reviews at HMA orSub-area level (as advocated by Policy 20) remainsa priority, together with the need to consider theconsistency of methodology and compatibility offindings of those that have already been completed.

Completion of outstanding Employment Land Reviewsacross the Region was identified as a Key Action inthe previous AMR and whilst several of these havenow been undertaken, some are at individual authoritylevel only.

Introduction

4.1 It should be remembered that the 2007/08 AMR pre-dates the current economic climate (which has cometo be known as “The Credit Crunch”), because it is primarily concerned with the period April 2007 to March2008. Clearly, future AMRs will report fully on the expected widespread repercussions and implications of “TheCredit Crunch” on the East Midlands regional economy, however given the extent and depth of the downturn,it was thought that it would be erroneous not to include some coverage of it in the current AMR. Accordingly anumber of relevant data tables and related commentary are included at the end of this chapter. Further detailsof the effects of “The Credit Crunch” are to be found in “The East Midlands Economy – A Joint Response ToChanging Economic Circumstances” (August 2008), by BERR, H.M. Treasury and emda atwww.emda.org.uk/uploaddocuments/eastmidlandseconomytaggedforweb.pdf.

4.2 The economy section of the 2007/08 AMR again draws largely on site level information on employmentland, retail and leisure uses gathered from local authorities. Last year saw the introduction of a new onlinesystem for data collection, EMRA cdpvision, which greatly improved the effectiveness and reliability of theprocess. The previous AMR identified the resolution of a limited number of outstanding matters associated withthe introduction of the new monitoring system as a key action for this year. Most of these have now beenaddressed and attention has begun to turn to delivery of the ‘seamless digital chain’ whereby data will flowdirectly from local authority development control systems via County monitoring hubs and into cdpvision, withoutthe need to re-enter data.


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.emda.org.uk/uploaddocuments/eastmidlandseconomytaggedforweb.pdf




--New policy topromote a holisticapproach toregeneration

-RSS Core-RegionalPriorities fortheEconomy

18

LocalAuthorities

Completion ratesslightly lowerthan previousyear but severalschemes ongoing

Targets set inLDFs

RegionalCore

Net change inoffice andindustrial land /floorspacedeveloped for

RegionalPriorityAreas forRegeneration

19

employment inRegional PriorityAreas

DWP dataBenefit claimantrates have fallen

-ContextualBenefit ClaimantCount

Neighbour-hoodStatistics

Factoryfloorspacecontinues to

To meet localneeds as setout in SRSsor LDFs

RegionalCore

Net change inoffice andindustrial land /floorspace andproportion onPDL

RegionalPriorities forEmploymentLand

20

decrease, otherfigures showedincrease

LocalAuthorities

Good land supplyin many parts ofregion

RegionalCore

Employmentland supply bytype

--Work needed onspatial definitions

RegionalCore

Percentage ofnew houses,employmentland andfloorspacedeveloped withinor adjoiningurban areas


Chapter 4 . Economy



LocalAuthorities

Moredevelopmentserved by publictransport thanprevious year

RegionalCore

Developmentserved by publictransport

VOASome smalldeclines invalues

ContextualRental and LandValues

LocalAuthorities

Much workundertaken butissues ofgeography &methodology

RSS CoreLA undertakenemploymentland reviews

LocalAuthorities

Work ongoing todevelopindicators

-RSS CoreB8 land areasand floorspace

StrategicDistribution

21

LocalAuthorities

A number ofsignificantdevelopments

To meet localneeds as setout in LDFs

RegionalCore

Amount ofcompleted retail,office and leisure

RegionalPriorities forTown

22

took place indevelopment bylocal authorityarea

Centres andRetailDevelopment

2007/08 butconcern little


Chapter 4 . Economy



development willtake place in2008/09

LocalAuthorities

Town centreretail declined butleisure increased

RegionalCore

Percentage ofcompleted retail,office and leisuredevelopment intown centres

LocalAuthorities

Manycommitmentsand underconstruction sitescentrally located

RSS CoreOutstandingplanningpermissions andallocations forretail, office andleisuredevelopment

LocalAuthorities

Twodevelopmentsnoted

-RSS CoreNumber ofcasinosdeveloped inregenerationareas

RegionalPriorities forCasinoDevelopment

23

NOMISVAT registrationsincreasing

Increase inbusinessstart ups andnew jobs

RSS CoreNumber of newbusiness startups

RegionalPriorities forRuralDiversification

24

ABIJob numbersincreasing

RSS CoreNew jobscreated

ABIJob numbersincreasing

Increase innumbers inemployment

RSS CoreNumbers inemployment inrural areas

NOMISRural areas stilloffer fewer jobopportunities

ContextualJob densityestimates

Ruralcommunities.gov.uk

No evidence ofgeneral declinebut POs underthreat

Targets to bedeveloped

RSS CoreAccessibility toessentialservices in ruralareas

eAdoptionsurvey/ dti/Thinkbroadband

Broadband isnow available toalmost allhousehold and

20 percent ofbusinessestrading onlineby 2010

RSS CoreAccess toBroadbandextended to allareas

RegionalPriorities forICT

25


Chapter 4 . Economy



/RSS CoreLevel of servicefrom Broadbandinfrastructure

businesses butinvestment willbe needed in thefutureRSS CoreTake up and use

of broadbandservices

ABIJobs in tourismincreasing

15,000 newjobs intourism by2008

RSS CoreChange innumber of jobsin tourist relatedactivities

RegionalPriorities forTourism

41

STEAMVisitor spendingincreasing

Visitorspending inthe region to

RSS CoreVisitor spendingin region

increase by 2per cent by2010

STEAMOvernight staysincreasing

Tourism tocontribute 4.5per cent GDPby 2010

RSS CoreNumber ofovernight staysin region

Data Issues

4.3 The latest revision of the Regional SpatialStrategy and Local Development Framework CoreOutput Indicators published by Communities and LocalGovernment (CLG) in July 2008 states that ‘thresholdsshould not be applied when collecting and reportingcore output indicators’. This release was published toolate for the guidance to be fully incorporated into thisyear’s monitoring round and therefore the thresholdof 0.4ha/1,000sqm has again been applied toemployment land. Thresholds for retail and leisuredevelopment have been amended to ‘developmentover 2,500 sqm (A1 retail use) and over 1,000 sqm(A2 retail use) gross internal floorspace’ and‘development over 0.4 ha or 1,000 sq m gross internalfloorspace’ (leisure use). It is hoped to be able to begincollecting data without thresholds in the next round ofmonitoring, although it is recognised that this willsignificantly increase the burden of the local authoritydata collection exercise.

4.4 A key change to note in this year’s AMR is theinclusion of extensions and redevelopment land in datacollected from local authorities. This change was inresponse to clarification given by CLG. Where totalemployment land figures are given in this documenttherefore, they relate to developments on new land,as well as extensions and redevelopment. Acomparison of developments on new land, extensionsand redevelopment is given under Policy 20 - withextensions and redevelopment land comprising about15 per cent of land and floorspace developed. (Note

- extensions refer to additional buildings on a sitealready in employment use; redevelopment land isthat which was previously in employment use; newland is that not previously used for employment i.e.previously undeveloped or previously developed for anon-employment land use).

4.5 Last year’s AMR drew attention to the fact thatnot all authorities had been able to supply all the datarequested. It was suggested that this was due to acombination of unfamiliarity with the new monitoringsystem and manpower or system constraints. Whilstit is pleasing to report improved levels of response anddata coverage this year, a small number of gaps dostill remain. As in previous years therefore, cautionshould be taken when interpreting the figures,particularly in those cases where some authorities(footnoted in the tables) have been unable to supplydata.

4.6 By way of illustration, five specific examples ofoutstanding data issues are listed below – theserequire further investigation and resolution to enablemore reliable and accurate reporting of CLG coreindicators next year:

B1 data – many authorities are unable to supplydata for specific B1 sub-categories. In the tableswhich follow it should therefore be noted thatfigures for B1a, B1b and B1c are for sites whereauthorities specified the B1 land type althoughthemixed category of B1 unspecifiedmay includeland of these types. Figures for the B1 classes,B2 and B8 are for sites where authorities


Chapter 4 . Economy

specified the land type although the Mixedcategory may include land of these types.floorspace data – a number of authorities (albeitdeclining) continue to be unable to supplyinformation on floorspace; some have appliedrecommended standard site area to floorspaceratios, but it is acknowledged that these arenotoriously unreliable, because of the wide rangeof activities that fall within Use Classes Ordercategory B (Business, General Industrial andStorage and Distribution).site co-ordinates – a number of authorities (againdeclining) either were unable to supply siteco-ordinates or did so in an incorrect format –these will be mandatory next year and the systemwill only accept them in the correct format.public transport accessibility – approximately 20per cent of local authority responses on whethersites are served by public transport are notconsidered to be totally reliable because of adata entry error in the system, although this canbe easily rectified before next year.the provision of retail and leisure data has longbeen problematical for many authorities becauseof an absence of information and or inadequatemonitoring systems leading to a degree ofconfusion between a nil return (meaning nodevelopment) and a non return (when informationis not available) – this is an area which requiresurgent attention, especially in view of theimpending removal of thresholds from thecollecting and reporting of indicators, as referredto in paragraph 4.3 above.

4.7 Notwithstanding specific outstanding issues suchas these, cdpvision continues to improve the processof data collection and reporting. Two specific tangibleexamples are:

the system has been used to generate many ofthe data tables and charts contained in thisreport.the first stage of the delivery of the ‘seamlessdigital chain’ has been successfully tested withdata fromDerbyshire cdpsmart (the county basedmonitoring system which covers all the districts)being used to directly populate fields in cdpvision.

Policy 18 Regional Priorities for theEconomy

Policy 18

Local authorities in all parts of the regionshould work together with emda and otherorganisations with relevant responsibilitiesto encourage and foster the regional economythrough implementing the Regional EconomicStrategy. It will be especially important toraise skill levels, develop the service sectorand high value manufacturing and createinnovative businesses, so that the region isbetter placed to maintain economiccompetitiveness.

4.8 This is a new policy and as such no indicatorsor targets have yet been developed.

Policy Commentary

4.9 Policy 18 has been introduced in response toconcerns expressed in the Examination in Public PanelReport about the absence of an explicit policy ‘topromote a holistic approach to regeneration inaccordance with the Regional Economic Strategy’.The new policy is specifically intended to make it clearthat it applies firstly, to all parts of the region and notjust those where the economy is lagging and in needof special attention, and secondly, to the needs of theeconomy generally and not only to employment land.

4.10 The Strategic Priorities of the RegionalEconomic Strategy (RES) ‘A Flourishing Region’ areunderpinned by the three main themes of raisingproductivity, ensuring sustainability and achievingequality. Full details are to be found at:www.emda.org.uk/res/#DownLoads .

4.11 In July 2007 the Government published areview of sub-national economic development andregeneration (the Sub-national Review or SNR)informed by the three principles of ensuring policy ismanaged at the right spatial level, ensuring clarity ofroles and helping places to reach their potential. Aconsultation document entitled ‘Prosperous Places:taking forward the review of the SNR’ wassubsequently published on 31 March 2008 setting outdetailed proposals including the introduction of a SingleRegional Strategy to replace existing regionaleconomic and spatial strategies. The Government’sresponse to this public consultation was published on25 November 2008 and will be reported upon in detailin next year’s AMR, although further details are to befound at www.communities.gov.uk/documents/citiesandregions/doc/1104014.doc .


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.emda.org.uk/res/#DownLoads

http://www.communities.gov.uk/documents/citiesandregions/doc/1104014.doc

http://www.communities.gov.uk/documents/citiesandregions/doc/1104014.doc

4.12 The three main themes and strategic prioritiesof the RES represent a sound basis for prioritisinginvestment and developing the economy of the EastMidlands, not only in terms of its resilience to currenteconomic conditions but, importantly, in also achievinglonger term increases in jobs and productivity growth.

4.13 Development of the regional economy is alsobeing assisted by the formation of the new RegionalEconomic Cabinet, which had its first meeting on 17October 2008. The overall purpose of the Cabinet isto assess current activity in the East Midlands, identifythe barriers to joined-up working and challenge existingorganisations and programmes in their response tothe changing economic situation. Further details of theCabinet and its work will be reported in next year’sAMR but more information is to be found at:www. emda . o r g . u k / p r o j e c t s / d e t a i l s . a s p ?filevar=458&Page=1&PageNo=

Policy 19 Regional Priority Areas forRegeneration

Policy 19

Regeneration activity should be focussed onareas of greatest identified need. Theseinclude:

the Region's Principal Urban Areas andSub-Regional Centres that exhibit veryhigh and concentrated levels ofdeprivation;the Northern Sub-area, with itsconcentration of economic, social andenvironmental problems linked to thedecline of the coal industry;‘economically lagging’ rural areasidentified by the Government’s RuralStrategy, including the districts of EastLindsey, West Lindsey South Holland,Bolsover, High Peak and the more ruralparts of Derbyshire Dales, Bassetlaw andNewark and Sherwood;the towns of Gainsborough,Mablethorpeand Skegness; and other settlementswhich display high levels of deprivationincludingCorbywhich is also designatedas a Growth Town in Policy 3.

Policy 19 cont.

For regeneration to be successful concertedaction is needed across the whole spectrumof local governance and local developmentdocuments should translate this into theaction required locally. In additionregeneration of all priority areas mustconform with the strategy of urbanconcentration set out in Policy 3.

Targets:

Targets set in LDFs

Indicators:

Benefit Claimant CountNet change in office and industrial land /floorspace developed for employment in RegionalPriority Areas

Results:

4.14 This AMR again uses ERDF districts as broadproxies for areas of relative regeneration priority,pending theGovernment's response to the consultationon the draft Framework for Regeneration andsubsequent dialogue within the region to identifyregeneration priority areas, which are likely to beat adetailed local or even neighbourhood level.

4.15 The authorities in which regeneration areasare located are Ashfield, Bassetlaw, Bolsover, Boston,Chesterfield, Corby, Derby, East Lindsey, Leicester,Lincoln, Mansfield and Nottingham. Although coverageof some of these districts will only be partial, it is notpossible at the present time to identify these areasspecifically, so information has been collected at districtlevel.


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.emda.org.uk/projects/details.asp?filevar=458&Page=1&PageNo

http://www.emda.org.uk/projects/details.asp?filevar=458&Page=1&PageNo

Table 4.1 Proportion of Working Age Population Claiming any Benefit in Districts withERDF Funding, February of each year (%)

200820072006

16.817.017.0Ashfield

15.716.016.5Bassetlaw

19.420.220.8Bolsover

15.115.515.6Boston

18.018.919.1Chesterfield

16.416.716.9Corby

15.716.016.5Derby

17.718.118.1East Lindsey

18.719.219.6Leicester

16.016.316.3Lincoln

19.820.020.3Mansfield

18.618.919.0Nottingham


13.513.914.1England

Source: DWP Working Age Client Group Benefits Data

4.16 Table 4.1 shows that rates of benefit claimingare higher in the ERDF areas than the averages forthe East Midlands (13.0 per cent) and England (13.5per cent) in 2008. The district with the highest rate is

Mansfield with 19.8 per cent of the working agepopulation claiming a benefit. Between 2006 and 2008the proportions of the working age population claimingbenefits have fallen in all areas.


Chapter 4 . Economy

Table 4.2 Employment Land (All B Classes) Floorspace and Land Area Developed2007/08 Local Authorities in ERDF area

2007/082006/07

FloorspaceCompleted (sqm)

Land AreaCompleted (ha)

FloorspaceCompleted (sqm)

Land AreaCompleted (ha)

26,937**0*16,6035.3Ashfield

50,1618.9N/R0.5Bassetlaw

19,7464.7*22,2416.2Bolsover

18,4263.28,370**1.0Boston

6,4001.6N/R5.0Chesterfield

13,651**4.3*45,429**15.0Corby

22,724**4.817,4254.2Derby

*11,4004.0N/R2.1East Lindsey

58,96512.914,5832.8Leicester

7,5102.1N/R1.5Lincoln

17,2953.823,95010.1Mansfield

00N/R3.3Nottingham

253,21550.3148,60157.0Total

Source: Local AuthoritiesN/R No data provided*Floorspace data was not provided for some sites** Land area not given for some new build /redevelopment sites

4.17 Figures for employment land area andfloorspace developed in ERDF districts are given intable 4.2. A total of 50.3 ha and 253,215 sqm ofemployment land and floorspace were reported asdeveloped in the ERDF districts during 2007/08 withthe largest completions being in Leicester City (12.9ha generating 58,965 sqm of floorspace) andBassetlaw (8.9 ha generating 50,161 sqm offloorspace). The area of land developed in 2007/08 isslightly lower than the 2006/07 figure of 57.0 ha.Although overall floorspace figures are higher for2007/08 it should be noted that there were gaps in the2006/07 floorspace data.

Policy Commentary

4.18 Previous AMRs have highlighted difficulties inmonitoring the success or otherwise of this policy dueto the lack of a specification of the extent of the areasconcerned and the consequent problem of assigningrecorded developments to them. Many of these issuesstill remain and as noted in paragraph 4.14 above,ERDF districts have again had to be used as proxiesfor areas of regeneration.

4.19 Continuing progress on developing the major200 acre Markham Vale project in the heart of theDerbyshire part of the Northern Sub-area and centred

on the former Markham Colliery, is a good example ofregeneration activity envisaged by Policy 19. Work onthe new M1 Junction 29a to access the developmentproceeded apace (with the official opening takingplace in June 2008); the Environment Centre has beencompleted and the first phase of the development ofWaterloo Court is on schedule for completion in March2009.

4.20 In Leicester the New Business Quarter phaseone was completed with the former Charles StreetPolice Station, now known as Colton Square, takingletting for high grade office uses. Office developmenthas also continued during the monitoring period at theformer Gypsy Lane brick works which has providedabout 5,500 sqm of office space so far with an eventualpotential for 7,900 sqm.

4.21 Within Northamptonshire, the Core SpatialStrategy for North Northamptonshire was adopted on12th June 2008. Objectives Three (Network ofSettlements) and Nine (Regeneration) highlight theneed to focus regeneration on the areas of most need,including specific reference to Corby. It is important tonote there are pockets of deprivation in the urbancentres of Wellingborough and Kettering and markettowns of North Northamptonshire. There are a numberof major planning applications in the pipeline for new


Chapter 4 . Economy

housing, employment and town centre improvements- these will focus development in urban areas,supporting regeneration in priority areas. The WestNorthamptonshire Core Spatial Strategy has not yetbeen developed, though the Milton Keynes and SouthMidlands Sub Regional Spatial Strategy is clear thaturban areas, focusing on Northampton but includingDaventry and Towcester, will be the focus for newdevelopment. The West NorthamptonshireDevelopment Corporation Planning Principalsdocument and Corporate Plan support the economicdevelopment of the area, highlighting the need toimprove and diversify the area’s economic base,improve town centres, improve connectivity, achievequality in the natural and built environment and develophigh quality skills.

4.22 In Nottinghamshire, the amount of landdevelopedhas fallen compared to last year. Over threequarters of land developed in Nottinghamshire during2007/08 has occurred on sites in Bassetlaw (Harworthin particular) and on scattered sites in Newark andSherwood (although notably on Beacon Hill BusinessPark, Newark and Sherwood Energy Village atOllerton). There is a further notable site underconstruction at Oddicroft Lane, Kirkby in Ashfield. Littleor no development has occurred in Nottingham orRushcliffe Districts.

4.23 The situation with regard to the proportion ofthe working age population claiming any benefit atFebruary 2008 has dropped slightly across all Districtscompared to last year. Mansfield is the highest rankingDistrict whilst Bolsover, which was the highest rankingDistrict last year, is second.

Policy 20 Regional Priorities forEmployment Land

Policy 20

Local authorities, emda and sub-regionalstrategic partnerships should work togetherin housing market area groupings toundertake and keep up to date employmentland reviews to inform the allocation of arange of sites at sustainable locations.

These allocations will:

be responsive to market needs and therequirements of potential investors,including the needs of small businesses;

Policy 20 cont.

encourage the development of prioritysectors as identified in the RegionalEconomic Strategy, namely transportequipment, food and drink, healthcareand construction as well as specificsectors which have local economicsignificance;serve to improve the regeneration ofurban areas;ensure that the needs of high technologyand knowledge based industries areprovided for;promote diversification of the ruraleconomy;assist the development of sites in thePriority Areas for Regeneration; andbe of a scale consistent with theessential policy of urban concentrationas set out in Policy 3.

Target:

To meet local needs as set out in Sub-RegionalStrategies or Local Development Frameworks

Indicators:

Net change in office and industrial land /floorspace and proportion on PreviouslyDeveloped LandEmployment land supply by typePercentage of new houses, employment landand floorspace developed within or adjoiningurban areasDevelopment served by public transportRental and Land ValuesEmployment land reviews undertaken by localauthorities

Results:

4.24 The data presented under this policy has beensplit into the following sections:

land and floorspace developed and underconstruction during 2007/08use of previously developed land (using bothnational data sources and data collected viacdpVision)available supply of employment land (viacommitments data from cdpVision)proximity to public transport (via site data fromcdpVision)


Chapter 4 . Economy

rental and land values (via national data sources)employment land reviews

4.25 Information cannot be provided on thepercentage of new houses, employment land andfloorspace developed within or ‘adjoining urban areas’as there is currently no geographical definition for suchareas.

NET CHANGE IN EMPLOYMENT LAND

4.26 Data from Neighbourhood Statistics on thechanges in floorspace in the East Midlands ispresented in table 4.3. Between 2005/06 and 2006/07retail, office and warehouse floorspace in the EastMidlands increased by 1.3 per cent, 1.1 per cent and5.4 per cent respectively. These increases are all largerthan those for England as whole. Whilst warehousing

has shown continuous growth, floorspace in the othertwo sectors decreased between 2003/04 and 2004/05.Factory floorspace decreased by 1.8 per cent between2005/06 and 2006/07. This is a smaller decrease thanthe English average and continues the trendestablished between 2001/02 and 2004/05.

Table 4.3 Annual Percentage Change in Floorspace East Midlands 2001/02 to 2006/07(%)

2006/072005/062004/052003/042002/032001/02

1.31.4-5.80.90.71.6Retail

1.13.7-3.61.42.12.3Offices

-1.80-2.1-1.6-0.5-0.3Factory

5.45.51.61.61.34.6Warehouse

Source: Neighbourhood Statistics C&I Floorspace Statistics

4.27 Table 4.4 is a comparison of data onemployment land developed and under constructionin 2006/07 and 2007/08 collected via cdpVision.

Table 4.4 Summary of Employment Land Completed and Under Construction 2006/07and 2007/08

2007/08 Total*2007/08 NewBuild

2006/07

187.7156.8259.1Completed Land Area (hectares)

732561731Completed Floorspace (thousand sqm)**

130.3104.5113.4Under Construction land area (hectares)

Source: Local Authorities* includes extensions and redevelopment**Not all authorities, particularly in 2006/07, returned floorspace figures; see Economy Supplementary data table Econ.4 on the data CDfor full detailsAlso see table Econ.4 for details of a few sites where land area could not be given


Chapter 4 . Economy

Table 4.5 Completed Employment Land All Sites 2007/08 (hectares)

TotalMixed**B8- Storage &Distribution

B2- IndustryB1- Office &Light Industry

4.83.6*0.30.00.8Derby

23.218.72.32.20.0Derbyshire

12.90.210.80.01.9Leicester

16.36.22.00.18.0Leicestershire

*49.536.35.80.6*6.8Lincolnshire

*57.327.319.2*3.96.8Northamptonshire

0.00.00.00.00.0Nottingham

*23.8*11.0*0.07.65.2Nottinghamshire

0.00.00.00.00.0Peak District

0.10.00.00.00.1Rutland

*187.7*103.3*40.5*14.4*29.6East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities* Land area not given for some new build/redevelopment sites in Ashfield, Corby, Derby, West Lindsey** Either a mixture of B1, B2 and B8 or B land type unspecified

Figure 4.1 Completed Employment Land by Development Type2007/08 (hectares)

Source: Local AuthoritiesMixed is either a mixture of B1, B2 and B8 or B land type unspecified

4.28 Table 4.5 and figure 4.1 give details ofemployment land completions in the East Midlandswith a total of 187.7 ha of employment land developedduring 2007/08. This compares with a figure of 259.1

ha in 2006/07. Given that this year’s data includesextensions and redevelopment not counted in previousyears, this represents an even greater fall in


Chapter 4 . Economy

development levels. Of the land developed in 2007/08,156.8 ha were on new land, 14.5 ha extensions and

16.5 ha redevelopments.

Table 4.6 Completed 2007/08 Employment Floorspace by Development Type (sqm)

TotalRedevelopmentExtensionsNew Build

22,7247,731014,993Derby

91,88813,3375,32673,225Derbyshire

58,96503,85955,106Leicester

*69,3001,860*11,88755,553Leicestershire

*119,710*18,503*19,415*81,792Lincolnshire

*225,69736,0988,311*181,288Northamptonshire

0000Nottingham

143,77020,23124,62698,913Nottinghamshire

0000Peak District

39000390Rutland

*732,444*97,760*73,424*561,259East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*Missing or incomplete floorspace data from East Lindsey, West Lindsey, Wellingborough

4.29 Table 4.6 gives details of floorspace developedduring 2007/08. Total floorspace developed (732,444square metres), was slightly higher than the 2006/07figure of 731,358 sqm. However, it should be noted

that fewer authorities returned floorspace figures in2006/07 than in 2007/08. 77 per cent of the floorspacewas on new land, 13 per cent on redevelopment landand 10 per cent consisted of extensions.


Chapter 4 . Economy

PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED LAND

Table 4.7 Development on PDL (Brownfield) Employment Land - Completed and UnderConstruction 2006/07 to 2007/08 (%)

2007/08 All Sites*2007/08 New BuildSites Only

2006/07

78.750.673.0Derby

55.451.268.1Derbyshire


23.223.481.9Leicestershire

29.724.336.1Lincolnshire

18.45.621.8Northamptonshire

N/AN/A0.0Nottingham

52.746.335.8Nottinghamshire

64.20.051.8Peak District

77.339.1100.0Rutland


Source: Local AuthoritiesN/A: not applicable as no land of this type was developed* data includes extensions and redevelopments

Table 4.8 Previously developed land by whether vacant/derelict or in use 2006 (percent

EnglandEast Midlands

2120Previously developedvacant land

Vacant and derelict land 2829Derelict land and buildings

68Vacant buildings

5656All vacant and derelict land

2925

Allocated in a local plan orwith planning permissionfor any use

Currently in use

1519

Known redevelopmentpotential but no planningallocation or permission

4444All currently in use

100100All previously developed land that is unused or maybe available for redevelopment

Source: DCLG Planning Statistics‘Currently in use’ refers to land which is currently being used but which has an allocation, planning permission or potential to be reused

4.30 Table 4.7 gives details of land developed orunder construction on brownfield sites. In the EastMidlands in 2007/08, 38.1 per cent of all sites were on

previously developed land (PDL) – in 2006/07 thisfigure was 45.2 per cent. Extensions andredevelopments mostly take place on brownfield land


Chapter 4 . Economy

- if these are excluded from the figures, then theproportion of development on brownfield land dropsto 28.9 per cent. Derby has the highest proportion ofPDL use at 78.7 per cent, whilst only 18.4 per cent ofthe employment land developed or under constructionin Northamptonshire was brownfield.

4.31 Last year’s AMR contained data from CLGplanning statistics - updated data is not available forthis report – and a summary is presented in table 4.8.The 2006 data showed that 56 per cent of developmenton previously developed land was on vacant or derelictland and 44 per cent on land currently in use.

EMPLOYMENT LAND SUPPLY

Table 4.9 Employment Land Commitments All Sites 2007/08 (hectares)

TotalMixed*B8- Storage &Distribution

B2- IndustryB1- Office &Light Industry

256.7223.90.018.114.7Derby

522.7474.719.817.310.9Derbyshire

40.821.81.43.214.4Leicester

276.4211.740.60.024.1Leicestershire

701.9616.814.813.756.5Lincolnshire

328.7222.327.020.558.9Northamptonshire

77.233.70.00.043.5Nottingham

555.0474.32.620.257.9Nottinghamshire

5.54.30.00.50.7Peak District

29.015.41.70.911.0Rutland

2,793.82,298.80107.994.4292.6East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities* Either a mixture of B1, B2 and B8 or B land type unspecified


Chapter 4 . Economy

Figure 4.2 Employment Land Commitments by Development Type2007/08 (hectares)

Source: Local AuthoritiesNottingham data new build onlyMixed is either a mixture of B1, B2 and B8 or B land type unspecified

Table 4.10 Employment Land Commitments 2006/07 to 2007/08 (hectares)

2007/08 Total*2007/08 New Build2006/07

256.7219.9224.7Derby




701.9660.8**656.2Lincolnshire


***77.277.277.2Nottingham


5.50.56.1Peak District

29.021.427.2Rutland

2,793.82,462.62,737.6East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities* Includes extensions and redevelopment**Missing data- 06/07 no site area for a site in West Lindsey06/07 East Lindsey under reported***Nottingham data new build only

4.32 Tables 4.9, 4.10 and figure 4.2 show that therewere 2,793.8 ha of employment land commitments in2007/08, with the majority (82 per cent) for mixed

employment use. The reason for this high proportionis that it is common for developers to seek permissionfor a range of uses which fall within the B Use Class.


Chapter 4 . Economy

This year’s committed figure is higher than that for2006/07 (2,737.6 ha), although it should be noted thatthis year’s figures include extensions and

redevelopments. 2,462.6 ha of the commitments wereon new land, 284.8 ha on redevelopment land and46.4 ha were extensions.

DEVELOPMENTS SERVED BY PUBLIC TRANSPORT

Table 4.11 Developments in the East Midlands served by public transport 2006/07 and2007/08 (%)

2007/082006/07

6664Committed

8056Developed

8165Under construction

Source: Local AuthoritiesDefinition of ‘served by public transport’ is developments where access to public transport under 400 metres from their centroid (centralpoint)No site level data for Nottingham City.Excludes sites where proximity to public transport is unknown.

4.33 Table 4.11 shows that in 2007/08, 80 per centof developed sites were accessible by public transport.Of the sites committed and under construction, 66 percent and 81 per cent were accessible by publictransport respectively. These figures are all higherthan those for 2006/07. It is worth noting that the publictransport accessibility data collected from local

authorities used the criterion of 400 metres from thesite’s centroid (central point). It is therefore possiblethat some very large sites were excluded becausetheir centres lay more than 400 metres from the publictransport service, althoughmuch of the site would haveotherwise qualified for inclusion.

RENTAL AND LAND VALUES

Table 4.12 Industrial Land Values 2007 and 2008 (£000s per hectare)

NottinghamNorthamptonLincolnLeicesterDerby

4754503004003752007From

4754503004003752008

6256503507005252007To

6256503507005252008

5505003256004502007Typical

5505003256004502008

Source: Valuation Office Property Reports (latest July 2008)


Chapter 4 . Economy

Figure 4.3 Shop Rentals 2007 and 2008 (£000s/m2/annum)

Source: Valuation Office Property Reports (latest July 2008)See appendix for full definitions of property types

4.34 The rental levels for all types of non residentialproperty have mostly declined or remained staticbetween 2007 and 2008 (more detail can be found inthe Economy supplementary data appendix tables

Econ.20, 21 and 22 on the data CD); prime positionshop rentals being the most likely to show a decrease,as shown in figure 4.3. Industrial land values haveremained static between 2007 and 2008 (Table 4.12).

EMPLOYMENT LAND REVIEWS

4.35 A number of regional employment land studiesand reviews have been undertaken in recent yearsincluding the ‘East Midlands Employment LandProvision Study’ (for EMRA) December 2006 by RogerTym & Partners and the ‘East Midlands StrategicDistribution Study’ (for emda ), November 2006. Theneed to complete or progress towards full regionalcoverage of joint employment land reviews wasidentified as a key action in the previous AMR – detailsof those reviews that have been completed and thosecurrently in progress are provided in the EconomySupplementary data appendix table Econ 24 on thedata CD.

4.36 Policy 20 advocates that local authorities, emdaand sub-regional strategic partnerships should worktogether in housing market area groupings toundertake and keep up to date employment landreviews, but several of those most recently undertakenin the Eastern and Southern Sub-areas have been atindividual authority level. It should be noted howeverthat tenders for joint studies in these areas are underconsideration. The Leicester and Leicestershire

Employment Land Study includes proposals forStrategic Warehousing, and is being developed intoan Employment Land Strategy.

4.37 Further issues to consider regardingemployment land reviews are the consistency ofmethodology and compatibility of findings. In thisregard it should be noted that following anannouncement on the future of regional structuresexpected at the end of March 2009, work is likely tobegin on a regional employment land study to formpart of the evidence base of the Single RegionalStrategy. This work will include a review of allemployment land studies that have been undertakenat different geographical levels in order to assess theirconsistency and compatibility. This is particularlyimportant because several of the completed studiesare now somewhat out of date.

Policy Commentary

4.38 Details of Derbyshire’s major employment landproject, Markham Vale, have already been providedunder Policy 19.


Chapter 4 . Economy

4.39 There can be a lot of variation year to year inthe amount of employment land developed becausesites are often large - for example in Leicestershire,the former Castle Donington Power Station and sitesclose to major transport routes. The recent Leicesterand Leicestershire HMA Employment Land Study hashighlighted that there is a shortfall in the amount ofavailable sites for offices, industrial and warehousingin Leicester to meet its needs by 2026. Additional siteswill be needed to be found within the Leicester PUAtomeet this anticipated demand. Leicestershire CountyCouncil and Leicester City Council are taking forwardthe results of the Employment Land Study into anEmployment Land Strategy. Implementation of theStrategy, including infrastructure requirements, will beundertaken through a Multi-Area Agreement forLeicester and Leicestershire, involving all localauthorities and other partners working together.

4.40 In Nottinghamshire just over half of the landthat has been developed or was under construction in2007/08 has been on previously developed land withmuch of it occurring in Newark and Sherwood on sitesat Sherwood Energy Village (Ollerton)and Beacon HillBusiness Park (Newark). There is a significant amountof remaining and committed employment land availablein Newark and Sherwood (Sherwood Energy Villageand Bilstorpe Colliery), Ashfield (around Sutton inAshfield), Bassetlaw (Bevercotes Colliery) andMansfield (Abbott Road on the north-west outskirts ofMansfield). Although Rushcliffe has a relatively lowlevel of supply compared to other Districts in theCounty, there is a significant site identified on ChapelLane, Bingham.In addition there are significantcommitments of land identified for B1 use, most notablyat Clipstone(north east of Mansfield), the BaldertonHospital site (south east of Newark)and the NottinghamBusiness Park/Chilwell Dam Farm site (north-west ofNottingham).

4.41 There is a relatively restricted supply ofBrownfield Land in Northamptonshire, which will limitavailable opportunities for future development. emdaand Northamptonshire enterprise, with Local PlanningAuthority support are due to undertake a BrownfieldLand Action Plan (BLAP) for the county.Northamptonshire is currently the only sub region inthe East Midlands not covered by a BLAP. This willhighlight new opportunities and delivery ofopportunities on Brownfield sites.

4.42 Northamptonshire is currently undertaking aStrategic Employment Land Assessment (SELA). Thiswill inform the review of the Core Spatial Strategy

(CSS) in the North and the evidence base for the CSSin West Northamptonshire. This will follow HMAboundaries but also provide a holistic county view thatis consistent with regional employment landmethodology. This will highlight the level and type ofdevelopment required to achieve long term growtharea aspirations. The SELA will also focus on the needto provide a high quality employment land offer as wellas providing quantitative allocations. This will beessential to achieve long term growth targets andposition the county as a location for investment.

Policy 21 Strategic Distribution

Policy 21

Local authorities, emda, Sub-RegionalStrategic Partnerships, the Highways Agencyand Network Rail should work together withprivate sector partners to bring forward sitesfor strategic distribution use in the regionwithpreference to sites in the following broadlocations:

West Northamptonshire housingmarketareaDerby housing market areaNottingham Core housing market areaNorth Northamptonshire housingmarketareaLeicester and Leicestershire housingmarket areaIn allocating sites in local developmentdocuments local authorities should givepriority to sites which can be served byrail freight, and operate as inter-modalterminals.

(see Regional Plan Proposed Changes for fullpolicy wording.)

Targets:

To be developed

Indicator:

B8 land and floorspace


Chapter 4 . Economy

Results:

Table 4.13 B8 Land and Floorspace Completed and Commitments 2007/08

Land Commitment(hectares)

FloorspaceDeveloped (sqm)

Land Developed(hectares)

3.511,8782.2Central Lincolnshire HMA

0.04,2560.0Coastal Lincolnshire HMA

9.05,840**0.6Derby HMA

42.0*51,37912.8Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

26.5*62,26414.6North Northamptonshire HMA

9.91,0260.0Northern HMA

0.900.0Nottingham Core HMA

1.712,176**0.0Nottingham Outer HMA

0.92,4882.1Peak, Dales & Park HMA

13.08,7683.6Peterborough Partial HMA

0.68704.6West Northamptonshire HMA

107.9160,94540.5East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*Some sites in Blaby (1 open storage site) and Wellingborough with no floorspace**Some redevelopment sites in Derby and Ashfield with no land area developedIt should be noted that mixed land use developments, which are not included in these figures, could also have a B8 element.

4.43 Table 4.13 summarises information receivedon B8 developments and commitments. The data inthis table differs from others in this section with figuresbeing presented for housing market areas (HMA), asspecific mention to these geographies is made in thepolicy statement. It should be noted that mixed landuse developments, which are not included in thesefigures, could also have a B8 element. A total of 40.5ha and 160,945 sqm of B8 floorspacewas developedin the East Midlands during 2007/08. Areas used foropen storage would have no floorspace associatedwith them. Out of the B8 commitments total of 107.9ha, the Leicester and Leicestershire HMA accountsfor 42 ha (38.9%) of this.

4.44 Notwithstanding the content of the previousparagraph, it must be said that data for general B8 useis not a very good indicator of strategic distribution asdefined in Policy 20, as a site of over 50 hectares ofdevelopable land. Table 4.13 indicates that nodevelopment or commitment of that size currentlyexists in the Region. Similarly, the B8 content of mixeddevelopments does not represent strategic distributionwhich is characterised by dedicated sites away fromresidential areas. Despite this, consideration doesneed to be given as to how best to monitor ‘true’ sitesfor strategic distribution.

Policy Commentary

4.45 There is a considerable amount of work ongoingacross the region to progress the development ofstrategic distribution sites at key locations. In spite ofthe economic downturn the centrality of the EastMidlandsmeans that it will remain an attractive locationfor distribution and the region is committed to ensuringthat maximum use is made of rail freight. This workhas involved both public and private sector partnersand discussions have taken place with Network Railto ascertain network development plans. Some ofthese discussions have already resulted in thesubmission of planning applications. It is also worthnoting that the Planning Act 2008 has included RailFreight Interchanges in excess of 60 ha as one of thecategories of development that will in future be subjectto consideration by the Infrastructure PlanningCommission.

4.46 The Leicester and Leicestershire HMAEmployment Land Study highlights the need forLeicester to provide 29.4 additional hectares for B8Warehousing. This can not be met within the Cityboundaries, so sites will be needed within the LeicesterPUA. No sites have been identified in Leicester forstrategic distribution, either road or rail based, overthe 50 hectare requirement. One strategic rail freight


Chapter 4 . Economy

site (below 50 hectares) is designated at UlverscroftRoad, but no new development was completed at thissite during the monitoring period.

4.47 Northamptonshire in particular continues toattract strong market demand for B8 developmentincluding the UK’s first Zero carbon B8 developmentat Pineham, Northampton. The importance ofenhancing the sub-region’s rail related distributioncontinues to be a priority. Plans are emerging forexpansion at rail served facilities at Eurohub Corbyand DIRFT stage II is nearing full completion. StrategicDistribution continues to be an important sector for thecounty, although there is a need to minimise the impacton the county’s highways, whilst simultaneouslymaximising job growth in value added elements oflogistics, such as back office and manufacturingfunctions.

Policy 22 Regional Priorities for TownCentres and Retail Development

Policy 22

Local Authorities, emda and Sub-RegionalStrategic Partnerships should work togetheron a sub-area basis to promote the vitalityand viability of existing town centres,including those in rural towns. Where towncentres are under performing, action shouldbe taken to promote investment throughdesign led initiatives and the developmentand implementation of town centre strategies.Local Planning Authorities should:

within town centres bring forward retail,office, residential and leisuredevelopment opportunities, and anyother town centre functions as set outin PPS6, based on identified need;prevent the development or expansionof additional regional scale out-of-townretail and leisure floorspace; andmonitor changes in retail floorspace ona regular basis.

Target:

To meet local needs as set out in LDFs

Indicators:

Amount of completed retail, office and leisuredevelopment by local authority areaPercentage of completed retail, office and leisuredevelopment in town centresOutstanding planning permissions and allocationsfor retail, office and leisure development

Results:

4.48 It should be noted that the thresholds for retailand leisure data collection have been lowered. Thenew thresholds for retail development are over 2,500sqm (A1 use) and 1,000 sqm (A2 use) gross internalfloorspace and for leisure development over 0.4 ha or1,000 sqm gross internal floorspace.

4.49 In 2007/08, 139,346 sqm of retail floorspacewas developed of which 107,304 sqm (77 per cent)was centrally located. There is a total of 135,468 sqmof retail floorspace under construction or committed,76 per cent of this being in central locations (Table4.14).

4.50 In 2007/08, the development of a total of 19,605sqm of leisure floorspace was completed. A further31,966 sqm was under construction and 10,969 sqmwas committed. 75 per cent of the completions and 90per cent of that under construction and committed iscentrally located (Table 4.15).


Chapter 4 . Economy

Table 4.14 Retail land by location 2007/08 (sqm)

Committed or Under ConstructionCompleted

TotalCentral Location*TotalCentral Location*

5,2543,00057,70543,770Derby

5,7715,77115,2011,309Derbyshire

58,42458,42400Leicester

001,7981,798Leicestershire

3,283010,4188,700Lincolnshire

26,79315,40923,25923,259Northamptonshire

0017,78017,780Nottingham

35,94319,99513,18510,688Nottinghamshire

0000Peak District

0000Rutland

135,468102,599139,346107,304East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesFigures refer to only those sites reported on* Includes city centre, town centre, local centre and edge of centre

Table 4.15 Leisure Land in 2007/08 (sqm)

Committed or Under Construction*Completions

TotalCentral locationTotalCentral location

8,5008,5008,4008,400Derby

7,2437,2434,3750Derbyshire

0000Leicester

0000Leicestershire

3,3211,3011,2601,260Lincolnshire

16,33314,00800Northamptonshire

005,5705,140Nottingham

7,5387,53800Nottinghamshire

0000Peak District

0000Rutland

42,93538,59019,60514,800East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesFigures refer to only those sites reported on*Sites in East Northants, Newark & Sherwood, South Holland and East Lindsey were returned without floorspace figures, a total of 22.4haall Out of Centre

Policy Commentary

4.51 As reported in previous AMRs, delivery of Policy22’s priorities for town centre and retail developmentwill be achieved by locating such uses predominantlyin, or, on the edge of town centres, defined as ‘Town

Centres’ for the purposes of national planning guidance(and referred to as ‘Central Locations’ in the tablesabove), in order to sustain and enhance the role ofthose centres.


Chapter 4 . Economy

4.52 Notwithstanding the revised thresholds referredto above which prevent a true like for like comparisonwith data for the previous year, the 2007/08 centrallylocated floorspace proportions of retail development(77 per cent) and retail commitments/underconstruction (76 per cent) are slightly lower than theprevious year’s figures of 78 per cent and 81 per centrespectively. A similar comparison for 2007/08 centrallylocated leisure development (75 per cent) and leisurecommitments/under construction (90 per cent) aresignificantly higher than the 2006/07 figures of 52 percent and 42 per cent respectively. In terms of policysuccess therefore, the retail figures are a matter ofsome concern whereas those for leisure are veryencouraging.

4.53 The previous AMR drew attention to thedifficulties that many authorities in the East Midlandshad in supplying retail data – a point reiterated againthis year in paragraph 4.6 above. The commentary inthe previous paragraph, although written in good faith,is again on the basis of incomplete data supplied bylocal authorities. Progress on this issue needs to bemade before next year. Some specific examples ofretail and leisure developments around the Region areprovided in the following paragraphs.

4.54 In Derbyshire, the principal retail developmentwas the opening of the Westfield Shopping Centre inDerby City Centre in October 2007 which added 43,770sqm of quality retail floorspace anchored byDebenhams, Marks and Spencer and Next. Derby’srental growth increased by 12.5 per cent in the periodMay 2007 – May 2008 which is significantly above the1.1 per cent national average and reflects the City’sincreased vitality and viability following the opening ofWestfield. Derby has risen dramatically in the rankingsof three independent analysts of town centre qualitysince the opening of the new centre -in CACI’srankings, Derby rose from 53rd place to 38th ; inExperian’s from 44th to 26th and in Trevor WoodAssociates’ from 51 st to 10 th .Each company usesdifferent assessment criteria but an increase in theamount of floorspace, an improvement in overallphysical quality and the introduction of new premiumretailers have all contributed to the improvedrankings.As only to be expected, the number of vacantunits in the remainder of the City increased after theopening of Westfield and this has been exacerbatedby wider economic issues that have impacted on theretail sector. However, with Primark taking one of theM&S stores on the Corn Market and Tesco Expressexpected to take the St Peters Street store in the nearfuture, the situation is already improving.

4.55 Elsewhere in Derbyshire, the most significantretail development was the opening in October 2007of a new Sainsburys superstore (4,724 sqm) inMatlock. The development also included a partial

relocation of the bus station and the construction of atown centre relief road which has removed much ofthe through traffic from the town’s shopping area.

4.56 Although no new retail floorspace above thethreshold was recorded for Leicester during 2007/08,it should be noted that a number of majordevelopments were under construction in the cityduring the reporting year. This includes a major citycentre mixed use scheme and two new conveniencegoods stores. The most significant of these is theHammerson/Hermes’ £350million Highcross Leicesterproject which has more than doubled the size of theformer Shires Shopping Centre (Highcross opened inSeptember 2008 and comprises a John Lewis store,a wide range of leading shops, restaurants, a multiscreen cinema and 120 apartments and has created2,500 new jobs in the service sector). Other job growthhas been in construction associated with theregeneration activity in the City. Although no majorleisure developments were recorded in Leicester itshould be noted that Leicester’s new performing artscentre, ‘Curve’ was nearing completion during thereporting year (it opened in November 2008) and anew Digital Media Centre is currently underconstruction and is due to open in 2009.

4.57 Elsewhere in Leicestershire, only onecompleted site for new retail floorspace was reportedin Melton Mowbray. Otherwise the only retaildevelopments to have taken place were small in scale.In 2007/08, the major market towns of Hinckley andLoughborough were in the process of completing theirtown centre Masterplans and other towns such asMelton Mowbray, Coalville, Blaby and Oadby &Wigston were beginning this process. Major schemesare expected to be submitted following this, forinstance in Coalville, Hinckley and Loughborough, withmajor increases in floorspace proposals from 2009/10expected. Smaller settlements such as Ashby areunlikely to see any significant increases in the amountof retail floorspace in the immediate future due to landconstraints. The results of surveys in 2006 and 2008of users of market towns show a variety of perceptionsand needs to respond to.

4.58 Town centre development is a key prioritythroughout Northamptonshire in line with growth arearequirements. There has been strong developmentwithin the retail sector, with the Willows Centre inCorby being successfully completed and applicationsreceived for further expansion. There are furthermasterplans, development proposals and schemesaround the county, including Daventry, Kettering,Wellingborough and Towcester. Northampton hasperformed well in Experian retail rankings, despite adecrease in prime rental rates. Expansion plans forthe Grosvenor centre and public realm works areplanned to ensure that Northampton achieves its roleas a regional centre. The county also shares significant


Chapter 4 . Economy

travel to leisure patterns with surrounding locationsoutside the East Midlands, such as Milton Keynes,Peterborough and Banbury. These locations all haveambitious plans for retail and leisure development andwill impact on the county through increased competitionfor leisure and retail spend. This will place increasedneed to deliver the planned developments in thecounty’s core urban areas to ensure that they are ableto retain local expenditure and attract new investmentand jobs to the area.

4.59 In Nottingham City Centre, the principal retailscheme was the redevelopment of Trinity Squareincluding TK Maxx and Waitrose stores and thecreation of a new public square.

4.60 Elsewhere in Nottinghamshire,the largest retailgains were in Mansfield. A significant retail store hasbeen completed on an edge of town site previouslyoccupied by a leisure centre, whilst amajor town centrescheme involving the redevelopment of the Town'sbus station has not progressed beyond the outline

planning permission stage. Other significant retail gainsinclude a completed development in Worksop(Bassetlaw) and the identification of sites,at Giltbrookand Eastwood (Broxtowe) and Hucknall (Ashfield).Leisure land gains, whilst not many in number,arescattered around the County with most being in edgeof or out of centre locations.

4.61 In terms of studies of retail, leisure andcommuting patterns in the East Midlands, there isexisting research by Experian as well as forthcomingresearch on secondary centres of economic growth,which will provide typologies of towns according totheir importance to the wider economy as business,employment, service (including leisure and retail) andpopulation centres. This work, commissioned by emdaand carried out by Lincoln University, is not availablewithin the timescale of this current AMR, but is flaggedup as a forthcoming publication of interest. Furtherd e t a i l s a r e t o b e f o u n d a twww.intelligenceeastmidlands.org.uk/content/view/1144/2/.

Policy 23 Regional Priorities for Casinodevelopment

Policy 23

Local Authorities, emda and Sub-RegionalStrategic Partnerships should work togetherto ensure that proposals for new casinoslicensed under the 2005 Gambling Act benefitthe regeneration areas identified in Policy 19and are subject to a full assessment of social,economic and environmental impact.

Target:

To be developed

Indicator:

Number of casinos developed in regenerationareas

Results:

4.62 During 2007/08 a 5,140 sqm casino wasdeveloped in a redundant retail store in UpperParliament Street in Nottingham city centre and acommitment exists for a 4,000 sqm casino as part ofthe Riverlights development on the site of the formerbus station in Derby city centre.

Policy Commentary

4.63 The previous AMR reported that in July 2007,the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sportannounced that the Government had decided to lookagain at whether regeneration may be a better way ofmeeting economic and social needs than the creationof regional casinos and that further developments onthe issue were awaited.

4.64 The results of this policy review were reportedin February 2008 with plans for the regional casino inManchester dropped, but the proposed 8 large casinos(including in Milton Keynes) and 8 small casinos(including in East Lindsey) reaffirmed. Both casinosreferred to in paragraph 4.62 above, in Nottinghamand in Derby, are situated in urban locations asadvocated by Policy 23.

4.65 Northampton already has a number of existingcasinos operating within the conurbation. There arecurrently no new proposals for casinos within thecounty, but the proposal for a 4,000 sqm facility inMilton Keynes would impact on the county.


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.intelligenceeastmidlands.org.uk/content/view/1144/2/

Policy 24 Regional Priorities for RuralDiversification

Policy 24

Local Authorities, emda and Sub-RegionalStrategic Partnerships (SSPs) should worktogether to promote the continueddiversification and further development of therural economy, where this is consistent witha sustainable pattern of development and theenvironmentally sound management of thecountryside. Local development documentsshould develop the policy according to localcircumstance but particular considerationshould be given to:

‘economically lagging’ rural areasidentified by the Government’s RuralStrategy, including the districts of EastLindsey, West Lindsey, South Holland,Bolsover, High Peak, and the more ruralparts of Derbyshire Dales, Bassetlaw andNewark and Sherwood; andthose areas that fall within Rural ActionAreas identified by SSPs.

Targets:

Increase in new business start ups and new jobsIncrease numbers in employment

Indicators:

Number of new business start upsNew jobs createdNumbers in employment in rural areasJob density estimatesAccessibility to essential services in rural areas

Results:

4.66 It should be noted that the definitions of ruraland urban areas used here are pre April 2009definitions from defra, which can be accessed atwww.defra.gov.uk/rural/ruralstats/rural-definition.htm.

4.67 Figure 4.4 and tables 4.16 and 4.17 giveinformation on the stock of VAT registered firms in theEast Midlands and also on the registration andderegistration of firms. The number of VATregistrations in the East Midlands has been increasingsince 2004 (measured per 10,000 population). VATregistered firms per head and registration andderegistration rates per capita are higher in more ruralareas. In 2006, the most rural category (R80) had 33VAT registrations per 10,000 adult populationcompared with 21 and 23 in other urban (OU) andlarge urban (LU) respectively. The limitation of the dataused is that very small firms or those exempt from VATare not included in the statistics.

Figure 4.4 VAT registered stock at the start of 2007 (per10,000 adult population)

Source: NOMIS VAT registrations data via ONSDefra rural definition pre April 2009


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.defra.gov.uk/rural/ruralstats/rural-definition.htm

Table 4.16 VAT registered stock at the start of the year (per 10,000 adult population

2007200620052004Rural Category

502501500500R80

412406399392R50

371368366364SR

283278274269OU

307304304301LU

379376371368East Midlands

Source: NOMIS VAT registrations data via ONSDefra rural definition pre April 2009, R80 most rural- LU most urban

Table 4.17 VAT registrations and deregistrations 2006 (per 10,000 adult population)

Deregistrations per 10,000 populationRegistrations per 10,000 populationRural Category

3341R80

2839R50

2634SR

2130OU

2331LU

2635East Midlands

Source: NOMIS VAT registrations data via ONSDefra rural definition pre April 2009, R80 most rural- LU most urban

Table 4.18 Number of Jobs in Rural Categories 2006 and 2007

Percentage Change 2006 to2007

20072006Rural Category

4.5295,200282,400R80

3.9312,000300,200R50

2.2296,600290,200SR

3.7472,800455,800OU

2.3520,300508,700LU

3.31,897,0001,837,100East Midlands*

Source: Annual Business Inquiry*rounded figures may not sum to total,R80 most rural- LU most urban

4.68 The Annual Business Inquiry (ABI) data, intable 4.18, shows that there was a 3.3 per cent growthin jobs in the East Midlands between 2006 and 2007.This average figure covers increases in the most rural

areas (R80) of 4.5 per cent, down to significant ruralareas (SR) of 2.2 per cent. There is also, of course,geographical variation within these categories e.g. inR80 local authorities from 0.5 per cent in Harboroughto 9.6 per cent in South Northamptonshire.


Chapter 4 . Economy

Figure 4.5 Job Density in Rural Areas- East Midlands 2006

Source NOMISDefra rural definition pre April 2009

4.69 Figure 4.5 shows the job density of the varioustypes of areas in the East Midlands. Job density ishighest in other urban (OU) and large urban (LU) areas– in both cases they are above the equivalentemployment rate in these areas reflecting the higherlevels of commuting. The density for the other areas

(which include the different levels of rural area) aresimilar to each other and below the urban, regionaland national averages. In short, the message is that,even though there are fewer people in rural areas,there are still fewer jobs to go round than in urbanareas.


Chapter 4 . Economy

Table 4.19 Percentage of residential delivery points within specified distance of servicein the East Midlands 2008 (%)

Secondaryschools (4km)

Primaryschools (2km)

Post offices(2km)

GP surgeries(all sites)(4km)

Banks andbuildingsocieties(4km)

39.642.437.461.736.4Hamlet and Isolateddwellings - Sparse

62.174.868.283.261.5Hamlet and isolatedDwellings - Less sparse

29.864.360.059.618.4Village – Sparse

45.079.865.773.240.5Village - Less sparse

81.099.799.8100.093.7Town and fringe- Sparse

77.599.799.397.774.2Town and fringe- Lesssparse

97.799.699.8100.0100.0Urban >10K - Sparse

99.6100.099.6100.099.5Urban >10K - Less sparse

Source: www.ruralcommunities.gov.uk

Figure 4.6 Accessibility in Rural and Urban areas 2006 to 2008:Residential delivery points within specified distance of service in

the East Midlands (%)

Source: www.ruralcommunities.gov.ukRural households are those defined by the 2004 Rural and Urban definition as 'Hamlet and isolated dwellings', 'Village' and 'Town andfringe'.


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.ruralcommunities.gov.uk/

http://www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk



Table 4.20 Accessibility in Rural andUrban areas 2000 to 2008: Percentage of residentialdelivery points within specified distance of service in the East Midlands (%)

20082007200620052000Service

UrbanRuralUrbanRuralUrbanRuralUrbanRuralUrbanRural

99.559.999.359.499.459.699.459.499.760.7Banks and buildingsocieties (4km)

##99.990.999.988.9##100.085.7Cashpoints (all)(4km)

##99.877.499.667.3####Cashpoints (free)(4km)

100.086.899.985.499.985.3####GP surgeries (allsites) (4km)

99.880.599.780.599.780.599.780.499.981.5

GP surgeries(principal sites)(4km)

97.750.997.650.197.651.898.157.898.060.6Jobcentres (8km)

99.663.399.361.799.465.9####NHS Dentists (4km)

100.085.799.985.899.987.599.988.1100.090.2Petrol stations (4km)

99.683.599.585.999.786.6##99.987.3Post offices (2km)

100.089.599.789.799.89099.890.2100.090.2Primary schools(2km)

99.992.899.891.8######Public Houses (2km)

99.663.499.363.099.462.999.463.399.664.3Secondary schools(4km)

99.976.299.875.799.875.399.875.299.873.5Supermarkets (4km)

Source: www.ruralcommunities.gov.ukRural households are those defined by the 2004 Rural and Urban definition as 'Hamlet and isolated dwellings', 'Village' and 'Town andfringe'.# Not available

4.70 Table 4.19 details the accessibility of differenttypes of areas in the East Midlands to a variety ofservices. The accessibility data shows that, as mightbe expected, in every respect those living in ruralcommunities have less access to facilities. Whetherthis is a problem depends on the trade-off some peoplehave made in choosing to live in what might be seenas more pleasant rural environments. For the lessaffluent living in rural areas, the access issue remainsa significant problem.

4.71 Table 4.20 and Figure 4.6 present data onchanges of accessibility to various services over time.No significant changes in either rural or urban areasare discernible, with the possible exception of evidenceof declining accessibility to post offices in rural areas,as a result of recent closures – a trend which seemsdestined to continue with more closures in both ruraland urban areas in the pipeline.

Policy Commentary

4.72 Previous AMRs reported that despite thecontinuing decline in the numbers employed in theregion’s primary industries, evidence suggested thatpolicies geared towards the diversification anddevelopment of the rural economy were succeeding– the above average increases in job numbers in themost rural areas in the East Midlands (Table 4.18)would suggest that this is continuing.

4.73 In this context, it is worth noting the work andrecommendations of the Matthew Taylor Commissionon the Rural Economy and Affordable Housing. TheStudy found that very few economies in rural Englandare still driven by agriculture and rural economies aremuchmore modern, diverse and dynamic than is oftenthought to be the case. It also found that ruraleconomies are characterised by a higher proportionof small and micro businesses, self employment and


Chapter 4 . Economy



home based work. Account needs to be taken of thesefactors as part of the approach towards ensuring thesustainability of rural communities.

4.74 With the exception of post offices, there is littleevidence of a reduction in accessibility to services inrural areas. The continuing post office closureprogramme is a matter of considerable concern,especially in rural areas, because of the essentialnature of the facility they provide. As part of the policyto promote the continued diversification anddevelopment of the rural economy, measures to ensurethe continued viability of existing businesses andservices should not be overlooked.

4.75 By way of illustration, Northamptonshire hasno areas classified as economically lagging and hasexperienced strong VAT and jobs growth in rural areassuch as South Northamptonshire, Daventry and EastNorthamptonshire. There remains concern over knownpockets of deprivation within rural areas and the needto support the wider rural economy. Support for ruraldiversification has been highlighted within the county’sInvitation to Apply for Grant Funding (IAGF) 2009/10to 2011 to ensure activities that support the ruraleconomy in a sustainable manner are forthcoming.The Northamptonshire Rural Renewal Unit hasundertaken Rural Pathfinders to tackle the many areasof deprivation that affect isolated rural communities.

4.76 Planning Policy through the CSS in NorthNorthamptonshire and emerging WestNorthamptonshire CSS highlights the role of the mainurban centres for the location of major housing andemployment growth, in line with SustainableCommunities Plan requirements. NorthNorthamptonshire CSS specifically highlights the roleof Rural Service Centres of providing a hub for a range

of critical services for rural communities to access.There are known concerns over the access of regionalbusiness support services in the county’s rural areas.

Policy 25 Regional Priorities for ICT

Policy 25

Local Authorities and Sub-Regional StrategicPartnerships should work with the privatesector and relevant public bodies to:

improve progressively the level ofservice from existing broadbandinfrastructure;promote the take up and use of ICT bybusinesses, and the public and voluntarysectors; andensure that ICT provision for newdevelopment is considered at the designstage.

Target:

20 per cent of businesses trading online by 2010

N.B. This target has been achieved: 25 per cent ofall businesses take orders over the internet [source:2006 e-adoption Survey]

Indicators:

Access to broadband extended to all areasLevel of service from broadband infrastructureTake up and use of broadband services

Results:

Table 4.21 Proportion of Businesses with Computers with Broadband/ Internet Access2005 and 2006 (per cent)

20062005

8367Broadband

9083Internet Access

Source: emda 2006 eAdoption Survey

4.77 The East Midlands Business e-adoption Surveytook place in autumn 2006 and involved 3,400telephone interviews with businesses of varying sizesup to 250 employees across a range of industrieswithin the private sector. The results from thetelephone interviews were weighted to represent the241,515 East Midlands’ businesses and show that in

2006, first generation broadband is availablethroughout the region. 83 per cent of businesses thatuse computers now use broadband, typically to supportan online presence that is increasingly being used fortrading purposes (Table 4.21).


Chapter 4 . Economy


Table 4.22 Proportion of households covered by broadband 2005 (per cent)

Quarter 4 2005

99.9Digital Subscriber Line

55Cable

21Fixed Wireless Access

99.9Total

Source: Ovum www.dti.gov.uk

4.78 The vast majority of the East Midlands hasaccess to broadband, with 99.9 per cent having accessin 2005 according to ‘UK Broadband Status SummaryMarch 2006’ produced for the Department of Tradeand Industry (Table 4.22).

Policy Commentary

4.79 emda will shortly be commissioning anothereAdoption Survey which will update the data onbusiness use for 2008/09.

4.80 Despite almost all homes now having accessto Broadband (though some 35 per cent of homesthroughout the UK having not taken it up and a further5% still using a dial-up service) there is growingconcern that the existing infrastructure and availablebandwidth will not be sufficient to support the growing

demand for the delivery of services from the privateand public sectors and demand from consumers forservices such as HD television, therefore putting thecompetitive position of the UK at threat in the nearfuture. Table 4.23 shows the East Midlands to havethe fourth highest average broadband speed out ofthe UK regions. However, the current figure of 3275Kbps is just a fraction of the speed being discussedfor next generation broadband (of anything up to 100Mbps). A massive investment in broadbandinfrastructure will be needed in the coming years toaddress this and as yet it is not clear where the fundingwill come from, particularly to provide high speedbroadband services away from the urban centres. TheGovernment published its interim 'Digital Britain' reportin January 2009 which looked at this issue although itis not yet clear whether any commitments will be madeto provide the necessary funding.

Table 4.23 Average Broadband Speeds UK Regions

Download Speed (Kbps)Region

4,460London

3,594North East

3,393North West

3,275East Midlands

3,253South East

3,204Yorkshire & the Humber

3,193West Midlands

3,090East

2,876Scotland

2,869South West

2,587Wales

2,258Northern Ireland

Source: Thinkbroadband

4.81 To date BT have announced two programmesto bring next generation broadband to the UK - 21CN(21st Century Network) announced over 12 monthsago. This £10bn national programme is intended to


Chapter 4 . Economy

http://www.dti.gov.uk


upgrade the core network across the UK with approxhalf billion promised to be spent in the East Midlands.BT also announced in 2008 the intention to spend£1.5bn on rolling out fibre optic networks across theUK.

Policy 41 Regional Priorities for Tourism

Policy 41

Local Authorities, emda, Sub-RegionalStrategic Partnerships and other relevantpublic bodies should seek to identify areasof potential for tourism growth whichmaximise economic benefit whilst minimisingadverse impact on the environment and localamenity. Potentially adverse effects oninternationally designated natureconservation sites should be avoided ormitigated. Measures should include:

provision for additional tourist facilitiesincluding accommodation close topopular destinations that have adequateenvironmental and infrastructurecapacity, particularly those withinwalking and cycling distance;improvements in the quality of existingfacilities and services; andimprovements to accessibility by publictransport and other non-car modes.

Targets:

15,000 new jobs in tourism by 2008Visitor spending in region to increase by 2 percent by 2010Tourism to contribute 4.5 per cent of region’sGDP by 2010

Indicators:

Change in number of new of jobs in touristrelated activitiesVisitor spending in regionNumber of overnight stays in region

Results:

4.82 Data from The STEAM (Scarborough TourismEconomy Activity Model) is presented in table 4.24.Figures for 2007 show increases in jobs supported bytourism, numbers of overnight stays and visitorspending.

Table 4.24 Tourism in the East Midlands 2003 to 2007

20072006200520042003

97,82895,13095,12493,63594,563Full time equivalent jobs supported by tourism

5,9185,8205,3515,2165,206Spend by Visitors (million pounds)

47.4345.7042.7441.5941.38Number of overnight stays (million)

Source: STEAM (Scarborough Tourism Economy Activity Model) www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk


Chapter 4 . Economy


Table 4.25 Jobs in tourism related activities 2006 and 2007

% of all jobsin 2007

% of all jobsin 2006

20072006

6.36.68,1007,900Derby

6.26.310,00010,000Leicester

####Rutland

7.06.912,80012,700Nottingham

8.78.523,90023,000Derbyshire

7.57.420,30019,900Leicestershire

8.78.623,10021,600Lincolnshire

6.66.520,70019,500Northamptonshire

7.98.022,30021,500Nottinghamshire

7.57.5142,900137,400East Midlands

8.28.21,865,9001,864,700England

Source: Annual Business Inquiry, National Statistics definition of tourism related industriesNot comparable with years prior to 2006# Sample size too small

4.83 Between 2006 and 2007 there was a smallincrease in the number of tourism related jobs in theupper tier authorities in the East Midlands althoughthe proportion of all jobs remained unchanged at 7.5per cent (Table 4.25).

Policy Commentary

4.84 Tourism is an important source of employmentin the East Midlands, particularly in Derbyshire andLincolnshire, where the percentage of all jobs in 2007(8.7 per cent) exceeded the national average (8.2 percent). In the context of the success of this policy, it isencouraging to report increases in all three indicators

- the number of jobs supported by tourism, numbersof overnight stays and visitor spending. The largenumber of recognised visitor attractions in the regionoffers the potential for these trends to continue.

Impact of the Credit Crunch

4.85 As indicated in the opening paragraph of thischapter, although this AMR should only relate to the2007/08 financial year, the following information isincluded in order to give an early indication of theimpact upon the East Midlands of the recent downturnin the economy which has come to be known as “TheCredit Crunch”.


Chapter 4 . Economy

Table 4.26 Number of Working Age Residents Claiming Job Seekers AllowanceNovember 2007 to November 2008

Englan

d

East

Midland

s

Rutland

Notts

Nottin

gham

Northants

Lincs

Leics

Leicester

Derbys

Derby

657,27052,5521427,1037,0987,0558,0194,5907,2917,5953,659Nov-07

659,90852,1471237,1967,1166,8617,9474,4407,1167,5713,777Dec-07

690,66754,6431397,7177,1927,4237,8294,8217,3088,2953,919Jan-08

705,18556,0781568,0417,4517,9567,9834,7957,3658,3653,966Feb-08

700,43355,9511558,0417,4048,0697,7724,8037,4948,2533,960Mar-08

695,26055,9691418,1727,6138,0537,6714,6317,4858,1724,031Apr-08

693,87056,0671437,9547,5568,1527,5654,6787,6718,1654,183May-08

695,55056,2791327,9777,5158,2567,6124,6717,8178,1384,161Jun-08

722,89759,0351518,3947,6608,6457,8425,1018,2078,7064,329Jul-08

766,17863,1101799,1657,9319,3278,3515,6878,4949,4144,562Aug-08

786,60264,7141679,5148,1319,3298,7665,8458,5279,7604,675Sep-08

808,07466,1251709,6878,2319,4269,3246,0208,48310,1914,593Oct-08

878,04772,72418810,8418,58310,48610,5326,8538,77911,3935,069Nov-08

Source: NOMIS Claimant Count

Table 4.27 Proportion of Working Age Residents Claiming Job Seekers AllowanceNovember 2007 to November 2008 (%)

Englan

d

East

Midland

s

Rutland

Notts

Nottin

gham

Northants

Lincs

Leics

Leicester

Derbys

Derby

2.11.90.61.53.61.72.01.23.81.62.5Nov-07

2.11.90.51.53.61.61.91.13.71.62.6Dec-07

2.22.00.61.63.61.71.91.23.81.82.6Jan-08

2.22.10.71.73.71.92.01.23.91.82.7Feb-08

2.22.00.71.73.71.91.91.23.91.82.7Mar-08

2.22.00.61.73.81.91.91.23.91.82.7Apr-08

2.22.10.61.73.81.91.91.24.01.82.8May-08

2.22.10.61.73.81.91.91.24.11.82.8Jun-08

2.32.20.71.83.82.01.91.34.31.92.9Jul-08

2.42.30.81.94.02.22.01.44.42.03.1Aug-08

2.52.40.72.04.12.22.11.54.52.13.2Sep-08

2.52.40.82.04.12.22.31.54.42.23.1Oct-08

2.82.70.82.34.32.52.61.74.62.53.4Nov-08



Chapter 4 . Economy

Figure 4.7 Proportion of Working Age Residents Claiming JobSeekers Allowance November 2007 to November 2008 (%)


Figure 4.8 Change in the Number Claiming Job Seekers AllowanceNovember 2007 to November 2008 (%)


4.86 Tables 4.26 and 4.27 and Figures 4.7 and 4.8show changes to the numbers and proportion ofworking age residents claiming jobseekers allowancebetween November 2007 and November 2008. InNovember 2008 there were 72,724 people claiming

jobseekers allowance in the East Midlands, an increaseof 20,172 (38 per cent) on the same month in 2007.Unemployment rates in November 2008 ranged from0.8 per cent in Rutland to 4.6 per cent in Leicester.The number of unemployed people in the counties of


Chapter 4 . Economy

Derbyshire and Nottinghamshire rose by more than a50 per cent. The cities of Leicester and Nottingham,where unemployment was already higher, saw thesmallest increases of 20 and 21 per cent respectively.

4.87 The Federation of Small Businesses (FSB) inthe East Midlands has, for a number of years,undertaken a regular quarterly survey to provide apicture of the economic climate and its effect on smalland micro businesses within the region.

4.88 The results their latest quarterly survey arebased on 615 responses, submitted during the firsttwo weeks in January 2009 from small businesseslocated within the East Midlands. The survey showedbusiness confidence levels in October 2008 hittingtheir lowest for many years. Over half of the

respondents to the January survey have stated thattheir confidence has continued to decline into 2009.For 33 per cent of them, their confidence has declinedsubstantially since October. A minority of 17 per centreport increased confidence in from October 2008 toJanuary 2009 (figure 4.9).The FSB survey notes thetrend that has emerged over the last 12 months offalling sales has continued. Just over half (51 per cent)of small businesses in the quarter to January 2009report turnover having fallen since October and, ofthose, 31 per cent have experienced a fall in turnoverof more than 3 per cent. It is worth noting however thatover a quarter (26 per cent) of small businesses arestill experiencing growth and, of these, 11 per centreport substantial growth of more than 3 per cent(figure 4.10).

Figure 4.9 Change in Business ConfidenceOctober 2007 – January2009

Source: Federation of Small Businesses


Chapter 4 . Economy

Figure 4.10 Change in Business Sales October 2007 – January2009

Source: Federation of Small Businesses

4.89 The first paragraph of this chapter provided aweb link to ‘The East Midlands Economy – A JointResponse To Changing Economic Circumstances’(August 2008), by BERR, H.M. Treasury and emda atw w w . e m d a . o r g . u k / u p l o a d d o c u m e n t s /eastmidlandseconomytaggedforweb.pdf. Thisdocument states that the global economy is facing thesignificant challenges of tighter credit conditions, rising

input and commodity costs, especially energy costs.Whilst recognising that the region must prepare fordifficult times ahead, it argues that ‘Structural changein the economy has made the East Midlands moreresilient than in the past, with a more diverse businessbase, meaning that the region is better placed towithstand the current economic difficulties’. FutureAMRs will have the task of reporting on whether or notthis is the case.


Chapter 4 . Economy



Chapter 5 Environment

ActionsKey Points

Defra has set milestone targets nationally for each yearto 2010, in order to achieve its aims.

While across the Region we are nearing the nationaltarget for the condition for SSSIs there is anincreasing need to consolidate efforts to date if we

Particular efforts need to be made in achievingfavourable condition status in Moorland andWoodlandSSSI and on the Wash SSSI.

are to avoid a downward turn. The achievement ofMoorland and Woodland SSSI favourable conditiontargets are proving challenging as are targets for TheWash.

Further significant region-wide positive change in thefarmland bird index is not likely to happen until therehas been widespread implementation of the newagri-environment schemes.

The population of both farmland and woodland birdscontinue to fluctuate in their recorded populations.

The successor to Defra's Countryside Stewardshipagri-environment scheme, the Entry and Higher Levelof the Environmental Stewardship scheme, has beenimplemented, with particularly high rates of take-upcompared to other regions; these will show biodiversitybenefits over time.

The Regional Forestry Framework for the EastMidlands; ‘Space4trees’ will guide the future work ofthe Forestry Commission and its partners in theRegion.

The figure for woodland creation is once againsignificant but falls well short of the rate required tomeet the target set out in the RSS.

The existing indicator, whilst acting as a very usefulfirst step towards gaining a better understanding of theRegion’s diverse landscapes, needs to be refined andfurther more meaningful indicators developed.

Landscape Character Assessment coveragecontinues to make progress across the Region butthere are still gaps in coverage at the county anddistrict level.

There is a need for criteria based policies in LocalDevelopment Documents and Supplementary PlanningDocuments (SPDs).Work has been done in the Regionto develop detailed SPDs for use by DevelopmentControl Officers. This work needs replicating morewidely.

Efforts should be made to integrate County historiclandscape characterisations into local landscapecharacter assessments.

It is therefore even more important that anunderstanding of the historic environment resource ispart of the evidence base for LDFs; landscape andurban characterisation are tools that can contribute tothis understanding.

There has been a slight increase in the numbers oflisted buildings at risk and there is emerging evidencethat designated sites will be adversely affected bygrowth proposals.


Chapter 5 . Environment

ActionsKey Points

The Region’s response to the EU Water FrameworkDirective will be led by the Environment Agency andwill be worked out over the coming months and years.

Studies by EMRA as part of the development of therevised RSS have shown that the Region will be shortof water in the future if measures are not taken toreduce water use, particularly in new developments.

The EU Water Framework Directive will continue tobe a key driver for the protection and improvementof the water environment for the next 25 years, withits central concept of integrated water resourcemanagement for water basins.

Progress is beingmade on undertaking Strategic FloodRisk Assessments, which are the responsibility of localauthorities; the role of the Environment Agency in thesestudies, as set out in PPS25, needs to be establishedin each case.

A significant number of Strategic Flood RiskAssessments have either been undertaken, or areplanned, to better understated and respond todevelopment proposals in relation to flood risk.

While improving, the number of local authoritiessupplying figures on Sustainable Drainage Schemes(SuDS) is low and while increasing, the number of

While improving the number supplying figures onSustainable Drainage Schemes (SuDS) is low andagain while increasing the number of planning

planning permissions granted for developments whichcontaining SuDS was not as high as it should be giventhe clear RSS policy.

permission granted for developments which containingSuDS was not as high as it should be given the clearRSS policy.

Indicators will need to be developed and workcontinued to spread the common understanding of theGI concept and good practice.

The understanding and use of the GreenInfrastructure concept and of the RSS policy, isgrowing in the region. Suitable indicators for the newGreen Infrastructure policy do not yet exist.

The Region has seen much increased interest in winddevelopment, including development of the firstoffshore turbines in the region and the number of

The East Midlands is making considerable progressin generating electricity from renewable resources,with a substantial increase in energy generated bywind power. installations is expected to increase markedly in the

next year. The 2010 target of 122MW onshore windseems likely to be met, but there is still someway togo to the 2020 target. Lincolnshire remains the mainfocus for development, but other areas of the regionare beginning to see activity.

Introduction

5.1 In this environmental section there are seven significant effect indicators:

improvements in the condition of land classified as Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI);change in areas of biodiversity importance (including priority habitats and species by type) and areasdesignated for their intrinsic value including sites of international, national, regional or sub-regionalsignificance;percentage of region covered by Landscape Character Assessments (LCAs);number of listed buildings at risk;planning permissions granted contrary to Environment Agency advice;



ecological river quality;number of strategic flood risk assessments undertaken.

5.2 This year several new questions were added to the local authority questionnaire. The subjects coveredby these questions are green infrastructure, biodiversity, historic environment resources, conservation areas,conservation staff and energy reduction and efficiency. The questions on Landscape Character Assessmentsand Strategic Flood Risk Assessments were expanded.




Monitoringsystems not inplace

No net lossof culturalassets

RSS CoreCases ofdamage tonatural and

ProtectingandEnhancing

26

cultural assetsthe Region’sandcompensatorymeasures

Natural andCulturalAssets

NaturalEngland

93 per cent ofSSSI areas inthe East

95 per centof SSSIs infavourablecondition by2010

RSS Core

SignificantEffectIndicator

Improvements inthe condition ofland classifiedas Sites ofSpecialScientificInterest (SSSI)

Midlands arefavourable orfavourablerecoveringcompared to 68per cent in 2006

LA returnsThe number ofbuildings at riskcontinued toincrease in 2008

Decreasefrom 2006levels

RSS Core


Number of listedbuildings at risk

LA returns25 per cent ofconservationareas in the

100 per centcoverage

RSS CoreConservationArea AppraisalsandManagementPlans in place

RegionalPriorities forthe HistoricEnvironment

27

East Midlandshave aConservationArea Appraisaland 12 per centhave aConservationAreaManagementProposal

LA returns76 per cent of allEast Midland’sauthorities have

To bedeveloped

ContextualHistoricEnvironmentRecordsavailable access to





HistoricEnvironmentRecords data

LA returnsEast MidlandsAuthorities have62.8 fte building

To bedeveloped

ContextualNumber ofconservationofficers

conservationofficers, with afurther 33.5 fteother staff whoundertakeconservationwork

LA returnsTwo authoritieshave anadopted Green

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreGreenInfrastructureStrategies inplace

RegionalPriorities forEnvironmentaland GreenInfrastructure

28

InfrastructureStrategy. Afurther 22 arecurrentlypreparing aGreenInfrastructureStrategy

LA returnsInsufficient newdata collected

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreTaking accountofEnvironmentalCapacity

DefraBird populationsshowing smallrecovery

To meetRegionalBiodiversity

Regional Core


Change in areasof biodiversityimportance,including:

priority habitatsand species (bytype); and areas

Priorities forEnhancingthe Region’sBiodiversity

29

HabitatManagementandRecreationTargetslisted inAppendix 4

designated fortheir intrinsicvalue includingsites ofinternational,national,regional orsub-regionalsignificance

ForestryCommission

The rate ofwoodlandcreation

65,000hectares by2021

RSS CoreArea of newwoodlandcreated

RegionalPriorities forManaging

30

supportedandIncreasingWoodlandCover

through grantsfor this year issignificant butfalls well short of





the rate requiredto meet thetarget

LA returnsCoverage ofLandscapeCharacterAssessments isincreasing

100 per centof rural areas

RSS Core


Percentage ofregion coveredby LandscapeCharacterAssessments(LCAs)

Priorities fortheManagementandEnhancementof theRegion’sLandscape

31

EnvironmentAgency

Insufficient datacollected


Regional Core


Planningpermissionsgranted contraryto EnvironmentAgency advice

A RegionalApproach toWaterResourcesand WaterQuality

32




LA returnsInsufficient newdata collected

Waterefficiencytargets innewdevelopment

RSS CoreWater efficiencytargets in newdevelopment

EnvironmentAgency

Water quality inthe EastMidlands has

RSS Core


Ecological RiverQuality

RegionalPriorities forStrategicRiverCorridors

33

shown asignificantimprovement inboth chemical





and biologicalstandards since1990

Data notavailable

RSS CoreCondition ofSSSIs in rivercorridors

To bedeveloped

To bedeveloped

75 per centby lengthcovered by2009

RSS CoreRiver ProjectCover

BiodiversityAction Plans

Insufficient newdata collected

To meetRegionalBiodiversity

Regional CoreChange in areasof biodiversityimportance,including:

Priorities fortheManagementof theLincolnshireCoast

34

HabitatManagementandpriority habitats

and species (bytype); and

RecreationTargetslisted inAppendix 4areas

designated fortheir intrinsicvalue includingsites ofinternational,national,regional orsub-regionalsignificance

EnvironmentAgency

A slight increasefrom 2004/05but a large fallfrom 2003/04


Regional CorePlanningpermissionsgranted contraryto Environment

A RegionalApproach toManagingFlood Risk

35

Agency adviceon flood defencegrounds



RSS CorePlanningpermissionsgranted withSustainableDrainageSchemes(SuDS)

LA returns26 authoritiesare wholly orpartially covered

100 per centcoverage

RSS Core


No. of strategicflood riskassessmentsundertaken





by a level 1SFRA and 14 bya level 2 SFRA

DefraTotal carbondioxideemissions havedecreased from2004

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreCarbon DioxideEmissions

RegionalPriorities forAir Quality

35A

DTI RegionalEnergyConsumptionStatistics

Between2005-06electricity salesper domestic

1.5 per centreduction inenergyconsumptionper year overplan period

RSS CoreDomestic &Industrial/CommercialEnergyConsumption

RegionalPriorities forEnergyReductionandEfficiency

38

consumer fell2.4 per cent andfor gas 4.8 percent. Industrialgasconsumption perconsumer fell2.3 per cent butrose 3.6 percent forelectricity

LA returnsOnly 6authorities haveadopted SPDs

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreAdoption ofSupplementaryPlanning

underpinningDocumentssustainableunderpinning

sustainableenergy policy

energy policy,although manyare currentlylooking intosustainableenergy

EnergyTrends

Region is not 50per cent towards2010 target but

511 MWe by2010. 1120MWe by2020

RSS CoreCapacity ofadditionalCombined Heatand Powerfacilities

RegionalPriorities forLow CarbonEnergyGeneration

39

progress isbeing slowlyachieved

EnergyTrends

Continuing tomakeconsiderable

To meettargets inAppendix 5

RSS CoreCapacity ofadditionalrenewableenergy facilities progress in

generating





electricity fromrenewablesources

DefraTotal carbondioxideemissions havedecreased from2004

To bedeveloped

RSS CoreCarbon DioxideEmissions

Culture EastMidlands

Between2001-05 thenumber of

Targets to beset throughthe RegionalCulturalStrategy

RSS CoreNumber ofbusinesses inthe creativeindustry

RegionalPriorities forCulture,Sport andRecreation

40

businesses inthe creativeindustries roseby 19 per cent

Culture EastMidlands

Between2001-05 jobs inthe creativeindustries roseby 8.1 per cent

RSS CoreNumber ofpeopleemployed in thecreativeindustries

Data notavailable

RSS CorePercentageincrease inculturalinvestment

DCMSInsufficient newdata collected

RSS CorePercentage ofpeople takingpart in culturalactivities

SportEngland

Baseline dataTargets setin RegionalSportsStrategy

RSS CoreNo. of sportsand recreationalfacilitiesprovided per1,000 population

Data Issues

5.3 Environmental policy is a growth area, althougha lack of regularly available data presents a challengefor the annual monitoring process. There are still someindicators where quantitative information is difficult toobtain. It has not been possible to update some of thedata on flood risk; instead data used in the 2006/07monitoring report is presented here. This year thedefinitions used to collect listed buildings at risk datathrough cdpVision were altered to be in-line withnational data collection. The question was changed toinclude both listed ‘buildings’ and ‘listed buildingentries’. There may have been some confusion withinlocal authorities as to the differences in thesedefinitions and care should be taken with this data.

Policy 26 Protecting and Enhancing theRegion’s Natural and Cultural Heritage

Policy 26

Sustainable development should ensure theprotection, appropriate management andenhancement of the Region’s natural andcultural heritage. As a result the followingprinciples should be applied:

the Region’s internationally andnationally designated natural andhistoric assets should receive thehighest level of protection;



Policy 26 cont.

neither direct nor indirect damage to EUdesignated Natura 2000 sites will bepermitted;damage to other natural and historicassets or their settings should beavoidedwherever and as far as possible,recognising that such assets are usuallyirreplaceable;unavoidable damagemust beminimisedand clearly justified by a need fordevelopment in that location whichoutweighs the damage that would result;unavoidable damage which cannot bemitigated should be compensated for,preferably in a relevant local context andwhere possible in ways which alsocontribute to social and economicobjectives;there should be a net increase in thequality and activemanagement of naturaland historic assets across the Region inways that promote adaptation to climatechange, and an increase in the quantityof environmental assets generally; andthe Region’s best and most versatileagricultural land should be protectedfrom permanent loss or damage.

Targets:

No net loss of natural or cultural assets95 per cent of SSSIs in favourable condition by2010Number of listed buildings at risk to decreasefrom 2006 levels

Indicators:

Cases of damage to natural and cultural assetsand compensatory measuresImprovements in the condition of land classifiedas SSSINumber of listed buildings at risk

Results:

5.4 No data is presented for damage to natural andcultural assets as monitoring systems to collect thisinformation are currently being developed across theregion. English Heritage’s ‘Heritage at Risk' register,available from their website, does include details ofassets that are ‘at risk’, which will include damagingactivities. One monument has been affected byopen-cast coal mining, but most ‘at risk’ assets are onthe register as a result a lack of maintenance and/orvacancy.

Figure 5.1 East Midlands SSSI comparison of 2006 and 2008 (percent)

Source: Natural England



5.5 The condition of the SSSI land in England isassessed by Natural England. There are six reportablecondition categories: favourable; unfavourablerecovering; unfavourable no change; unfavourabledeclining; part destroyed and destroyed. If a SSSI iscurrently assessed as being in unfavourable nochange, unfavourable declining, part destroyed ordestroyed condition it is described as being in adversecondition and is ‘not meeting the PSA target’. If a SSSIis currently assessed as being in favourable orunfavourable recovering condition it is described as‘meeting the PSA target’. Favourable condition means

that the SSSI is being adequately conserved and ismeeting its conservation objectives. However, thereis still scope for the enhancement of these sites. Figure5.1 shows how the East Midlands is performing.

5.6 In September 2008, 93 per cent of the SSSIareas in the East Midlands were classed as favourableor unfavourable recovering, i.e. meeting the PSArequirements, compared with 83 per cent in Englandas a whole. This shows an increase in the EastMidlands from 68 per cent in September 2006,demonstrating significant progress in meeting PSArequirements.

Table 5.1 County SSSI condition September 2007 and 2008 (per cent)

Percentage Area Meeting PSATarget 2008

Percentage Area Meeting PSATarget 2007

82.2158.41Derbyshire

77.0870.59Leicestershire

99.3874.22Lincolnshire

90.9789.39Northamptonshire

79.3573.57Nottinghamshire

Source: Natural England

5.7 Information at county level, in table 5.1, reflectsthe significant progress made in the region towardsachieving the PSA target. All counties have continuedto show an increase in the SSSI areas classed asfavourable or unfavourable recovering. The percentageof SSSI area in favourable condition has fallen from45 per cent in September 2006 to 44 per cent inSeptember 2008.

5.8 For a more up to date picture of SSSI conditionin the East Midlands Region and at county level pleaserefer to the Natural England website atwww.naturalengland.org.uk. The figures used in thisreport are from September 2008 but they are updatedon a regular basis.

Table 5.2 English Heritage’s Register of Buildings at Risk Grade I and II* 2006 to 2008

2008 Percentageat Risk

200820072006

8.1413634Derbyshire (inc. Derby)

3.1161615Leicestershire (inc. Leicester and Rutland)

4.7424140Lincolnshire

3.1171717Northamptonshire

5.3181615Nottinghamshire (inc. Nottingham)

4.7134126120East Midlands

Source: English Heritage



#

Table 5.3 Grade II Listed Building Entries on Local Authority at Risk Registers as at31 st March 2008

Percentage of Grade IIlistedBUILDINGENTRIES

at risk within theadministrative boundary

(%)

Total number of GradeII listed BUILDINGENTRIES within the

administrativeboundary

Number of Grade II listedBUILDINGENTRIESwithin

the administrativeboundary on the localauthorities’ buildings at

risk registers

1.53395Derby

4.74,158194Derbyshire

3.933013Leicester

*3.63,678121Leicestershire**

*6.06,161317Lincolnshire

*14.55,594492Northamptonshire

9.774572Nottingham

6.05,034304Nottinghamshire

8.62,080178Peak District

#1,700N/RRutland

*6.724,6251,428East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*No buildings at risk data provided by Hinckley & Bosworth, North Kesteven, Northampton, Oadby & Wigston, Wellingborough, Rutland,East Northamptonshire. These districts are excluded in the percentage calculations.**No data in any category provided by Blaby

5.9 Data on Grade I and II* buildings at risk iscollected by English Heritage and presented in table5.2. Table 5.3 gives details on Grade II buildings onlocal authorities’ buildings at risk registers. This yearthe data was collected for Grade II listed buildingentries as oppose to buildings (see appendix tableEnv.3 on the CD for details).

5.10 Data from English Heritage on listed buildingsat risk shows that in 2008 there were 134 Grade I andII* buildings at risk in the East Midlands. This equatesto 4.7 per cent of all East Midlands Grade I and II*buildings.

5.11 The annual Heritage Counts reports on thestate of the historic environment, which are publishedevery November and include a regional as well as anational report. Data is also available atwww.english-heritage.org.uk.

5.12 There are a total of 24,625 Grade II listedbuilding entries on local authority registers in the EastMidlands. Eight authorities could not provide data onGrade II listed buildings at risk; these have beenexcluded from the percentage calculations. Of theinformation provided, 1,428 (6.7 per cent) of the GradeII listed buildings entries are at risk.

Policy Commentary

SSSIs

5.13 The Government has set a target for 95 percent of SSSIs to be in favourable condition or movingtowards it by 2010. This is now a key target for NaturalEngland, its partners and for the owners and occupiersof these most valuable wildlife and geological sites.

5.14 Tomonitor progress towards this target, NaturalEngland is visiting and assessing each of the 4,000plus SSSIs in England at least once every six years.This continuous assessment has given NaturalEngland a good understanding of the reasons whysome sites are not meeting the needs of the wildlifethey are designated to support. It also helps targetactivities more efficiently and identifies policy blocksto better conservation. Additionally, it has enabled thesetting of milestone targets nationally for each year to2010.

5.15 The East Midlands Region as a whole hasmade very good progress over the past five years, andnow is only just below the national target. Across thelowland counties of the Region the situation is closeto the national average. The trend looking forward into2008/9 suggests the amount of SSSI in favourablecondition will continue to progress well and the figure



http://www.english-heritage.org.uk

has been reached by entering into key agreements onthe Wash with Eastern Sea Fisheries (early in 2008)and significant progress with agreeing managementplans with agreement holders on the North andSouthwest Peak ESAs. These in particular covergrazing and burning management. There is anincreasing need however to consolidate efforts to dateto avoid a downward turn. The achievement ofMoorland and Woodland SSSI favourable conditiontargets are proving challenging as are targets for TheWash.

5.16 Within Derbyshire there were considered to betwo reasons for why substantial improvements weremade. Firstly, as a result of ESA delivery process anumber of Moorland Management Plans have beenagreed and are being implemented. This has affectedfour major SSSIs. Secondly, the Moors for the Future,a Heritage Lottery funded project, has made realprogress in the last three years. In Lincolnshire,improvements have been made on the Wash throughsecuring the support of the Eastern Sea FisheriesCommittee in developing sustainable shell fisheries.Improvements in Northamptonshire have come in themain through the notification of a large SSSI - the NeneValley Gravel Pits SSSI.

5.17 For many sites, the issues are relativelystraightforward with advice and managementagreements sufficient to address the problems. In othercases, changes in policy and action across wholelandscapes are required.

Buildings at Risk

5.18 The data on listed buildings at risk provides aproxy for the state of the historic assets in the Region.From 2008, the process of broadening the nationalregister to include scheduled monuments, registeredparks and registered battlefields began, this providinga more integrated approach to ‘Heritage at Risk’. Evendiscounting these new entries that are not included inTable 5.2, there has been a slight increase in thenumber of Grade I and II* listed buildings at risk,despite the fact that 3 have been removed from theregister.

5.19 English Heritage and local authorities worktogether with owners to ensure that buildings areremoved from the register. This may include the useof grant aid, such as the Gatehouse at HarlaxtonManor or support for local planning authorities in theuse of their statutory powers to tackle difficult buildingsat risk, such as Helpringham Manor and Sneath’s Millin Lincolnshire. In the case of Apethorpe Hall inNorthamptonshire, direct intervention has beennecessary; the first phase of urgent repairs have beenundertaken by English Heritage and the site has been

offered for sale. In other cases, the restoration ofbuildings can be achieved through regenerationschemes (see Policy 27).

5.20 Other mechanisms for managing historic assetsinclude Natural England’s Higher Level Stewardshipwhereby numerousmonuments, including several longbarrows on the Lincolnshire Wolds, have been takenout of cultivation.

Policy 27 Regional Priorities for theHistoric Environment

Policy 27

The historic environment should beunderstood, conserved and enhanced, inrecognition of its own intrinsic value, and itscontribution to the Region’s quality of life.

Across the Region and particularly in areaswhere growth or regeneration is a priority,development should promote sensitivechange of the historic environment. Toachieve this, Local Planning Authoritiesshould:

identify and assess the significance ofspecific historic assets and theirsettings;use characterisation to understand theircontribution to the landscape ortownscape in areas of change;encourage the refurbishment and re-useof disused or under-used buildings ofsome historic or architectural merit andincorporating them sensitively intoregeneration schemes;promote the use of local buildingmaterials; andrecognise the opportunities forenhancing existing tourism attractionsand for developing the potential of otherareas and sites of historic interest aspart of Green Infrastructure, havingregard to potential impacts onbiodiversity.

Target:

100 per cent coverage of Conservation AreaAppraisals and Management Plans (up-to-date,i.e. less than 5 years old)

Indicators:

Conservation Area Appraisals andManagementPlans in place



Historic Environment Records availableNumber of conservation officers

Results:

5.21 Data on conservation area appraisals,conservation area management proposals, access tohistoric environment records and conservation staff ispresented in the following section. These resources

enable local authorities to better deliver Policy 27.Conservation area appraisals and conservation areamanagement proposals will contribute to LDF evidencebases (alongside Historic LandscapeCharacterisations- see Policy 31) in order for localauthorities to understand the contribution that thehistoric environment makes to landscape or townscapein areas of change.

Table 5.4 Conservation areas at 31 st March 2008

Covered by up-to-date publishedconservation management proposals

With an up-to-date publishedConservation Area Appraisal

Number ofconservation

areas PercentageNumberPercentageNumber

7113215Derby

8162653202Derbyshire

00842125Leicester

27573879209Leicestershire

*6*101931159Lincolnshire

12212237169Northants

27827830Nottingham

12162229130Nottinghamshire

001011109Peak District

000034Rutland

12129252711,082East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*N/A returned for West Lindsey

5.22 Table 5.4 gives information on conservationareas. East Midlands’ local authorities reported 1,082conservation areas as of March 31 st 2008. A quarterof these had an up-to-date published conservationarea appraisal and 12 per cent had up-to-datepublished conservation area management proposals.Many authorities stated that they were in the processof undertaking or developing furtherreviews/management proposals.

5.23 31 of 41 East Midlands’ authorities have accessto Historic Environment Record (HERS) data. 18authorities (44 per cent of all authorities) have accessto this data via a service level agreement and 13authorities (32 per cent of all authorities) have directaccess (numbers by county are in the data appendixTable Env.4 on the CD).



Table 5.5 Building Conservation Officers at 31 st March 2008 (full time equivalents)

Others e.g. planners undertakingconservation work

Conservation Officers

12Derby

512.5Derbyshire

22Leicester

610.5Leicestershire

9.57.1Lincolnshire

511.5Northamptonshire

12Nottingham

410.2Nottinghamshire

N/R4Peak District

01Rutland

33.562.8East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesN/R: No return

5.24 Table 5.5 shows that East Midlands’ authoritieshave a total of 62.8 full time equivalent (fte) buildingconservation officers, with a further 33.5 fte ‘other staff’who undertake conservation work. Data on localauthority archaeological services could be collectedin the future.

5.25 The primary source of Information about thehistoric environment in the region, available to allauthorities, is contained within the Historic EnvironmentRecords (HERs) and from the HERs officers. TheHERs in the region are predominantly county basedas are the Historic Landscape Character Assessments.Within the Region there are at present 12.7 (fte) HERsofficers with 22.3 (fte) staff providing developmentcontrol advice and other services such asenvironmental stewardship advice.

Policy Commentary

5.26 March 2008 saw the publication of the HeritageProtection Bill. Although this Bill will not now beconsidered during the current session of Parliament,a number of the reforms can be implemented withoutneeding legislative change. For example, theGovernment will be publishing a draft Planning PolicyStatement on the historic environment in Spring 2009to replace Planning Policy Guidance Notes 15 and 16.

5.27 As well as historic landscape characterisation,urban characterisation is beginning to be seen as avaluable tool in managing change in historic areas.Such studies can be an important part of the evidencebase for the Local Development Framework. Theincrease in the numbers of Character Area Appraisals

and Management Plans is welcome. The LincolnTownscape Characterisation is an ambitious projectthat covers the whole of the City. It is not just lookingat historic character, but also the character of all partsof the City, including natural character and it hasinvolved local communities in the process.

5.28 The restoration and reuse of both listed andlocally important buildings can be a key part ofregeneration schemes. In Derby, conversion of theRoundhouse, a former railway building (Grade II*), isnear completion and the building has been removedfrom the national buildings at risk register; it will provideaccommodation for Derby College. It has been featuredin the English Heritage national publicationConstructive Conservation in Practice, 2008.

5.29 In Lincoln, there is a Townscape HeritageInitiative scheme with £1m of Heritage Lottery Fund(HLF) funding, aimed at regenerating some of thehistoric structures in the 'Cultural Quarter'. Progressis being made in enhancing and interpreting somehistoric sites, including Roman monuments and theCommons.

5.30 Partnership working involving BritishWaterways, English Heritage and the Foxton InclinedPlane Trust, with HLF funding, has enabled therestoration of the remains of this historic feature thatallowed canal boats to bypass the spectacular flightof locks. The project has resulted in improvements inaccess to the site and its interpretation, and therefore,its attractiveness as a tourist destination.



5.31 In order to encourage the use of local buildingmaterials, it is necessary to know where there aresources of materials such as building and roofingstone. The Strategic Stone Study is a major 5-yearstudy of England’s building and roofing stoneresources, which will assist Mineral PlanningAuthorities in identifying the location of these mineralsand encourage their safeguarding.

5.32 The development of ‘green infrastructure’(Policy 28) may provide opportunities for conservingand enhancing historic assets, improving access andinterpretation where appropriate. This has beenhighlighted in the recently published regional guidanceon green infrastructure.

Policy 28 Regional Priorities forEnvironmental and Green Infrastructure

Policy 28

Local Authorities, statutory environmentalbodies and developers should work with thevoluntary sector, landowners and localcommunities to ensure the delivery,protection and enhancement of EnvironmentalInfrastructure across the Region. Suchinfrastructure should contribute to a highquality natural and built environment and tothe delivery of sustainable communities.

Local Authorities and those responsible forthe planning and delivery of growth andenvironmental management across theRegion should work together (see RSSProposed Changes for the full policywording).

Target:

To be developed

Indicator:

Taking account of Environmental CapacityGreen Infrastructure Strategies in place

Results:

5.33 An Environmental Capacity survey wasundertaken for EMRA by Hallam EnvironmentalConsultants. The survey, amongst other questions,asked if data was collected or monitored on a rangeof environmental themes. Results from this survey arein table 5.6.

5.34 There is no single Environmental Capacitytheme where all surveyed local authorities stated thatthey either monitored or collected data. Historicenvironment, biodiversity and air were the mostfrequently monitored (with 89 per cent, 77 per centand 77 per cent respectively). Less than half therespondents stated that their authority monitored landmanagement, landscape, climate change, orsoils/geology/minerals (with 44 per cent, 37 per cent,37 per cent and 30 per cent respectively).

5.35 It may be that, in some cases, those surveyedby Hallam were not fully aware of work beingundertaken by their local authority or of the definitionsof environmental capacity. For example, in the 2006/07RSS Annual Monitoring Report 31 out of 40 (78 percent) authorities said that they had a currentLandscape Character Assessment, but in the Hallamsurvey only 37 per cent of authorities said that theymonitor landscape.

5.36 Only South Northamptonshire and WestLindsey have an adopted Green InfrastructureStrategy. A further 22 authorities are currentlypreparing Green Infrastructure Strategies (see dataappendix Table Env.5 on the CD for details).

5.37 East Midlands Green Infrastructure Networklaunched ‘A Green Infrastructure Guide for the EastMidlands’ in November 2008. This documentsummarises 28 case studies across the East Midlandson various Green Infrastructure themes. Details aregiven on the projects, including funding and keysuccesses as well as links to further informationwww.emgin.org .



http://www.emgin.org

Table 5.6 Current Coverage of Environmental Capacity Themes by Local AuthorityMonitoring mid 2008 (per cent)

Percentage of Local Authorities which collect dataon or monitor the theme

Theme

44Land Management

37Landscape

77Biodiversity

30Soils, Geology, Minerals

77Air

63Water

60Quality of Life

89Historic Environment

66Waste

70Energy

37Climate Change

Source: Environmental Capacity in the East Midlands: an evidence base fit for purpose (Draft Final Report Hallam 2008)Includes the whole Peak Park

Policy Commentary

5.38 The study undertaken by HallamEnvironmentalConsultants will be the basis for valuable further work,especially in relation to targets and indicators ofenvironmental capacity, which should inform authoritiesin making decisions which follow the requirements ofthe policy, particularly so that the capacity ofenvironmental infrastructure to accommodate changeis not breached.

5.39 The understanding and use of the GreenInfrastructure (GI) concept is growing across theRegion following on from the lead given byNorthamptonshire and the River Nene Regional Park.The publication of the Green Infrastructure Guide forthe East Midlands with its case studies (Seewww.emgin.org) will assist in spreading good practicein GI policy and practice. This growth in GIdevelopment is demonstrated in the number ofAuthorities preparing GI strategies such as those inBolsover, Mansfield and Hinckley and Bosworth. Thestrategies are also beginning to lead to policies beingadopted in LDDs, such as North Northamptonshire.

5.40 Work on a GI Strategy for the 6Cs Growth Pointhas commenced and will be completed next year. Twomaster plans incorporating GI have been prepared inthe Lincoln Growth Point, but in addition more work isunderway to produce a more comprehensive GIstrategy in Lincoln. A green infrastructure mappingproject is just beginning in the Wash & its hinterland.A project officer was appointment in February 2008.

5.41 It is hoped that in the near future other suitableindicators for this new policy will be developed andcould include, for instance, the number of LocalPlanning Authorities with GI policies in place.

Policy 29 Priorities for Enhancing theRegion’s Biodiversity

Policy 29

Local Authorities, statutory environmentalbodies and developers should work with thevoluntary sector, landowners and localcommunities to implement the RegionalBiodiversity Strategy, and to deliver a majorstep change increase in the level ofbiodiversity across the East Midlands.Measures should include the:

achievement of the East Midlandsregional contribution towards the UKBiodiversity Action Plan targets as setout in Appendix 3;establishment of large scale habitatcreation projects in the biodiversityconservation and enhancement areasillustrated in Diagram 6;establishment of a regional project topromote the re-creation of key wildlifehabitats in each Natural Area in the EastMidlands;



http://www.emgin.org

Policy 29 cont.

creating, protecting and enhancingnetworks of semi-natural green spacesin urban areas;creating, protecting and enhancingfeatures of the landscape which act ascorridors and ‘stepping stones’,essential for themigration and dispersalof wildlife;development and implementation ofmechanisms to ensure that developmentresults in no net loss of BAP habitatsand species, particularly for restrictedhabitats with special environmentalrequirements, and that net gain isachieved; anddevelopment and maintenance ofappropriate data to monitor and reporton regional targets, BAPs andBCAs/BEAs.

Target:

To meet Regional Biodiversity HabitatManagement and Recreation Targets

Indicator:

Change in areas of biodiversity importance,including: priority habitats and species (by type);and areas designated for their intrinsic valueincluding sites of international, national, regionalor sub-regional significance

Results:

5.42 This year new questions were asked onbiodiversity. These questions covered Local WildlifeSites likely to be affected by planning decisions andthe status of internationally or nationally designatedbiodiversity sites. A large proportion of East Midlands’authorities do not collect this data. In some cases,such as the Peak Park wildlife sites, data is notcollected as there are no sites to monitor. Of thosewho did respond, a total of 77 hectares of local wildlifesites were lost through planning decisions and a further2,307 hectares were lost through other means whilst467 hectares were enhanced by planning decisions.7,861 hectares of internationally or nationallydesignated biodiversity sites were enhanced in2007/08. Full details by county/unitary authority are inthe data appendix Tables Env.6 and 7 on the CD.

Table 5.7 Percentage Change All* Bird Species 1994-2006

Total Numberof Species

No of SpeciesIncreasing (%

Total)

No of SpeciesDeclining (%

Total)

PercentageChange inIndicator

198 (42)7 (37)-1East Midlands

198 (42)8 (42)-7England

Source: Defra*excludes uplands species

5.43 In order to provide a time series; data on wildbird populations (a proxy for biodiversity) produced byDefra has also been considered. Between 1994 and2006 the population of all native birds showed anincrease of 9 per cent, similar to the national level(Table 5.7).

Policy Commentary

5.44 For Policy 29 to be monitored effectively infuture, it is imperative that many more authorities andorganisations in the region put in place the necessaryprocesses and resources to measure areas of priorityhabitats, priority species or Local Wildlife Sites lost orcreated through the planning system, perhaps usingthe BARS system. This is beginning to be done inDerbyshire and we need to examine wider reportingof key heritage affected by development. The figuressuggest that reasons not connected with spatial

planning are far more significant in causing losses ofwildlife sites than planning decisions. It is good to seethough, the extent to which planning has helped theenhancement of wildlife sites and the extent of thework to enhance the Region’s internationally ornationally designated biodiversity sites. The Region’sBiodiversity Strategy; ‘Putting Biodiversity Back on theMap’ will continue to be a key tool in guiding work onbiodiversity and its priorities for action are reflected inthe Regional Plan.

5.45 Although the proxy indicator on wild birds showsa small increase in numbers over time, we know thatthere is a great deal of activity across the region by awide range of public and voluntary bodies to deliverenhanced biodiversity, both through direct delivery ofnew or enhanced habitats and influencing the policyframework. The monitoring and reporting of directbiodiversity delivery projects by other organisations



(e.g. areas of Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) habitatscreated by wildlife trusts) may be easier in future asthe Biodiversity Action Reporting System (BARS) hasbeen introduced, which is designed to capture suchinformation.

5.46 Across the region the successor to Defra'sCountryside Stewardship agri-environment scheme,the Entry and Higher Level of the EnvironmentalStewardship scheme has been implemented, withparticularly high rates of take-up compared to otherregions. The new entry level scheme introduces higherlevels of environmental management across wholefarms for the first time, which will show biodiversitybenefits over time. However, these may still be modestand more resources to support more Higher LevelStewardship (HLS) agreements are needed ifagri-environment is to make a significant difference tobiodiversity in the region. However despite this thelack of improvement in wild bird data is particularlydisturbing, as this should have started to improvethrough ELS and HLS, although it is early days yet.Further it has been suggested that figures for farmlandand woodland birds will get worse in the next few yearsas most of the set aside may be lost. A Peak BirdsProject through targeted advice has managed toincrease payments under England Woodland GrantScheme, which will hopefully enhance conditions forwoodland birds in the future.

Policy 30 Regional Priorities for Managingand Increasing Woodland Cover

Policy 30

Local Authorities, statutory environmentalbodies and developers should work with thevoluntary sector, landowners and localcommunities to deliver a significant increasein woodland cover in the East Midlands. Newcover should respect local landscapecharacter, make use of species resistant toclimate change and complement national andregional woodland strategies, including forexample the Woodfuel Strategy. Newwoodland should optimise social,environmental and economic value whilstrecognising the biodiversity and character ofexisting woodland and the sensitivity ofexisting nature conservation or archaeologicalinterest.

Policy 30 cont.

New woodland should also avoid negativeeffects on water resources, and contribute toflood alleviation and floodplainmanagement.Woodland unavoidably lost to developmentshould be replaced with new woodland ofequivalent value, preferably in the samelandscape unit. Preference should be givento creating ‘new native woodland’ as definedin Forestry Commission Bulletin 112. (seeRSS Proposed Changes for the full policywording)

Target:

Area of new woodland created - 65,000 hectaresby 2021

Indicator:

Area of new woodland created

Results:

5.47 Regional woodland statistics are put togetherby The Forestry Commission and made available atwww.frcc.forestry.gov.uk/forestry/hcou-54pg9u. 84,050hectares (5.1 per cent) of land area in the EastMidlands is woodland, of which 23,416 hectares isancient woodland. Of this ancient woodland, 12,070hectares is ancient semi natural woodland and 11,346hectares is plantation on ancient woodland sites. Thereare also nine concentrations or 'clusters' of ancientwoodland. According to the Forestry Commission,496ha of new woodland was created in 2007/8 ofwhich 73ha was coniferous and 423ha was NewNativeWoodland.

5.48 Below details are given on two woodland areasin the East Midlands, the National Forest andLincolnshire Limewoods.



http://www.frcc.forestry.gov.uk/forestry/hcou-54pg9u

Table 5.8 National Forest New Planting 1995/96 to 2007/08 (hectares)

Total since 1995/62007/08

3301-Tender Scheme

71630Mineral / Derelict Land Restoration

74552Land Acquisition

12412Development Related

40-Local Authorities

90-National Forest Premium

28825Other

530119Total

Source: Nationalforest.org

5.49 The National Forest covers parts of both theEast and West Midlands. In 2007/08, 119 hectares offorest were planted in the National Forest; almost halfof this was through land acquisition (Table 5.8).

5.50 The Lincolnshire Limewoods project has meantthat local farmers and landowners have planted morethan 20km of new hedgerows and 100 hectares of newwoodland to extend and join up existing woodland inthe Project area.

Policy Commentary

5.51 Over the last decade the rate of woodlandcreation supported through grant has been between500 and 850 hectares per annum. The figure for2007/08 is significant but falls well short of the raterequired to meet the target set out in the RSS of 65,000ha by 2021.

5.52 The Regional Forestry Framework for the EastMidlands; ‘Space4trees’ will continue to be animportant publication to integrate forestry with widersocio, economic and environmental objectives. It willguide the future work of the Forestry Commission andits partners in the region.

5.53 The Lincolnshire Limewoods Project hasresulted in the creation of about 100 ha of newwoodland. The project covers about 150 squarekilometres of mostly arable farmland and rural villagesand demonstrates what can be done to further thistarget.

5.54 As with other data areas, there is a need toimprove reporting mechanisms to suitably monitor thispolicy. A number of sources seem to be available, withthe Forestry Commission having good annual recordsof EWGS hectarages for planting and also of areaslost through felling license applications, and NaturalEngland have the annual Stewardship data for treeplanting, so there are some good data towards the

total figure. This would have to be put together withdata from local planning authorities to record areaslost/created as result of development, as much of thiswill fall outside EWGS/licensing.

Policy 31 Priorities for the Managementand Enhancement of the Region’sLandscape

Policy 31

The Region’s natural and heritage landscapesshould be protected and enhanced by:

the promotion of the highest level ofprotection for the nationally designatedlandscapes of the Peak District NationalPark and the Lincolnshire Wolds Areaof Outstanding Natural Beauty;the promotion of initiatives to protectand enhance the particular character ofthe Sherwood, Charnwood andRockingham Forests;the establishment of criteria-basedpolicies in Local DevelopmentFrameworks to ensure that developmentproposals respect intrinsic landscapecharacter in rural and urban fringe areasincluding recognition of the value oftranquillity and dark skies; andthe identification in Local DevelopmentFrameworks of landscape andbiodiversity protection and enhancementobjectives through the integration ofLandscape Character Assessments withhistoric and ecological assessments.



Policy 31 cont.

Where not already in place, Local Authoritiesshould prepare Landscape CharacterAssessments to inform the preparation ofLocal Development Frameworks. These canalso be used to develop SupplementaryPlanning Documents.

Target:

100 per cent of rural areas covered byLandscape Character Assessments

Indicator:

Percentage of region covered by LandscapeCharacter Assessments

Results:

5.55 Data returned by local authorities in 2007/08shows that 34 (83 per cent) have Landscape CharacterAssessments. Of these 17 (41 per cent of allauthorities) include Historic LandscapeCharacterisation and 6 (15 per cent of all authorities)have Landscape Character Assessment relatedSupplementary Planning Documents. See dataappendix Table Env.9 on the CD for a list of authorities.

5.56 The English Heritage ‘Heritage Counts 2008,Regional Data Report’ gives information on HistoricLandscape Characterisations at county/unitary level.In 2008, 56 per cent of the land area of the EastMidlands is mapped, compared with 36 per cent in2002. Studies have been completed in Derby andDerbyshire, Northamptonshire, Nottinghamshire andRutland, and another is soon expected to be completein Leicestershire. A similar project is now alsounderway for Lincolnshire and the city of Leicester.

Policy Commentary

5.57 A further report in 2007 ‘Tracking Change inthe Character of English Landscape 1999 – 2003’detailed which parts of the East Midlands wereexperiencing change. The report can be found atwww.cqc.org.uk.

5.58 The European Landscape Convention cameinto force in the UK on 1 March 2007. The Conventionhighlights the need to recognise landscape in law, todevelop landscape policies dedicated to the protectionmanagement and creation of landscapes and toestablish procedures for the participation of the generalpublic and other stakeholders in the creation andimplementation of landscape policies. It also

encourages the integration of landscape into allrelevant areas of policy, including cultural, economicand social policies.

5.59 Take up of Landscape Character Assessmentcoverage continues to make some progress acrossthe Region but there are still gaps in coverage at thecounty and district level. Some county level LandscapeCharacter Assessments were produced some timeago and would benefit from a review and refresh.

5.60 The existing RSS indicator, whilst acting as avery useful first step towards gaining a betterunderstanding of the region’s diverse landscapes,needs to be refined and further more meaningfulindicators developed to help in the implementation ofthe European Landscape Convention.

5.61 There is a need for criteria based policies inLocal Development Documents and SupplementaryPlanning Documents (SPDs). Work has been done ina couple of the Region’s district authorities (High Peakand Derbyshire Dales) to develop detailed SPDs forlandscape character and design for use byDevelopment Control Officers. This type of guidancework needs replicating more widely. The High PeakLandscape Character SPD can be viewed atw w w . h i g h p e a k . g o v . u k / p l a n n i n g /localframework/landscape%20spd%20march06.pdf.Similarly; Peak Park now has a Landscape CharacterAssessment (LCA) and is currently working on alandscape strategy and action plan with a view toproducing a SPD.

5.62 An updated list of the region’s LCAs andHistoric Landscape Characterisations where they existcan be found at www.landscapecharacter.org.uk/.

5.63 Outside of the nationally designated landscapesof the Peak District National Park and the LincolnshireWolds AONB of much of the region’s landscapecharacter is classified as neglected or diverging fromintrinsic character. Neglected classification applies toSherwood, Nottinghamshire, Derbyshire and YorkshireCoalfield, Northamptonshire Vales and divergingclassification applies to Trent and Belvoir Vales,Leicestershire Vales, Charnwood, Trent ValleyWashlands and Derbyshire Peak Fringe and LowerDerwent.

5.64 Activity in the region on advancing the regionallandscape evidence base has seen considerableactivity during 2007/08. Added impetus in part hasbeen derived as a result of Natural England beingasked by Defra to project manage the implementationof the European Landscape Convention in Englandsupported by English Heritage and ForestryCommission.



#

http://www.highpeak.gov.uk/planning/localframework/landscape%20spd%20march06.pdf

http://www.highpeak.gov.uk/planning/localframework/landscape%20spd%20march06.pdf

http://www.landscapecharacter.org.uk/

5.65 Natural England will be producing guidance inMarch 2009 to assist organisations in the preparationof European Landscape Convention Action Plans.Natural England, English Heritage and the NationalForest Company are the first organisations in Englandto produce European Landscape Convention ActionPlans. These recently prepared plans will shortly bea v a i l a b l e f o r v i e w i n g a twww.landscapecharacter.org.uk/.

5.66 Natural England has a corporate target toestablish regional landscape and regional geodiversitypartnerships for each of the English regions. How thesefora are formally recognised in the region in futureways of working needs to be discussed anddetermined in the first instance by the Assembly’sEnvironment Advisory Group (EAG).

5.67 A regional landscape scoping study (EMRLSS)has been completed (Dec 2008). Its purpose was toanalyse the current situation and to makerecommendations on how regional bodies and othersmight take forward the regional landscape agenda,ensuring landscape considerations are embedded innew emerging regional structures following the Reviewof Sub National Economy and Regeneration (SNR).The report addresses a number of key issues whichare landscape characterisation and spatial frameworks,landscape policy context, European LandscapeConvention (ELC), national designations, regional andlocal landscape initiatives and policies, landscapesensitivity and capacity and regional drivers oflandscape change. It also considers the relationshipbetween landscape and related approaches such asgreen infrastructure. It identifies gaps in LCA and HLCcoverage, proposes a suggested approach as to howlandscape capacity and sensitivity studies should beused to inform environmental capacity work. The reportalso suggests an agenda for action for landscape atthe regional level. The agenda for action will need tobe implemented in the future and discussion needs totake place within the EAG and a way forward proposedto its successor. The report will be available for viewingon Natural England’s web site early in 2009(www.naturalengland.org.uk).

5.68 An East Midlands Regional LandscapeCharacter Assessment including seascapecharacterisation is underway. The work is beingundertaken in partnership with Natural England, countyauthority landscape officers, CPRE, English Heritage,the Peak District National Park Authority and the RiverNeneRegional Park. TheRegional LCA and supportingstrategy will be completed by the end of March 2009.

5.69 In light of the ELC, Policy 31 may benefit fromredrafting to help with ELC implementation. Landscapeconsiderations need to become an integral part of other

policy themes. A requirement for landscape capacityand sensitivity studies to be undertaken and for a betterunderstanding of the pressures for change in theregion’s landscapes and how our landscapes arechanging also needs to be addressed. If landscape isto continue to be a valuable resource to the region itis essential that all landscapes evolve in a sustainablemanner and that any management or policyapproaches are appropriate for achieving sustainabledevelopment. This will require cross boundaryapproaches to working and clear understanding by allthose involved in formulating policy and managementmethods on how landscape is defined, understoodand how best to address its sustainability.

Policy 32 A Regional Approach to theWater Resources and Water Quality

Policy 32

Local Authorities, developers, watercompanies, the Environment Agency andother relevant public bodies should worktogether to:

take water related issues into accountat an early stage in the process ofidentifying land for development and inthe phasing and implementation ofdevelopment;assess the scope for reducing leakageof public water supply from currentlevels;promote improvements in waterefficiency in new development and inregeneration to achieve a regional targetof 25 per cent (equivalent to an averagesaving of about 35 litres per person perday);reduce unsustainable abstraction fromwatercourses and aquifers tosustainable levels;protect and improve water quality andreduce the risk of pollution especially tovulnerable groundwater;protect the integrity of natureconservation sites designated as beingof international importance, particularlythrough the phasing of development tomatch the availability of water resources;

(See RSS Proposed Changes for full policywording)



http://www.landscapecharacter.org.uk/

Targets:

Planning permissions granted contrary toEnvironment Agency advice -Targets to bedevelopedDevelopments with Sustainable DrainageSchemes (SuDS) -Increase in number of sitesWater efficiency targets in new development

Indicators:

Planning permissions granted contrary toEnvironment Agency adviceDevelopments with Sustainable DrainageSchemes (SuDS)Water efficiency targets in new development

Results:

5.70 The Environment Agency collects data onplanning applications objected to on water quality.There were 81 objections in 2006/07 in the EastMidlands. In 2007/08 there were a total of 54objections, 25 of which were major and 29 minor. It isnot known how many of these planning permissionswere approved. See the Environment Agency websitefor more details on these planning permissions.h t t p : / / www. e n v i r o nmen t - a g e n c y. g o v. u k /commondata/acrobat/wq_objections_0708_1751864.pdf

5.71 Many East Midlands authorities do not monitordevelopments with Sustainable Drainage Schemes(SuDS) (22 authorities marked the questions on thenumbers of planning permissions ‘Not applicable’ or‘Not returned’). In 2007/08 there were 419 reportednew domestic dwelling sites given planning permissionwhich are covered by a SuDs scheme, 349 of whichwere in Leicester. 12 business/industrial sites werereported as having SuDS. Further details can be foundin the data appendix Table Env.10 on the CD.

5.72 Ofwat has introduced voluntary water efficiencytargets for water companies, which will apply in2008/09 and 2009/10. Targets proposed by Ofwat arefor all water companies to save 1 litre per property perday through water efficiency measures.

Policy Commentary

5.73 Water resources for the Future; A Strategy forthe East Midlands (Environment Agency, 2001) setsout the regional priorities for water resource

management. Water resources remain a key issue forthe region, not least because of the increased pressurethat will come from the MKSM Growth Zone. Much ofthe region’s surface water is utilised during the summerand much of the groundwater is subject to anunacceptable abstraction regime. Studies by EMRAas part of the development of the revised RSS haveshown that the region will be short of water in the futureif measures are not taken to reduce water use,especially in new developments. The EU WaterFramework Directive will continue to be a key driverfor the protection and improvement of the waterenvironment for the next 25 years, with its centralconcept of integrated water resource management forwater basins. Further details of the Region’s responseto this will be led by the Environment Agency and willbe worked out over the coming months.

5.74 While a comparatively small amount of data isnow available on SuDs being included in development,it does indicate that the policy in the RSS is still notbeing fully followed and we will have to seekmechanisms to increase the use of SuDS. Furtherissues of long term maintenance of a number ofschemes still remain unresolved and this will also needto be tackled.

5.75 On the wider front the Environment Agencycontinues to undertake a number of areas of work tofurther this policy including:

restoring sustainable abstraction programme toinvestigate and implement changes to licenceswhere abstractions are causing environmentaldamage;promoting water conservation through theplanning process and recommending that newdevelopment should meet level 3 of the Code ofSustainable Homes;promoting water conservation to individuals andorganisations through training and awarenessraising sessions delivered through workshops,particularly in relation to agriculture and withschools,to raise the awareness of the savingsthat can be achieved by reducing their waterconsumption;promoting the use of winter storage reservoirsfor irrigation and rain water harvesting to makebetter use of water resources and potentiallyreducing run-off and pollution;working with water companies to reduce leakage;working with developers to carry out water cyclestudies at an early stage of development toidentify water supply shortfalls, water treatmentissues and use of SUDs.



http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/commondata/acrobat/wq_objections_0708_1751864.pdf

http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/commondata/acrobat/wq_objections_0708_1751864.pdf

Policy 33 Regional Priorities for StrategicRiver Corridors

Policy 33

The natural and cultural environment of theStrategic River Corridors of the Nene, Trent,Soar, Welland, Witham, Derwent along withtheir tributaries, and rivers which contributeto river corridors of a strategic nature inadjoining Regions, should be protected andenhanced. Local Authorities and otherrelevant public bodies should work togetheracross regional boundaries to protect andenhance the multi-functional importance ofstrategic river corridors as part of theRegion’s Green Infrastructure, including forwildlife, landscape and townscape,regeneration and economic diversification,education, recreation, the historicenvironment including archaeology, andmanaging flood risk

Targets:

River Projects - 75 per cent by length coveredby 2009

Indicators:

River Project CoverEcological River QualityCondition of SSSIs in river corridors

Results:

Figure 5.2 East Midlands Rivers GQAHI grade 1990 to 2007-Biology (per cent)

Source: Environment Agency



Figure 5.3 East Midlands Rivers GQAHI grade 1990 to 2007-Chemistry (per cent)


Figure 5.4 East Midlands Rivers GQAHI grade 1990 to 2007-Nitrates (per cent)




Figure 5.5 East Midlands Rivers GQAHI Grade 1990 to 2007-Phosphates (per cent)


5.76 The Environment Agency has changed themethodology of their river quality data collection. Pastdata has been recalculated in order to make itcomparable with the new data, and is presented herein figures 5.2 to 5.5.

5.77 1.6 per cent of river length in the East Midlandswas of bad or poor biological quality in 2007, this is animprovement on the 2006 figure of 3.1 per cent. 71.2per cent of river length was of good or very goodquality and 27.1 per cent fair or fairly good. Figuresfor chemical quality were similar with 3.3 per cent bador poor, 21.8 per cent fair or fairly good and 74.9 percent good or very good.

5.78 Levels of phosphates and nitrates in EastMidlands rivers, although declining, are high with 55.0per cent of river length having high or very high nitratelevels and 59.6 per cent having very high orexcessively high phosphate levels.

5.79 The Strategic Partnership in river corridors(SPARC), now closed, involved a series of eightdemonstration projects throughout northern Europe,with three in the East Midlands. Each project lookedat the integrated management of River Corridors fromdifferent geographical and cultural perspectives.Overall the SPARC project achieved 10 kilometres ofriver restoration and 340 hectares of land haveundergone beneficial change in use. In the EastMidlands SPARC was able to part fund a GreenInfrastructure programme to assist in the upkeep ofSummer Leys LNR, Northamptonshire which formspart of a SSSI.

Policy Commentary

5.80 Water Quality in the East Midlands has showna significant improvement in terms of both chemicaland biological standards since 1990. In this time, thelength of river and canal achieving a good or very goodchemical quality, according to the EnvironmentAgency’s General Quality Assessment (GQA) scheme,has almost trebled, with 60% (2100km) of the 3500kmsof classified watercourse achieving the top grades in2005. Although relatively static since the start of thenew millennium, the past ten years has seen anadditional 642kms achieve the top quality bands.

5.81 Although not as marked, the improvement inchemical status is mirrored in biological quality, within excess of 2250kms of river being classified as goodor very good in the last survey. This represents a 60%increase since 1990 and in excess of 30% in the lastdecade.

5.82 The area’s rivers remain highly nutrientenriched, however, despite a 15% reduction in thetotal length of the GQA network recording high orexcessively high nitrate concentrations since 1995.Over the same time period, phosphate concentrationshave remained very stable with the majority ofstretches falling being classed as highly nutrientenriched. Water bodies in the East Midlands are stilleutrophic and characterised by high turbidity, algaedominated, with no/few submerged aquatic plants(oxygenators) and generally poor ecologically – insome instances resulting in unfavourable conditionwhere SSSIs are concerned.



5.83 Under the England Catchment SensitiveFarming (CSF) Initiative, changes in farm practicesare being sought to reduce diffuse water pollution fromagriculture. The region has three CSF prioritycatchment initiatives and three CSF associatecatchment initiatives, all of which commenced in 2006.The Environment Agency has developed a monitoringand evaluation framework to determine whether theprogramme has achieved the objective of raisingawareness of diffuse water pollution from agriculture,and encouraging early voluntary action from farmersand land managers to tackle it. The RegionalAssembly’s Environment Group commissioned amajorstudy of soils in 2006 as part of its study on landscapescale run off (‘spongy landscapes’) and this will alsofeed into the understanding of solutions to this problem.

5.84 The RSS policy on strategic river corridors isnow well accepted and assisted by guidance notesissued to all Local Planning Authorities on a suggestedLocal Development Document Core Strategy Policy (www.emra.gov.uk/publications/RPG_src.asp) which,with the supplementary supporting information,provides a helpful method of transition from thestrategic to local policy.

5.85 Less well developed are useful key indicatorsfor measuring the success of this policy. The policyseeks integrated management of river corridors.Inevitably, therefore, single indicators do not do thejob but there are difficulties in finding a suite ofindicators without involving excessive expense orunnecessary detail. Any indicators should reflectkilometres of rivers covered by projects, not just thenumber of projects.

5.86 Lincolnshire projects include the WaterwaysProject for regeneration of the county's river corridors,including new and improved moorings, and newwaterside nature reserves; and the Chalk StreamsProject in the Wolds.

Policy 34 Priorities for theManagement ofthe Lincolnshire Coast

Policy 34

Local Authorities and other relevant publicbodies should identify arrangements foreffective co-operation to manage theLincolnshire Coast. They should promote thedevelopment of coastal zone managementplans to help achieve an integrated approachto coastal management, including North EastLincolnshire in the adjacent Region ofYorkshire and the Humber.

Policy 34 cont.

Any development along the LincolnshireCoast should require a coastal location, belocated primarily in existing urban areas andin ways that protect and enhance natural andcultural heritage.

Target :

To meet Regional Biodiversity HabitatManagement and Recreation Targets

Indicator:

Change in areas of biodiversity importance,including: priority habitats and species (by type);and areas designated for their intrinsic valueincluding sites of international, national, regionalor sub-regional significance

Results:

5.87 Details of the actions that might be undertakenrelating to biodiversity on the Lincolnshire Coast canbe found in the Lincolnshire Biodiversity Action Planat www.lincsbap.org

5.88 This year a new question on biodiversity wasasked in the local authority questionnaire. The majorityof data for the three coastal Lincolnshire districts waszero or not returned. In East Lindsey 2 hectares oflocal wildlife sites were likely to be degraded as a directresult of planning decisions.

Policy Commentary

5.89 Lincolnshire County Council, along with theEnvironment Agency, emda , EMRA, GOEM and theDistricts are considering the potential impact of floodingdue to the failure and overtopping of sea defences. Acoastal strategy is being undertaken to advise on thestrategic development of the coast and is expected tobe completed in 2010. Stage 1 Part 1 was completedin August 2008 and is available from the EMRAw e b s i t e (www.emra.gov.uk/what-we-do/housing-planning-transport/r e g i o n a l - s p a t i a l - s t r a t e g y - r s s /rss-partial-review-2008/supporting-documents ). Thiswas circulated at the Regional Plan Partial ReviewLaunch Seminar in October 2008. A coastal CountryPark is proposed around Anderby Creek.

5.90 An inter-regional role with the East of Englandand the piloting of ICZM are also fundamental partsof the Wash Estuary Project. The RSPB has beenactive, in partnership, not only with the Freiston Shore



#

http://www.lincsbap.org

http://www.emra.gov.uk/what-we-do/housing-planning-transport/regional-spatial-strategy-rss/rss-partial-review-2008/supporting-documents



managed retreat work but is also involved in land useand agricultural management changes at FreistonShore and Frampton that anticipate some of the ICZMapproach.

Policy 35 A Regional Approach toManaging Flood Risk

Policy 35

Local Development Frameworks and thestrategies of relevant public bodies shouldtake account of the potential impact of climatechange on flooding and land drainage. Inparticular, they should:

be informed by Strategic Flood RiskAssessments in order to evaluate actualflood risk. Priority areas for assessmentinclude the built up areas of Derby,Nottingham and Newark;include policies which preventinappropriate development either in, orwhere there would be an adverse impacton, the coastal and fluvial floodplainareas;deliver a programme of floodmanagement schemes that alsomaximise biodiversity, providetownscape enhancement and otherpublic benefits; andrequire sustainable drainage in all newdevelopments where practicable.

Development should not be permitted if, aloneor in conjunctionwith other newdevelopment,it would:

be at unacceptable risk from flooding orcreate such an unacceptable riskelsewhere;inhibit the capacity of the floodplain tostore water;impede the flow of floodwater in a waywhichwould create an unacceptable riskelsewhere;have a detrimental impact uponinfiltration of rainfall to ground waterstorage;otherwise unacceptably increase floodrisk; andinterfere with coastal processes.

(See RSS Proposed Changes for fullpolicy wording)

Targets:

Planning permissions granted contrary toEnvironment Agency advice on flood defencegrounds - targets to be developedDevelopments with Sustainable DrainageSchemes (SuDS) - increase in number of sitesNumber of strategic flood risk assessmentsundertaken - 100 per cent coverage

Indicators:

Planning permissions granted contrary toEnvironment Agency advice on flood defencegroundsPlanning permissions granted with SustainableDrainage Schemes (SuDS)Number of strategic flood risk assessmentsundertaken

Results:

5.91 The Environment Agency has assessed theapproximate number of people and properties in theregion at risk of flooding (Table 5.9). In 2006,approximately 423,000 people (10 per cent of the totalpopulation) were living in flood risk areas, with over352,000 of these in the highest risk areas. Around211,000 properties (11 per cent of the total) wereassessed as at risk of flooding, with 60,000 of theseat significant risk. Estimated annual damages are over£175 million. This data provides a general indicationof the scale of the problem in the region, but cannotbe used for year on year comparison, as the mappedfloodplain area may change as a result of additionalinformation, such as survey or modelling study results.This would result in a change in the numbers ofproperties reported to be at risk, despite there beingno physical changes.



Table 5.9 East Midlands Properties at Flood Risk 2006

Significant Risk

TotalCommercialResidential

PercentageNo.PercentageNo.PercentageNo.

3.060,0000.48,0002.652,000

Moderate Risk



3.569,4000.59,0003.160,000

Low Risk



4.180,7000.59,9003.670,800

Source: Environment AgencyLow = 0.5% (1 in 200 years) or lessModerate = 1.3% or less, but greater than 0.5% (1 in 75 years or less, but greater than 1 in 200 years)High = greater than 1.3% (greater than 1 in 75 years)

5.92 The Environment Agency collects data on thenumber of planning applications granted in floodplainscontrary to Agency advice. Unfortunately data for2007/08 was not available at the time of writing. Figure5.6 gives time series information for both major andminor developments up to 2006/07, when a total of 20planning applications in the East Midlands wereapproved contrary to Environment Agency advice outof a total of 188 applications (11 per cent), whereobjections were sustained on flood risk grounds andwhere the outcome is known. Four of these were formajor development (in excess of 0.5 hectares/10dwellings), of which three were residentialdevelopments.

5.93 For Sustainable Drainage Schemes see Policy32.

5.94 This year the flood risk assessment questionlooked at two levels of assessment. Level 1assessments apply to local authorities where floodingis not a major issue and are less detailed than Level2 assessments. 26 authorities were wholly or partiallycovered by a Level 1 Strategic Flood Risk Assessment(SFRA) and 14 were wholly or partially covered by aLevel 2 SFRA. Several authorities stated that theywere either planning or currently undertaking SFRAs.Most of the SFRAs covered the whole of the district,often as part of a joint SFRA with other areas. A fulllist of authorities is in the data appendix Table Env.16on the CD.



Figure 5.6 Planning applications approved contrary to EnvironmentAgency advice on flood risk grounds 2001/02 to 2006/07


Policy Commentary

5.95 The incidence of flooding has been increasingin the Region with more frequent wetter periods,potentially associated with climate change. This isexacerbated by the inadequacy of drainage systemsthat were designed to deal with less intense rainfallevents. In June/July 2007, approximately 4,600households and 300 businesses were flooded in theEast Midlands. Nearly 60 per cent of these wereflooded by surface water rather than directly fromrivers.

5.96 The flood events of summer 2007 have alsohighlighted the vulnerability of essential infrastructure,such as sewage treatment plants, electricityinstallations, telephone exchanges, hospitals etc. whensited in areas at risk of flooding.

5.97 Although we cannot eliminate the risk offlooding, one way to avoid creating a huge problemfor the future is to avoid inappropriate development inareas at risk of flooding and to direct developmentaway from those areas at highest risk. The risk offlooding is ever present, and, with climate changeincreasing, we need to make sure homes - particularlyfor those whom are vulnerable - are built in a safeplace, and that people and the environment areprotected.

5.98 PPS25 outlines Government policy ondevelopment and flood risk, including the avoidanceof inappropriate development in areas at risk offlooding, the direction of development away from highrisk areas, and the need to ensure that developmentsdo not increase flood risk elsewhere.

5.99 Since 1October 2006, the Environment Agencyin England has been a statutory consultee on allplanning applications (other than minor development)in areas where there is a risk of flooding, and localplanning authorities must now consult the EnvironmentAgency before making any decisions on newdevelopment. Since 1 January 2007, the new FloodDirection has allowed Government to call-in majorapplications where local planning authorities wereminded to overrule Environment Agency advice onflood risk.

5.100 The requirement for flood risk assessmentsto accompany planning applications is still beingignored by many developers and local planningauthority performance in providing decision notices tothe Environment Agency has deteriorated, andplanning permission is still being granted against floodrisk advice. Local authorities should be reminded ofthe importance of providing feedback to the Agencyon the outcome of applications in flood risk areas, asrecommended in PPS25.

5.101 The publication of PPS25 in December 2006has strengthened the Agency‘s role in enablingapplications, where the authority is minded to grant



permission contrary to advice, to be called in by theGovernment. Future planning decisions should alsobe influenced by the East Midlands Regional FloodRisk Appraisal and emerging SFRAs. The issue of theprotection of essential infrastructure in flood plainsneeds further investigation.

Policy 35A Regional Priorities for AirQuality

Policy 35A

Local Development Frameworks and thestrategies of relevant public bodies should:

contribute to reducing air pollution inthe region;consider the potential effects of newdevelopments and increased trafficlevels on air quality; andconsider the potential impacts of newdevelopments and increased trafficlevels on internationally designatednature conservation sites, and adoptmitigation measures to address theseimpacts.

Targets:

To be developed

Indicators:

To be developed

Results:

5.102 Tables 5.10 and 5.11 give details on carbondioxide emissions in the East Midlands. Total carbondioxide emissions in the East Midlands in 2006 were41million tonnes, down from 43million tonnes in 2004.Per capita emissions in 2006 in the East Midlandswere 9.3 tonnes per head, which is higher thanEngland as a whole due to industry situated in the EastMidlands.

Table 5.10 End user carbon dioxide emissions 2006 Per capita emissions (tonnescarbon dioxide)

EnglandEast Midlands

3.84.2Industrial, commercial and public

2.52.5Domestic

2.22.6Road transport

8.69.3Total (inc. land use and forestry)

Source: Defra

Table 5.11 End user carbon dioxide emissions 2004 to 2006 (million tonnes carbondioxide)

Total (inc.land use andforestry)Road transportDomestic

Industrial,commercial and

public

431311192004

411210182005

411111182006

Source: Defra

Policy Commentary

5.103 See commentary on traffic reduction andenergy reduction and efficiency (Policy 38) below.



Policy 38 Regional Priorities for EnergyReduction and Efficiency

Policy 38

Local Authorities, energy generators andother relevant public bodies should:

promote a reduction of energy usage inline with the ‘energy hierarchy and’;develop policies and proposals to securea reduction in the need for energythrough the location of development,site layout and building design;

Targets:

1.5 per cent reduction in energy consumptionper year over plan period

Indicators:

Domestic & Industrial/Commercial EnergyConsumptionAdoption of Supplementary Planning Documentsunderpinning sustainable energy policy

Results:

5.104 Only six East Midlands authorities haveadopted Supplementary Planning Documentsunderpinning sustainable energy policy, althoughmanyare currently looking into sustainable energy (appendixtable Env.18 on the CD lists these authorities).

Table 5.12 Gas Consumption in East Midlands 2006

Commercial and industrial consumersDomestic consumers

PercentageChange2005-2006

Sales perconsumer (kWh)



-7.6856,442-4.416,833Derby

-0.9642,609-4.818,958Derbyshire

-2.2645,347-4.718,563Leicester

0.7660,697-4.719,297Leicestershire

2.7572,487-4.517,836Lincolnshire

1.1663,235-5.017,895Northamptonshire

-3.8630,935-5.317,031Nottingham

-9.8659,309-4.819,363Nottinghamshire

-5.7271,943-5.020,013Rutland

-2.3649,144-4.818,492East Midlands

Source: DTI Regional Energy Consumption Statistics



Table 5.13 Electricity Consumption in East Midlands 2006

Commercial and industrial consumersDomestic consumers





1.6103,003-2.54,131Derby

3.5107,984-2.74,300Derbyshire

3.188,070-1.43,805Leicester

4.396,510-2.44,575Leicestershire

3.673,996-2.44,787Lincolnshire

6.399,233-3.34,661Northamptonshire

4.482,895-1.83,948Nottingham

3.288,777-1.84,305Nottinghamshire

-13.7179,755-3.75,231Rutland

3. 692,934-2.44,415East Midlands

Source: DTI Regional Energy Consumption Statistics

5.105 The latest data on gas and electricity salesper customer (Tables 5.12 and 5.13) shows thatbetween 2005 and 2006 there was a fall in domesticenergy consumption; electricity sales per domesticconsumer fell 2.4 per cent and gas 4.8 per cent. Duringthe same period industrial gas consumption perconsumer fell 2.3 per cent, however industrial electricalconsumption per consumer rose 3.6 per cent.

5.106 Overall gas and electricity sales in the regionfor both industrial and domestic use fell between 2005and 2006. Current annual consumption in the regionis a total of 47,976 GWh of gas and 23,499 GWh ofelectricity (See appendix tables Env.19 to 22 on theCD).

5.107 There are differences in the level ofconsumption of energy across the Region. This reflectsthe different housing conditions and the differentstructure of industries across the East Midlands.

Policy Commentary

5.108 The EnergyWhite Paper, “Meeting the EnergyChallenge”was published in May 2007. This confirmedthe four objectives of energy policy:

To put ourselves on a path to cutting CO 2 by 60per cent by 2050To maintain reliability of energy supplyPromote competitive markets in the UK andbeyondEnsure every home is adequately and affordablyheated

5.109 And identified two key challenges:

Tackling climate change by reducing carbondioxide emissions both within the UK and abroad;andEnsuring secure, clean and affordable energy aswe become increasingly dependent on importedfuel.

5.110 The reduction of demand and increasingenergy efficiency has been identified as a vital part ofthis programme. However the growing economy andthe growing number of houses that are due to be builtare a challenge to delivering on this agenda.

5.111 The Climate Change Act (2008) has beenpassed with a requirement that the UK look to reducingthe carbon emissions by 80 per cent by 2050. This willhave significant impacts across housing and planningpolicy development.

5.112 TheGovernment hasmade robust statementsrelating to the improvements in housing energyefficiency, with a path towards zero carbon newdevelopment by 2016 as part of the Sustainable Codefor Homes and this extended to all buildings by 2019.This is a challenging agenda and should deliver areduction in consumption of gas and electricity.Building level renewables are being increasinglysupported within local planning policy. PPS 1 ClimateSupplement particularly calls on local planningauthorities to identify carbon saving opportunities andis becoming an important driver of local planning policy.A number of local authorities in the region areinstituting Merton type policies.



5.113 The cost of energy has risen dramatically over2007/08 and the long term trends are that costs of fuelwill remain high. The numbers of households in fuelpoverty are rising and it seems unlikely that theGovernment will meet its target by 2010. Additionalfunding has beenmade available for energy efficiencymeasures in homes and to deal with the issue of fuelpoverty. The Housing Intelligence 4 the East MidlandsData set includes much useful information to helptarget action in this region (See www.hi4em.org.uk)

5.114 In addition security of fuel supply is becomingan issue. These issues are now informing the policyarena and giving greater impetus to the need todiversify generation and reduce energy consumption.

5.115 Within the region the Framework for Actionon Sustainable Energy has been published in 2007and currently detailed action plans for the separatepriorities are at different stages of delivery anddevelopment. Energy in both new build and currenthousing are identified as important areas for actionand various projects are ongoing across the region todeal with refurbishment of current housing. It is goodto see the adoption of energy reduction strategies bya number of authorities across the region.

5.116 The Energy Saving Trust has reorganised itsdelivery of advice to householders on energy saving.The new regional Energy Saving Trust Advice Centrehas commenced its function, replacing the threesub-regional Energy Efficiency Advice Centres(EEACs) which closed in September 2008. The newregional centre, based in Nottingham, but with outreachcapacity, will provide information on energy efficiency,micro renewables, transport and water and waste. TheESTAC has significantly more resource and will workwith householders, communities and small businessesto provide advice on carbon savings.

5.117 Within the East Midlands all local authoritieshave signed the Nottingham Declaration and areworking on Climate Change Plans. In addition each ofthe Local Area Agreements for the 6 county and 3unitary councils include targets for area wide carbonreductions, with 7 LAAs including a target for areduction in the per capita CO 2 (NI186) and twoadopting an indicator for carbon reductions in theirown estate (NI185). The LAA targets for three years(2008 – 2011) are for reductions of around 10 per cent.

Policy 39 Regional Priorities for LowCarbon Energy Generation

Policy 39

Local Authorities, energy generators andother relevant public bodies should promote:

the development of Combined Heat andPower (CHP) and district heatinginfrastructure necessary to achieve theregional target of 511 MWe by 2010 and1120 MWe by 2020; andthe development of a distributed energynetwork using local low carbon andrenewable resources.

In order to help meet national targets lowcarbon energy proposals in locations whereenvironmental, economic and social impactscan be addressed satisfactorily should besupported. As a result, Local PlanningAuthorities should:

safeguard sites for access to significantreserves of coal mine methane;identify suitable sites for CHP plants wellrelated to existing or proposeddevelopment and encourage theirprovision in large scale schemes;consider safeguarding former powerstation and colliery sites for low carbonenergy generation;support the development of distributedlocal energy generation networks; anddevelop policies and proposals toachieve the indicative regional targetsfor renewable energy set out in Appendix5.


Targets:

511 MWe by 2010. 1120 MWe by 2020Tomeet capacity of additional renewable energyfacility targets in Appendix 5 of the Regional PlanProposed Changes

Indicators:

Capacity of additional Combined Heat and PowerfacilitiesCapacity of additional renewable energy facilitiesCarbon dioxide emissions



http://www.hi4em.org.uk

Results: 5.118 See policy 35A for carbon dioxide emissions.

Table 5.14 Capacity of Combined Heat and Power Schemes 2005 to 2007 (MWe)

200720062005

242209237East Midlands

4,7974,7244,741England

Source: Energy Trends

5.119 Combined Heat and Power (CHP) is thesimultaneous generation of useable heat and power(usually electricity) in a single process. Table 5.14shows that capacity in the East Midlands in 2007 was

242MWe compared to 209MWe in 2006 and 237MWein 2005. The region is not 50 per cent towards the 2010target of 511MWe.

Table 5.15 Generation in East Midlands of Electricity from Renewable Sources 2003to 2007 (GWh)

TotalOther Bio fuelsLandfill GasWind/WaveHydro

432.6202.7223.11.35.52003

377.379.0287.2#11.12004

644.9307.7305.317.214.72005

663.6276.9290.381.215.22006

847.0388.4312.1132.314.22007

Source: Energy Trends# 2004 wind/wave data not shown due to small number of sites

5.120 The East Midlands is making considerableprogress in generating electricity from renewableresources. In 2003, approximately 433 GWh weregenerated from renewable resources, compared toover 847 GWh in 2007, with a substantial increase inenergy generated by wind power (Table 5.15).

5.121 Natural England have commissioned aRegional Biomass Active Demand Mapping Projectacross the East Midlands. The East Midlands hasapproximately 5,500 hectares planted, yielding 60,000– 70,000 Oven Dried Tonnes Per Annum (ODTPA).The concentration of biomass in the East Midlands isdue to both the ARBRE project which, despite itsfailure, encouraged the growth of Short RotationCoppice (SRC) in the 1990’s; and the large demandfor biomass from the concentration of power generatorsin the region, driven by Renewable ObligationCertificates (ROCs) introduced in 2002. Relatively few200kW+ biomass heating systems exist at present andas such, the majority of biomass entering the marketis supplied to power generators for co-firing.

Policy Commentary

5.122 National policy has continued to improve theprospects for renewable energy. The Government’sPlanning Policy Statement on Renewable Energy (PPS22) in particular has provided a positive framework.

5.123 The UK Government has published aconsultation on Renewable Energy that is looking atways to further facilitate uptake of renewables. Therecent Planning Act also includes legislation that willfacilitate larger scale infrastructure, includingrenewable energy and attendant energy networks.PPS1 also includes guidance on large scaleinfrastructure projects.

5.124 Combine Heat and Power is still lessdeveloped than might be hoped, but increasing costof fuel and future fiscal instruments to support CHPare hopefully going to help support further developmentin this area.

5.125 The Region has seenmuch increased interestin wind development, including development of thefirst offshore turbines in the region and the number ofinstallations is expected to increase markedly in the



next year. The 2010 target of 122MW onshore windseems likely to be met, but there is still someway togo to the 2020 target. Lincolnshire remains the mainfocus for development, but other areas of the regionare beginning to see activity. Planning approvals arecomparable with other areas of the country, so thereis no evidence that any technology is disadvantagedwithin the Region. There is evidence that the regionaltargets are being used positively to support renewabledevelopments.

5.126 Other renewables technologies are still lesswell developed, but the continuing policy support islikely to begin to lead to further activity in these areas.Biomass heat installations have continued to grow andthe market is maturing, but these installations are notincluded in the figures as they do not generateelectricity. There is however significant co-firing ofbiomass in the region’s coal fired large scale powerstations. New biomass electricity generation projectsare beginning to come forward as oil prices remainhigh. However there is some concern that the lack ofa value for the waste heat will lead to less efficientplant being installed to reduce the additional cost ofheat infrastructure. The conformity role is being usedto highlight this issue. Smaller electricity generatingbiomass plants are also now beginning to comethrough the planning process.

5.127 The market for small scale generation iscontinuing to be supported and the main barrierremains cost. Small scale hydro projects continue tocome forward, particularly in Derbyshire. A number ofschools and community groups are however activelyinstalling small scale generation and this interest islikely to continue to grow.

5.128 The UK Government has signed up to theEuropean 15 per cent renewable energy target. Thisis 15 per cent of all energy (including heat andtransport) to come from renewable sources. Heatproducing renewables are very difficult to monitor anddo not currently contribute to the regional renewabletargets, as these relate to electricity generation only.However heat producing renewables do contribute toa reduction in consumption, particularly of gas, so theincreasing capacity of heat producing renewablesshould be reflected in the consumption figures. Withinthe region the woodfuel biomass sector is becominga more robust market, with around 30MW of installedcapacity of renewable heat. Projects are comingforward that include the development of small districtheating systems fired by wood in off gas areas. Thisparticularly offers an opportunity for activity in reducingfuel poverty in areas that are off gas and often havehard to treat homes. There is also a growing marketin groundsource heat pumps and solar water heating.The Climate Change Act includes mechanisms forboth Renewable Heat Obligation and a Feed In Tariff

for domestic and small scale renewable electricitygeneration, which should add further impetus touptake.

5.129 The region still has challenging targets andthere is uncertainty that all the targets will be met.Regional partners continue to work to support initiativesin this area.

Policy 40 Regional Priorities for Culture,Sport and Recreation

Policy 40

Local Authorities and Strategic Sub-RegionalPartnerships should work with localcommunities to develop ‘culturalinfrastructure plans’ to inform LocalDevelopment Frameworks and other relevantplans and strategies. These should specify:

key elements of cultural provision,including assets needing refurbishment,relocation of facilities and newprovision;standards and costs for provision,including quality standards, andthe sources of and potential sources offunding, including from the planningsystem.

Local Authorities should also work withCounty based Sport Partnerships, SportEngland and other relevant bodies to ensurethat there is adequate provision of sports andrecreational facilities consistent with thepriorities for urban and rural areas outlinedin Policy 3, and the relevant Sub-area policiesunder section 2.4. Where appropriate, thereshould be joint working across administrativeborders to ensure that identified need is metin the most effective manner. Particularattention should be given to ensuring theRegion maximises the benefits arising fromthe London 2012 Olympics.

Targets:

Targets to be set through the Regional CulturalStrategyTargets set in The Sport England Strategy2008-11

Indicators:

Number of business in the creative industriesNumber of people employed in the creativeindustries



Percentage increase in cultural investmentPercentage of people taking part in culturalactivitiesNumber of sports and recreational facilitiesprovided per 1,000 population

Results:

Culture

5.130 The information below is from ‘East MidlandsUrban and Regional Creative Industries Data Study’for Culture East Midlands. This report used acombination of low level SIC code analysis of AnnualBusiness Inquiry (ABI) data and weightings to bestapproximate the creative industries sector. This reportused 2005 ABI data, due to the level of analysisinvolved it is not possible to update these findings.

5.131 In 2005, there were 13,400 businesses in theregion in the creative industries and 62,500 peoplewere employed in creative industries throughout theEast Midlands. Between 2001 and 2005, jobs in theEast Midlands in the creative industries increased by8 per cent. Over the same period, the number ofbusinesses in the creative industries in the Regiongrew by 19 per cent. In 2005, the creative industriesaccounted for around 3 per cent of all employment inthe region, and around 8 per cent of all businesses.This represents a marginal increase in the creativeindustries’ share of the regional economy since 2001.

5.132 Levels of investment in cultural activities aredifficult to quantify and no data is provided here. Dataon new sports and recreational facilities provided perpopulation served is also not available.

5.133 There are 3 national indicators which relateto participation in cultural activities.

NI 9 measures the percentage of adults in a LAwho have used a public library service in the past12 months. Use is for leisure purposes, includinginformal learning and studying or research forpersonal interests.NI 10 measures the percentage of adults in a LAwho have visited a museum or gallery in the past12 months. Visits are for leisure purposes,including informal learning and studying orresearch for personal interests.NI 11 measures the percentage of adults in a LAwho have either attended an arts event orparticipated in an arts activity at least three timesin the past 12 months. Engagement must be forleisure purposes.

5.134 Baseline statistics on these indicators,produced by DCMS, were released on 18 December2008. Data are based on interviews conductedbetween April 2008 and October 2008. As this data issurvey based confidence intervals of around 3percentage points apply to the county and unitaryauthority data in table 5.16. Figures across theactivities and areas are similar with around half theadults in each area participating in each activity.

Table 5.16 Percentage of Adults Participating in Cultural Activities

NI 11 - ProportionParticipating in Arts

NI 10 -ProportionVisitingMuseums

and Galleries

NI 9 – Proportionusing Libraries

38.445.147.7Derby






43.446.148.7Nottingham


49.856.851.9Rutland


45.253.848.5England

Source: DCMS



Sport and Recreation

5.135 Sport England has developed a database ofsports facilities called Active Places , which providesa means of reviewing the availability of facilities in thelocality and also the wider area. The database providesinformation about individual facilities including year of

construction, community access etc. This can beaccessed at http://www.activeplaces.com/. Figures 5.7and 5.8 taken from this database show the availabilityof Sports Halls and Swimming Pools in the EastMidlands. These, and other facilities, will be monitoredin the coming years to look at trends in availabilityacross the region.

Figure 5.7 Total Area of All Sports Hallsper 1000 population East Midlands (m²)

Figure 5.8 Total Area of Swimming Poolsper 1000 population East Midlands (m²)

Range for Swimming Pools (No. Authorities)SymbolRange for Sports Halls (No. Authorities)

3.59 - 9.32 (2)46.26 - 64.756 (9)

9.33 - 15.05 (15)64.757 - 83.252 (19)

15.06 - 20.78 (10)83.253 - 101.748 (7)

20.79 - 26.51 (6)101.749 - 120.244 (3)

26.52 - 32.24 (7)120.245 - 138.74 (2)

Source: Sport EnglandBased on capacity of facilities by Output Areas (and aggregated up where necessary)Only looks at facilities within local authority areas, it does not look across bordersThe calculation performed is: Unit ÷ population x 1000Unit defined by Facility TypePopulation based on 2001 Census

Policy Commentary

5.136 With the introduction of Core Output Indicatorsand the publication of the Regional Cultural Strategyin July 2006, (see www.culture-em.org.uk) which setsa vision and priorities for action in its field, it is hopedmore evidence of change will be available in futureyears. The Strategy contains a commitment to producean annual monitoring report of progress made in thepreceding year.

5.137 The Sport England Strategy for deliveringsport and physical activity guides Sport England’s worknationally and across the region. This replaces the

East Midland’s previous sports strategy, Change 4Sport. The new national strategy can be accessed at:h t t p : / / w w w . s p o r t e n g l a n d . o r g /sport_england_strategy_2008-2011.pdf

5.138 Information on trends in participation in varioussport and the degree to which the sports facilities meetlocal demand can be included in future reports. Thedata sources provided by Sport England can be foundon their website as outlined above. Sport England hasnow undertaken two national surveys of participationin sport and active recreation in 2005/6 and 2007/8. Ithas statistically significant samples in all local authorityareas and the results are analysed by sport, againstsocio-economic data, by local authority area and by



http://www.activeplaces.com/

http://www.culture-em.org.uk/main/

http://www.sportengland.org/sport_england_strategy_2008-2011.pdf

http://www.sportengland.org/sport_england_strategy_2008-2011.pdf

region. The second survey has just been completedand changes / trends can be monitored over time.Information can be accessed on their website at:www.sportengland.org/index/active_people_2 .

5.139 ‘Regional Priorities for Culture, Sport andRecreation’, associated policy (Policy 40), targets andindicators appear here as a result of the RSS 8 review.Monitoring targets and effectiveness of the policy(which will be implemented by local authorities - atwhich it is primarily aimed) will begin following adoptionof the revised RSS in 2009.

5.140 The creative industries figures for 2005 arean example of baseline mapping, activity which will beregularly repeated. Nationally the creative industriesrepresent sectors at SIC levels 4 and 5, and arerelatively high growth. The growth of these industriesis supported by investment in the sub regions tocluster, build profile and consolidate through a rangeof initiatives across business support and workspacedevelopment. Since 2007 the East Midlands Creativeand Cultural Economy Partnership (EMCCEP) hassupported this growth at strategy and policy level inthe region. Nationally, the launch of a national strategyfor the creative industries - Creative Britain: New

Talents for New Economy (Feb 2008) heralds a newfocus for national and regional agencies, localauthorities and other partners in growing the creativeand cultural economy.

5.141 The opening of a series of new culturalbuildings in the region in 2009/10 represents bothraised investment in and a refreshing of the culturalinfrastructure in the East Midlands. These new facilitieswill support plans to raise participation going forward.Running alongside these projects is a longitudinaleconomic, social and cultural impact study which willdeliver baselines and year on year impact data startingin 2010.

5.142 The Regional Cultural Olympiad, the culturalfestival supporting the Olympic Games aims to buildand widen participation in cultural activities in the buildup to 2012.

5.143 Over the coming years consistent,longitudinally gathered data linking participation in thearts, museums, libraries and archives, the historicenvironment, and sport will be captured by the DCMSTaking Part survey.



http://www.sportengland.org/index/active_people_2

Chapter 6 Minerals, Aggregatesand Waste

ActionsKey Points

National draft guidelines for aggregate provisionpublished for consultation in April 2008, rolling forwardthe guidelines to 2020, proposed a fall in aggregate

The Regional Plan Proposed Changes continues toreflect the national requirements for aggregateprovision as the East Midlands is the largest supplier

requirements. These guidelines are awaitingof aggregates in England. Sales of aggregates havebeen fairly constant and remain below theapportionment figure.

finalisation. Any review of the RSS will need to takethese into account on advice from the EMRAWP. Inthe meantime, the current apportionment remains inplace for the purposes of forward planning andmonitoring.

It is important for MPAs to continue their efforts tomake progress in bringing forward their developmentplans in line with the RSS.

Permitted reserves of aggregates have also fallenover the past few years. Whilst the landbank forcrushed rock still remains relatively high, sand andgravel reserves have dipped over the past year;reserves remain adequate but will need carefulmonitoring. Sand and gravel resources serve localmarkets and are susceptible to local market conditions.

Needs to progress to ensure facilities to manage thewaste in the Region come forward.

The progress to sustainable waste management isencouraging. Planning permissions saw an additionalcapacity of about 160,000 municipal waste treatmentbeing planned to be brought forward towards a targetof treating a forecasted 840,000 tonnes by 2020.

It is important that the Region and WPAs engage withthat process to ensure that the spatial dimension ofthat procurement is properly addressed to enablesuitable site to come forward.

The procurement of municipal waste facilities acrossthe Region is stimulating interest in the waste industryand commercial sector since the security of a longterm contract has the potential to satisfy the widerwaste types if facilities are developed sufficientlyflexibly enough to cater for other types of waste.

WPAs should continue to make sufficient provision intheir DPDs for these types of facilities. It is importantthat WPAs make every effort to progress their DPDsto adoption.

As a proxy for meeting targets the rate of developmentof merchant waste treatment capacity needs toincrease if the anticipated capacity gap is to be closed.


Chapter 6 .Minerals, Aggregates and Waste

Introduction

6.1 This section examines two policy areas – Regional Priorities for Minerals and Regional Priorities for WasteManagement.



EMAWPSupply remainslower thanapportionmentfigure

Annualregionalapportionmenttargets

RegionalCore

Production ofprimary landwon aggregatesproduced by

RegionalPriorities forMinerals

36

MineralsPlanningAuthority (MPA)

CLGRecycledaggregates rose14 per cent

RegionalCore

Production ofrecycled andsecondaryaggregates byMPA

between2003-05 but thedata is notreliable.

EnvironmentAgency andLA returns

The Region ismoving towards2020 targets.

To meetregionaltargets in

RegionalCore

Capacity ofwastemanagement

RegionalPriorities forWasteManagement

37

Appendix 4 offacilities by typeRSSProposedChanges

by WastePlanningAuthority (WPA)

DefraInsufficient datacollected

Zero growthin controlledwaste by2016 at theregional level

RegionalCore

Amount ofcontrolled wastearising andmanaged bymanagementtype

Waste DataFlows

In 2007/08 thehouseholdrecycling rate

Aminimum of50 per cent ofhousehold

RegionalCore

Percentage ofeachmanagement

was 41.9 perwastetype representscent making therecycled orof total waste

managed byWPA

East Midlandsthe bestperformingregion.

compostedby all WasteCollectionAuthorities by2015 (30 percent by 2010)

Waste DataFlows

About 53 percent ofmunicipal waste

Decrease inwastedisposed of

RSS CoreProportion ofwaste divertedfrom landfill

was landfillled inin landfill tomeet nationaltargets

2007/08compared totarget of 50 percent for2009/10.



Data Issues

6.2 Data on commercial & industrial waste andconstruction & demolition waste is not produced on aregular schedule; the data supplied here has beenreproduced from the 2006/07 report. The Peak DistrictNational Park Authority have provided someinformation on municipal waste, this data is based onapportionment of figures from its constituentauthorities. This data should not be used whencalculating totals for the East Midlands as parts ofDerbyshire will be double counted.

Policy 36 Regional Priorities for Minerals

Policy 36

Local Development Frameworks should:

Identify sufficiently environmentallyacceptable sources to maintain anappropriate supply of aggregates andother mineralsIndicate areas within which sites neededfor land won minerals should besafeguarded from development

Policy 36 cont.

Identify and safeguard opportunities forthe transportation of minerals by rail,water or pipelineSeek to apply the aggregatesapportionment figuresMake provision for a reduction in theamounts of aggregates from the PeakDistrict National Park and LincolnshireAONBIdentify and safeguard sites suitable forrecycling and reprocessingIdentify any adverse impact on habitatsand propose mitigation

Targets:

Annual regional apportionment targets

Table 6.1 Regional Aggregate Apportionment 2001 to 2016 (Million Tonnes)

TotalCrushed RockSand/Gravel


66.966.9-Peak District National Park






Indicators:

Production of primary land won aggregatesproduced by Minerals Planning Authority (MPA)Production of recycled and secondary aggregatesby MPA



Results:Table 6.2 Sales and Reserves for Aggregates 2007*

Sand and GraveCrushed Rock

PermittedReserves(million tonnes)

Sales (milliontonnes perannum )

PermittedReserves at

31/12/07 (milliontonnes)

Sales 2007(million tonnesper annum)

16.9571.22762.729.076Derbyshire 1

9.9221.332380.216.179Leicestershire 2

26.2992.47266.471.239Lincolnshire

3.3290.3614.160.38Northamptonshire

23.5663.5213.4320.034Nottinghamshire 3

00103.513.807Peak District

EMAWP 2007 (provisional)*Relates solely to aggregates uses and related reserves and excludes industrial uses and dormant sites1 Includes Derby2 Includes Leicester City and Rutland3 Includes Nottingham City

6.3 Data collected from local authorities in 2007 onrock and sand sales and reserves is in table 6.2.

Figure 6.1 East Midlands* Rock and Sand Reserves 2003 to 2007(million tonnes)

Source: EMAWP 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 and 2007 (provisional)*Includes the whole Peak Park

6.4 Data from East Midlands Aggregates WorkingParty (EMAWP) on rock and sand reserves ispresented in figure 6.1. Overall rock and sand reserves



fell between 2003 and 2007; Limestone and dolomitepermitted reserves saw the greatest fall, dropping 36

per cent from 2003 to 2007. Sales of rock, sand andgravel remained fairly constant over this period.

Table 6.3 Planning Permissions for Minerals Extraction 2007/08 (thousand tonnes)

ClayBuilding stoneIndustriallimestoneSand and gravel

0000Derby

0000Derbyshire

0000Leicester

4,500003,600Leicestershire

0*25*258,300Lincolnshire

N/AN/A1353,763Northamptonshire

0000Nottingham

N/AN/AN/A8Nottinghamshire

037.500Peak District

0000Rutland

Source: Local AuthoritiesNA: Data not applicableNR: Data not returned* per year

6.5 In 2007/08 planning permissions for a total of15.7 million tonnes of sand and gravel extraction weregranted in the region. There was also a permission for

4.5 million tonnes of clay extraction (in Leicestershire),alongside smaller permissions for industrial limestoneand building stone (Table 6.3).

Table 6.4 Estimate of use/disposal of Construction, Demolition and Evacuation Wastein 2003 and 2005 (million tonnes)

TotalDisposed of as

waste and backfillof quarry voids

Used atregistered

exempt sites

Used for landfillengineering orrestoration

Recycled asaggregate and

soil

East Midlands

9.883.061.840.844.882003

9.822.520.7330.975.592005

England

90.9322.616.436.4545.452003

89.6118.1315.449.6146.432005

Source: Survey of Arisings and Use of Alternatives to Primary Aggregates in England, 2005 Construction, Demolition and ExcavationWaste Final Report (CLG February 2007)

6.6 Data for recycled and secondary aggregates islargely based on surveys and it is recognised that thereare difficulties in obtaining reliable information. The‘Survey of Arisings and Use of Alternatives to PrimaryAggregates in England, 2005 Construction, Demolition

and Excavation Waste’ (CLG, February 2007) is usedhere (Table 6.4). Estimated production of recycledaggregate in the region in 2005 was 5.59 milliontonnes, which is a 14 per cent increase over 2003figures. The amount disposed of as waste or sent to



backfill quarry voids has also reduced since 2003. Therecycled material was estimated to be 57 per cent ofthe construction, demolition and excavation wastegenerated in the region, compared to 52 per centnationally.

Policy Commentary

6.7 The Regional Plan continues to reflect thenational requirements for aggregate provision as theEast Midlands is the largest supplier of aggregates inEngland. The RSS has apportioned the regionalguidelines for aggregate provision amongst constituentmineral planning authorities within the region with anexpectation that delivery of aggregate production inan environmentally acceptable way will be deliveredthroughmineral development plans and by the mineralindustry.

6.8 Permitted reserves of aggregates have alsofallen over the past few years although planningpermissions continue to come forward but not sufficientto replenish reserves. Sales of aggregates have beenfairly constant but remain below the apportionmentfigure although there is no evidence to suggest thatthe market demand has not been met. The landbankfor crushed rock still remains relatively high overall butis variable across the region and across rock type.Whilst this is not of immediate concern in terms ofnational planning policy guidance, in relation to thetime horizon of the RSS then there will be a need toaddress the falling reserve position at the next reviewof the RSS.

6.9 Sand and gravel resources serve local marketsand are susceptible to local market conditions. Saleshave been fairly constant but have dipped moderatelyover the past year; reserves remain adequate but willneed careful monitoring. National draft guidelines foraggregate provision published for consultation in April2008, rolling forward the guidelines to 2020, proposeda fall in aggregate requirements. These guidelines areawaiting finalisation. Any review of the RSS will needto take these into account on advice from theEMRAWP. In the meantime, the current apportionmentremains in place for the purposes of forward planningand monitoring.

6.10 It is important for MPAs to continue their effortsto make progress in bringing forward their developmentplans in line with the RSS.

Policy 37 Regional Priorities for WasteManagement

Policy 37

All relevant public and private sectororganisations, including manufacturing,importing and packaging firms, should worktogether to implement the Regional WasteStrategy and promote policies and proposalsthat will result in zero growth in all forms ofcontrolled waste by 2016 and waste beingtreated higher up in the ‘waste hierarchy’ setout in the National Waste Strategy.

All Waste Collection Authorities and WasteDisposal Authorities should achieve aminimum target for the recycling andcomposting of Municipal Solid Waste of 30per cent by 2010 and 50 per cent by 2015.

Waste planning authorities should makeprovision for waste management capacityequal to the amount of waste generated andrequiring management in their areas, usingthe apportionment data set out in Appendix4 of the Regional Plan Proposed Changes,subject to further research and analysis aspart of the annual monitoring process.


Targets:

To meet regional targets set out in Appendix 4Sub Regional Waste Apportionment of theproposed RSSZero growth in controlled waste by 2016 at theRegional levelA minimum of 50 per cent of household wasterecycled or composed by all wastecollection/disposal authorities by 2015 (30 percent by 2010)Decrease in waste disposed of in landfill to meetnational targets

Indicators:

Capacity of waste management facilities by typeby Waste Planning Authority (WPA)Amount of controlled waste arising andmanagedby management typePercentage of eachmanagement type representsof total waste managed by WPAProportion of waste diverted from landfill



Results:

Table 6.5 Waste Capacity in 2005 and Projected 2020 Levels in the East Midlands*(thousand tonnes)

TotalDisposalRe-useLandfillDiversion

Recycling/compostingCapacity

2,5661,711#260595Existing 2005Municipal SolidWaste 2,960640#8401,480Requirement 2020

12,4475,5839261,9073,031Existing 2005Total

22,1557,3524,3428409,621Requirement 2020

Source: Waste Planning Guidance for EMRA, SLR Consulting Ltd (August 2006)* Includes the whole Peak Park

6.11 TheWaste PlanningGuidanceReport producedby SLR Consulting for EMRA in August 2006 providesa detailed analysis of the capacity for wastemanagement in the region. A summary of this data isin table 6.5. This shows that in 2005 24 per cent ofwaste capacity was available for recycling andcomposting. The expectation is that this will move

towards 43 per cent in 2020. The existing capacity forre-use of waste accounts for 7 per cent of wastecapacity and is expected to rise to 20 per cent by 2020.The expectation for municipal solid waste (MSW)capacity is that it will move from 23 per cent beingrecycled in 2005 to 50 per cent being recycled by 2020.

Table 6.6 East Midlands Landfill Capacity Trends 1998/99 to 2007 (thousand cubicmetres)

200 72006200520042000/011998/99

25,21517,62616,99217,56022,93815,310Derbyshire

14,24615,56914,68615,92215,92915,729Leicestershire

28,98316,27618,56218,51315,26720,237Lincolnshire

8,0357,4118,4128,28420,26325,815Northamptonshire

10,9169,48210,53911,58515,46312,227Nottinghamshire

87,39566,36569,19071,86589,86089,318East Midlands


6.12 Table 6.6 gives data produced by theEnvironment Agency on landfill capacity. It should benoted that these figures refer to volume and not weight

as in the previous table. In 2007 the East Midlandshad a total landfill capacity of 87,395 thousand cubicmetres.



Table 6.7 Waste Planning Permissions East Midlands 2007/08 (tonnes per annum)

Construction andDemolition Waste

Commercial andIndustrialWaste**

MunicipalWaste

01,400*98,500Composting

156,00000Household Recycling Centre

339,6005,500,0008,153Landfill Total Void Space

60,500275,0007,100Landfill Waste Disposed per annum

*109,000*501,750200,000Recycling/recovery facility

118,000122,400160,000Transfer Station

Source: Local AuthoritiesNote some local authorities were not able to return complete data* Also permissions of unknown size** May contain an unquantifiable amount of municipal waste

6.13 Movement towards targets to increase therecycling and reuse of waste is in part reflected in theplanning permissions granted for waste facilities. Inthe region in 2007/08 several municipal waste planningpermissions were approved including a total of 200,000tonnes per annum recycling/recovery, 160,000 tonnesper annum transfer station and 98,500 tonnes perannum (plus a site of unknown size) composting. Only8 thousand tonnes total void landfill space wasapproved. A commercial and industrial landfill site wasapproved with a total void capacity of 5.5 milliontonnes, although a proportion of this may be used formunicipal waste. Total construction and demolitionlandfill permissions were for 339,600 tonnes total voidspace (Table 6.7).

6.14 This year data on municipal waste has beencollected through Defra’s Waste Data Flows system.Table 6.8 summaries key information on municipaland household waste. This includes the total amountof waste arising as well as two best value indicators;household waste per head and the cost of municipalwaste disposal per tonne.

6.15 During 2007/08 the East Midlands produced atotal of 2.4 million tonnes of municipal waste, 2.2million tonnes of this was household waste; 168thousand tonnes of this were generated at CivicAmenity sites. The amount of household wastecollected per head varied from 418kg in Leicester to530kg in Nottinghamshire. The cost of waste disposalper tonne was lowest in Nottingham at £32.40.



Table 6.8 Municipal and Household Waste 2007/08

BVPI 87 Cost ofmunicipal wastedisposal per tonne

(£)

BVPI 84HouseholdWaste (kgper head)

CivicAmenitywaste(tonnes)

Totalhouseholdwaste(tonnes)

Totalmunicipalwaste(tonnes)

37.175048,384119,595131,418Derby City

58.1748922,886370,688400,355Derbyshire

39.564184,216121,007134,790Leicester City

55.3352932,112337,063375,246Leicestershire

56.3849322,447338,676352,123Lincolnshire

44.3451534,512348,740387,275Northamptonshire

32.404261,763122,091172,179Nottingham City

42.6653038,680407,847439,448Nottinghamshire

51.525042,54919,32420,522Rutland

N/AN/A167,5492,185,0322,413,355East Midlands

N/AN/AN/A18,99818,998Peak*

Source: Waste Data Flows*Data for the Peak National Park has been calculated by apportioning waste figures from its constituent authorities. As there will be somedouble counting between Derbyshire and the Peak Park, the Peak has been excluded from East Midlands total calculationsN/A: Not applicableBVPI- Best Value Performance Indicator

Figure 6.2 Municipal Waste Disposal in the East Midlands2000/01 to 2007/08 (per cent)

Source: Waste Data Flows

6.16 Figure 6.2 shows the method of disposal ofmunicipal waste in the East Midlands over time. In2000/01 78 per cent of the East Midland's municipal

waste was disposed of via landfill. This has fallen to53 per cent in 2007/08. Levels of incineration haveremained fairly constant at around 6 or 7 per cent of



municipal waste. The recycling and composting ratehas increased from 15 per cent in 2000/01 to 40 percent in 2007/08. In 2007/08 47 per cent of the East

Midland's municipal waste is recycled or used torecover energy, compared with 45 per cent nationally.

Figure 6.3 Household Waste Recycling Rate 2000/01 to 2007/08(per cent)


6.17 Figure 6.3 gives the recycling rate for householdwaste in the East Midlands compared with the nationalrate over time. In 2007/08 the national householdrecycling rate was 34.5 per cent, the East Midlands

being the best performing region at 41.9 per cent. Thisfigure represents a year on year increase from 13.1per cent in 2000/01.

Table 6.9 East Midlands Authorities in the National Top Ten Household Recycling andComposting Rates 2007/8

Household Recycling andComposting Rate 2007/8

(%)

PositionAuthority

58.41stEast Lindsey District Council

55.93rdNorth Kesteven District Council

52.39thRushcliffe Borough Council


6.18 Three East Midland's authorities were in thetop ten nationally for recycling/composting ofhousehold waste; East Lindsey, North Kesteven andRushcliffe (58.4 per cent, 55.9 per cent and 52.4 percent respectively) (Table 6.9).



Figure 6.4 Household Waste Disposal Method 2007/08 (per cent)

Source: Waste Data FlowsData for the Peak National Park has been calculated by apportioning waste figures from its constituent authorities.

Table 6.10 Percentage Household Waste Disposed of via Landfill 2006/07 to 2007/08(per cent)

2007/082006/07

55.9563.90Derby City

61.8768.50Derbyshire

57.9165.59Leicester City

50.9357.19Leicestershire

50.2760.47Lincolnshire

57.7060.67Northamptonshire

20.2228.42Nottingham City

45.8950.84Nottinghamshire

71.2075.53Rutland

58N/RPeak*

Source: Waste Data Flows*Figures from the Peak are based on apportionment of district data and will include some data from Derbyshire and should therefore notbe included in total calculations

6.19 Figure 6.4 and table 6.10 give details on themethods of disposal for household waste. Of theWasteDisposal authorities in the East Midlands, NottinghamCity has the lowest proportion of household waste

disposed of via landfill (20 per cent) this is due to alarge proportion of waste being incinerated. In all casesthe proportion of household waste going to landfill hasfallen between 2006/07 and 2007/08.



Table 6.11 Percentage of Residents Served by Kerbside Recycling in Unitary Authorities(at least one recyclable) 2007/08 (per cent)

Per cent served by kerbside recycling

100Derby City

96Leicester City

91Nottingham City

7Rutland


6.20 Data on kerbside recycling is available forunitary authorities and is presented in table 6.11. Thisshows that the majority of households in Derby,

Leicester and Nottingham have kerbside recycling forat least one recyclable (100 per cent, 96 per cent and91 per cent respectively). In Rutland only 7 per centof households have any kerbside recycling service.

Table 6.12 Cost of household waste collection per household 2007/08 (pounds)

2007/08

56.51Derby City

42.19Leicester City

40.18Nottingham City

60.29Rutland


6.21 Table 6.12 gives the cost of household wastecollect per household for unitary authorities. In 2007/08the cost per household of waste collection in unitaryauthorities varied from £40.18 in Nottingham City to£60.29 in Rutland.



Table 6.13 Satisfaction with Waste Facilities in the East Midlands 2006/07 (per cent)

Percentage of peoplesatisfied or fairlysatisfied with their

recycling facilities (UAsonly)

Percentage of peoplesatisfied or fairly satisfiedwith the overall householdwaste collection service

(UAs only)

Percentage of peoplesatisfied or fairly

satisfied with wastedisposal facilities

737782Derby City

##77Derbyshire

667978Leicester City

##84Leicestershire

##83Lincolnshire

##79Northamptonshire

567674Nottingham City

##84Nottinghamshire

668183Rutland

Source: Audit Commission BVPI data# Data collected for unitary authorities only

6.22 Every three years, all local authorities arerequired to carry out a general household survey aspart of the Government’s Best Value Initiative, with2006/7 marking the third time all local authoritiescollected thesemeasures. The results of these surveysare in table 6.13. The percentage of people satisfiedor fairly satisfied with waste disposal facilities washighest in Nottinghamshire and Leicestershire at 84per cent. The lowest satisfaction rate was 74 per centin Nottingham City.

6.23 The percentage of people satisfied or fairlysatisfied with the overall household waste collectionservice and their recycling facilities is collected forunitary authorities. Rutland had the highest satisfactionrate for waste collection at 81 per cent. The highestsatisfaction rate for recycling services (73 per cent)was in Derby City. Nottingham City had the lowestsatisfaction levels for both waste collection andrecycling (76 per cent and 56 per cent respectively).For all unitary authorities satisfaction rates were higherfor waste collection than for recycling facilities.

Table 6.14 East Midlands’ Industrial and CommercialWaste Disposal 2002/03 (thousandtonnes)

TotalNotrecorded

Treatment& Transfer

ThermalRe-used/Recycled

Landrecovery

Landdisposal

8,0932672372583,4181853,728EastMidlands

Source: C&I survey 2002/3

6.24 Data on commercial and industrial waste iscollected irregularly and the latest available is from2002/03 when the region generated 8.1 million tonnes

of commercial and industrial waste. 3.4 million tonnes(42 per cent) of this was reused or recycled (Table6.14).



Table 6.15 Construction and Demolition Waste Disposal East Midlands 2005 (milliontonnes)

TotalArisings

LandfillDisposal

LandfillCapping

LandfillEngineering

Wasteenteringlicensedlandfills

Spread onRegisteredexempt sites

RecycledAggregateand Soil

9.82.50.60.43.50.75.6EastMidlands

Source: Defra

6.25 Construction and demolition waste datacollected by Defra in 2005 shows that 9.8 milliontonnes of construction and demolition waste were

produced in the region. 3.5 million tonnes of this (36per cent) was disposed of or used in landfill (Table6.15).

Table 6.16 East Midlands Hazardous Waste 2007 (tonnes)

East MidlandsDisposal or recovery option

71,052Incineration with energy recovery

4,575Incineration without energy recovery

154,949Landfill

1Long term storage

246,098Recycling / reuse

1,007Rejected

13,934Transfer (D)

33,500Transfer (R)

67,186Treatment

592,302Total


6.26 In 2007 a total of 592 thousand tonnes ofhazardous waste was deposited in the East Midlands.246 thousand tonnes of this waste were recycled orre-used, 155 thousand tonnes went to landfill (Table6.16).

Table 6.17 Landfill deposits by sub-region 2000/1 to 2007 (thousand tonnes)

2007200620052004/052002/032000/01

1,2801,1801,1681,1771,2761,834Derbyshire

1,5321,8561,6881,5341,4102,095Leicestershire

571640520606891907Lincolnshire

1,3741,4941,7861,4291,7492,376Northamptonshire

1,5321,8061,6061,6832,4602,097Nottinghamshire

6,2886,9766,7676,4307,7859,309East Midlands




6.27 Table 6.17 provides information from theEnvironment Agency on landfill disposal of all wastetypes in the East Midlands. Since 2000/01 there hasbeen a decrease of 32 per cent in the amount of wastegoing to landfill.

Policy Commentary:

6.28 Some 969,000 tonnes of municipal waste wasrecycled in 2007/08 at a rate of 40 per cent. The targetfor 2009/10 in the RSS is for 30 per cent (817,000tonnes). About 53 per cent (1,279,000 tonnes) ofmunicipal waste was landfilled in 2007/08 comparedto a target of 50 per cent (1,373,000 tonnes) for2009/10. This means that these targets have alreadybeen reached for the first target milestone year. Mostwaste disposal authorities in the region are embarkedon the procurement of major waste treatment facilitiesfor municipal waste which will deliver the landfilldiversion target in future years provided thoseprocurement activities are successfully implemented.Planning permissions saw an additional capacity ofabout 160,000 municipal waste treatment beingplanned to be brought forward towards a target oftreating a forecasted 840,000 tonnes by 2020. Thisapproved treatment capacity has not yet been reflectedin the monitoring figures.

6.29 With regard to commercial, industrial,construction, demolition and excavation waste littledata has been collected or is readily available to informRSS monitoring. Over 850,000 tonnes of merchantwaste treatment capacity has been permitted in2007/08 (compared to just over 700,000 tonnes lastyear). As a proxy for meeting targets this rate ofdevelopment needs to increase if the anticipatedcapacity gap is to be closed. However, there is a lackof information as to the extent to which this wastestream is currently dealt with at source, does not ariseor is dealt with in some other way. Having said that,the market has not brought forward significant levelsof waste capacity proposals. It is not clear why this isthe case. Concentration on municipal waste contractswithin the region and nationally may be soaking upmarket capacity, financial markets may be difficult orthere may be other barriers. Responsibility fordelivering this element lies with the commercial sector,the waste industry and waste planning authorities.Waste planning authorities should continue to makesufficient provision in their development plandocuments for these types of facilities. It is importanttherefore that waste planning authorities make everyeffort to progress their development plans to adoption.



Chapter 7 Transport

ActionsKey Points

The Ptolemy model is being extended across theregion to test the impacts from traffic generated fromnew development and to assess the effect of

There is a need for the closer alignment between landuse and transportation policies.

alternative transport measures. The Assembly will usethe results of this work to inform the current review ofthe RTS.

Local Planning and Transport Authorities shouldensure that where required travel plans are provided,monitored and enforced.

Company and school travel plans are not alwayseffective in achieving modal shift.

During 2009 local authorities should take a view onhow they wish to approach the new opportunitiesprovided by the Act.

The Local Transport Act 2008 allows local authoritiesto review the effectiveness and efficiency ofgovernance in their area and has the potential toachieve a step change in providing integrated publictransport.

The Regional Assembly, along with emda and localauthority partners will closely monitor progress to tryand ensure the scheme’s timetable is met and costsdo not overrun.

DfT have announced additional support towards halfthe cost of the A46 Newark to Widmerpool scheme.This will enable work on the scheme to start during2009.

Introduction


SourcesProgressStatusTargetCore/ContextualKey IndicatorsPolicy TitlePolicyNo.

------RegionalTransportObjectives

42

-Seechapter8

----Sub-areaTransportObjectives

43

DfTTraffic levelscontinue to

Progressivereduction

RSS CoreSignificant

Levels of trafficgrowth

RegionalApproach to

44

show year onover time inEffectIndicator

TrafficGrowthReduction

year increase,though rate of

the rate oftraffic growth

growth slowed


Chapter 7 . Transport


between 2006 –07

Emda/6Cscongestion

Baselineposition

Reduction incongestion in

RSS CoreSignificant

Scale ofcongestion in

urban areasEffectIndicator

urban areas andon inter-regionalroutes

managementstudyand on

inter-regionalroutes

LocalAuthorities

No. of schoolsand businesses

Year on yearincrease in

RSS CoreNumber ofbusinesses and

A RegionalApproach to

45

with travel plansincreasing

number ofcompanies,

schools withtravel plans

BehaviouralChange

schools and LocalAuthorities

Percentage ofworkforce

RSS CorePercentage ofworkforce employees

covered bytravel plans employed by

companies withemployed bycompanies withtravel plans travel plans

increasing

LocalAuthorities

Percentage ofpupils attending

RSS CorePercentage ofpupils attending

schools withschools withtravel plans travel plans

increasing

LabourForceSurvey

No change injourneys to workby cycle

Increase injourneysmade bycycle

RSS CoreJourneys madeby cycle

LocalAuthorities

Incomplete dataprovided for2007/08

-RSS CoreSignificantEffectIndicator

Number andlength of newcycle routesprovided

-No targets orindicators

-RSS Core-RegionalPriorities for

46

ParkingLevies andRoad UserCharging

-No targets orindicators

-RSS Core-Regional CarParkingStandards

47

-Lack of data-RSS Core-A RegionalApproach to

48

DevelopingPublicTransportAccessibilityCriteria

Office of RailRegulation

Rail operatorhas met its

Punctualityand reliability

RSS CoreSignificant

Punctuality andreliability ofservices

RegionalHeavy RailInvestmentPriorities

49




target forpunctuality

of railservices

EffectIndicator

improved toat least 85per cent by2006 andfurtherimproved by2008

DfTSlight fall in buspassengers in2007/08

An increaseat theregional level

RSS CoreLevel of bus andlight railpatronage

RegionalPriorities forBus and

50

towards the(number ofboardings)

Light RailServices national

target of 12per cent by2010

LocalAuthorities

No facilitiesdeveloped in2007/08

-RSS CoreNew PublicTransportInterchangesDeveloped

RegionalPriorities forIntegratingPublicTransport

51

LocalAuthorities

No facilitiesdeveloped in2007/08

-RSS CoreNew Park andRide Facilities

LocalAuthorities

Figures littlechanged fromprevious year

A decreasein fatal orserious

RSS CoreNumber ofpeople killed orseriously injured

RegionalTrunk RoadInvestmentPriorities

52

accidents atin roadaccidents the regional

level towardsthe nationaltarget of 40per cent by2010

--See policy 44Reduction ofcongestion in

RSS CoreCongestion inurban areas and

urban areasinter-regionalroutes and on


LocalAuthorities

Two trunk roadschemes beingimplemented

-RSS CoreInvestment inroad network

--See policy 52A decreasein fatal or

RSS CoreNumber ofpeople killed or

RegionalMajor

53

seriousseriously injuredHighwayaccidents atin road

accidentsInvestmentPriorities the regional

level towardsthe nationaltarget of 40per cent by2010




--See policy 44Reduction ofcongestion in

RSS CoreCongestion inurban areas and

urban areasinter-regionalroutes and on


--See policy 52-RSS CoreInvestment inroad network

LocalAuthorities

Baseline data-RSS CorePrincipal roadsin LTP authoritycontrol wheremaintenanceshould beconsidered

LocalAuthorities

Baseline data-RSS CoreNon-principalclassified roadsin LTP authoritycontrol wheremaintenanceshould beconsidered

DfTFreighttransported by

Targets setout in

RSS CoreFreighttransported byroad

Implementationof theRegional

54

road continuesto increases

RegionalFreightStrategy(July 2005)

FreightStrategy DfTFreight lifted at

EMA continuesto increase

RSS CoreFreight lifted atEMA

EMAThe proportionof people

Increase inpassengers

RSS CorePercentage ofpassengers

RegionalPriorities forAir Transport

55

accessing EMAaccessingaccessing EMAcontinues toincrease

EMA bypublictransport

by publictransport

Data Issues

7.1 There are a number of policy areas and targetssuch as Policy 49 Regional Heavy Rail Priorities, wherethere are issues around the extent to which the

Regional Spatial Strategy/Regional Transport Strategycould, or should, be expected to have an influence onthe indicators, such as punctuality and reliability ofservices, when compared to other factors. Some datafrom the Department for Transport was not availableat the time of writing.



Policy 42: Regional Transport Objectives

Policy 42

The development of transport infrastructureand services across the Region should beconsistent with the following Objectives:

1. To support sustainable development inthe Region’s Principal Urban Areas,Growth Towns and Sub-RegionalCentres described in Policy 3.

2. To promote accessibility and overcomeperipherality in the Region’s rural areas.

3. To support the Region’s regenerationpriorities outlined in Policy 19.

4. To promote improvements tointer-regional and international linkagesthat will support sustainabledevelopment within the Region.

5. To improve safety across the Region andreduce congestion, particularly withinthe Region’s Principal Urban Areas andon major inter-urban corridors.

6. To reduce traffic growth across theRegion.

7. To improve air quality and reduce carbonemissions from transport by reducingthe need to travel and encouragingmodal shift away from the private car,particularly towardswalking, cycling andpublic transport and away from roadbased freight transport.

Targets and Indicators

None

Results:

7.2 Policy 42 is a general statement regarding therelationship between transport issues and othereconomic and social activities within the East Midlands.There are no specific indicators associated with thispolicy.

Policy Commentary

7.3 The policy seeks to ensure that local authoritieshave regard to the Core Strategy and RegionalTransport Objectives when drawing up Local TransportPlans and Local Development Documents. The

Department of Transport has recently published aconsultation document on Delivering a SustainableTransport System. This proposes extensive analysisover the next 3 years to identify challenges oninternational, national and regional/city transportnetworks beyond 2014. This will help identifycross-modal options to address the challenges.

Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives

See Chapter 8 which covers information relatingto regional sub areas

Policy 44: A Regional Approach to TrafficGrowth Reduction

Policy 44

Local authorities, public and local bodies, andservice providers should work together toachieve a progressive reduction over time inthe rate of traffic growth in the East Midlandsand support delivery of the national PSAcongestion target. This should be achievedby promoting measures to:

encourage behavioural change as setout in Policies 45 and 46;reduce the need to travel;restrict unnecessary car usage;manage the demand for travel;significantly improve the quality andquantity of public transport; andencourage cycling and walking for shortjourneys.

Targets:

A progressive reduction over time in the rate oftraffic growth and congestionReduction in congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routes

Indicators:

Levels of traffic growthScale of congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routes



Results:

Figure 7.1 Traffic Levels in East Midlands 2001 to 2007 (billionvehicle kilometres)

Source: DfT Transport Statistics

Figure 7.2 Percentage Change in Traffic Levels on East MidlandsRoads 2001 to 2007 by Road Type




Figure 7.3 Estimated traffic flows for all motor vehicles by local authority: EastMidlands: 2003-2007 (index 1993=100)


7.4 Figures 7.1 – 7.3 show the levels of traffic in theEast Midlands over time. In 2007 traffic levels in theEast Midlands were 41.7 million vehicle kilometres, a1 per cent increase on the 2006 figure. Figure 7.2shows the percentage change in traffic levels fordifferent road types in the East Midlands between 2001and 2007. Minor rural roads saw the greatest increase,with traffic levels rising 15 per cent. Traffic levels onurban A roads remained static over this period.

7.5 A study was undertaken by WS Atkinsconsultants on behalf of the East MidlandsDevelopment Agency ( emda ) to define traffic

congestion and to calculate its direct financial impactand then its wider economic impact over the studyarea (Atkins Economic Costs of Congestion in the EastMidlands, emda , July 2007). The study definedcongestion as the ‘lost time per vehicle-kilometre’,where ‘lost time’ is the difference between thetheoretical maximum speed on a road (in free-flowingconditions) and the actual speed that is experienced.Table 7.1 gives figures for total delays in the EastMidlands.



Table 7.1 Total Vehicle Delay on Strategic Road Network (thousand vehicle hours perannum)

TotalHeavy Goods VehiclesCars & Vans

PMNonPeak

AMPMNonPeak

AM

4,7091396362428251,977890Roads of national importance

8,1422531,2034771,2823,3171,610Roads of regional importance

Source: Atkins Economic Costs of Congestion in the East Midlands emda (July 2007)

7.6 In evaluating the costs of congestion at astrategic level, a distinction can be made betweenrecurrent and non-recurrent delay on the strategic roadnetwork. Recurrent delay refers to delay occurring ona regular basis (e.g. high peak-hour traffic volumesdue to commuting) and non-recurrent delay relates toincidents that occur randomly, such as accidents. Datawas obtained from the Highways Agency (HA) tocalculate the total extent of congestion on the strategicroad network. The total delay, based upon data fromAugust 2004 to July 2005 was 12.9 thousandvehicle-hours per year.

7.7 Recurrent delays tended to occur on theapproaches to junctions or on single carriagewaysections. In the case of non-recurrent delays, it canbe noted that there are particular problems with theM1 along much of its length between Northamptonand Chesterfield. This is effectively the full length ofthe East Midlands stretch of the M1 and appears tobe due to the motorway operating near capacity, withsmall incidents acting to cause significant disruptionon the route.

Table 7.2 Morning Peak hour (8am-9am) Average Delay per Mile

OrbitalRadialAll routes

1min 28secs2min 18secs2min 06secsDerby

1min 41secs2min 40secs2min 07secsLeicester

2min 02secs2min 05secs2min 04secsNottingham

Source: 6cs Congestion Management Study

7.8 A study undertaken on congestion in the 3 Citiesarea, ‘The 6Cs Congestion Management Study’ waspublished on 24 th April 2008. This included a surveyof the main traffic routes in the conurbations of GreaterNottingham, Derby, and Leicester and towns inLeicestershire and South Derbyshire. Satellite vehiclelocation technology was used to measure traffic delaysand journey times on the local road network, via in carGPS. The network surveyed comprised themain radialand orbital routes in the urban areas and towns withinthe study area. Over 70 different routes were surveyedand over 50,000 runs were made in both directions onthe overall network, making the survey one of thelargest ever undertaken in the UK outside London.Table 7.2 gives the average delay per mile at peaktime. Delay levels were similar across the three cityconurbations, with radial routes tending to suffer longerdelays than orbital routes. Further information includinga map of the worst affected routes can be found onwww.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk.

Policy Commentary

7.9 The Regional Plan Proposed Changes notesthat the level of traffic in the East Midlands has beengrowing at about 2% per annum in recent years, thehighest growth rate of any region in England. It alsonoted the particular challenges facing the region inmanaging travel demand in a sustainable mannergiven the scale of likely population growth, the relativelack of public transport compared with some otherparts of the country, and the likely sources availableto deliver improved transport infrastructure over thenext 15 to 20 years.

7.10 Given these challenges, together with concernsexpressed by the EiP panel about the need for a closeralignment between land use and transportation policiesand the lack of a strong analytical supporting evidencebase to assess traffic growth reduction policies, TheSecretary of State proposed that the policy to achievea reduction in the rate of traffic growth at least to zeroby 2026 be dropped. It was proposed that the issue



http://www.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk

be thoroughly re-examined as part of the full reviewof the Regional Transport Strategy, and that in themeantime it would be appropriate to reinstate the trafficgrowth reduction policy which aims to achieve aprogressive reduction over time in the rate of trafficgrowth.

7.11 Figure 7.3 shows that the rate of increase inroad traffic growth for the East Midlands has droppedfrom 1.5 per cent (years 2005 – 2006) to just under 1per cent (years 2006-2007). It also shows that theLocal Authority areas with the highest rates of increasebetween 2006-2007 are Nottinghamshire (1.9 per cent)and Lincolnshire (1.8 per cent). Road traffic growthactually decreased by 0.5 per cent in the NottinghamUA area in the same period. Figures 7.1 and 7.2 alsoshow that the majority of the increase between2006-2007 occurred on rural roads.

7.12 Whilst this decrease in the rate of road trafficgrowth is welcomed, the challenge to achieveprogressive reductions in rates of road traffic growthin the future through the shifting of road traffic demandonto more sustainable modes of travel should not beunderestimated. At a national level, using transportdata from 2007, a 1 per cent reduction in the totalbillion kilometres travelled using road transport – cars,vans & taxis (68.9 million passenger kms from a totalof 689 billion passenger kms) equates to 13.8 per centof existing bus and coach demand (68.9 millionpassenger kms out of a total bus & coach demand of50 billion passenger kms) and 11.7 per cent of existingrail demand (68.9 million passenger kms out of a totalrail demand of 59 billion passenger kms). This meansthat to take 1 per cent of existing car demand off theroad, bus demand would need to increase by 13.8 percent to accommodate this shift (source: TransportStatistics Great Britain 2008, table 1.2).

Table 7.3 Modal shift challenge

Highest District in LTA% change in existing bus demand(pass km) required to absorb 1% shiftin car demand (pass km) for journeysto work between 2-10 kms length

Local Transport Authority

2%Nottingham UA

3%Leicester UA

5%Derby UA

Bassetlaw (15%)5%Nottinghamshire

Derbyshire Dales (13%)8%Derbyshire

Harborough (18%)8%Leicestershire

Daventry (24%)9%Northamptonshire

South Holland (29%)13%Lincolnshire

25%Rutland UA

6%East Midlands

Source: 2001 census, travel to work data.For total passenger km calculations for each mode, population travelling 2-5kms to work assumed to travel 3.5kms, population travelling5-10kms assumed to travel 7.5km

7.13 At a regional level, an attempt has been madeto illustrate the effects of shifting existing car demandfor journeys to work using 2001 census travel to workdata where public transport (bus) could be considereda suitable alternative mode of travel (journeys ofbetween 2-10km in length). Table 7.3 illustrates foreach Local Transport Authority (LTA) in the region thepercentage change in existing bus demand (totalpassenger kms travelled by bus for journeys to workbetween 2-10 kms in length originating in the LTA area)required to absorb a 1 per cent shift in car demand

(total passenger kms travelled by car – driver only –for journeys to work between 3-10 kms in lengthoriginating in the LTA area).

7.14 The table illustrates that for the East Midlandsas a whole to achieve a 1 per cent shift in car demandfor journeys to work would require existing bus demandfor these journeys to increase by 6 per cent. This figureis smaller for urban areas with good public transportnetworks, a higher existing public transport patronagebase and higher job densities, but for rural areas the



challenges remain considerable. Yet it is in such areasthat increases in road traffic growth are occurring (seefigures 7.1 and 7.2).

7.15 A comprehensive sub-regional interactive landuse and transport computer model called Ptolemy hasbeen developed for the Highways Agency by WSPConsultants. The model has recently been used byseveral districts in the region to test the likely impactsfrom traffic generated on the local road network arisingfrom proposed land use allocations and planned newdevelopments in Local Development Frameworks(LDF). The Regional Assembly has recentlycommissioned work to extend the coverage of theexisting Ptolemy model for the whole East Midlandsarea, and it is hoped that the extended model will beused to inform the development of the RegionalTransport Strategy as part of the wider Regional Plan,and any further refinement of investment priorities.

7.16 Furthermore, as part of the consultation processinstigated by DfT on the paper ‘Delivering aSustainable Transport System’ (DaSTS), it wasrecognised that to improve the consistency of appraisalframeworks, options need to be compared acrossdifferent modes and networks, and for both transportand non-transport solutions (for example the relocationof essential services). The latter option could beconsidered to reduce traffic growth in rural areas, byreducing the distance required to travel to reachservices and facilities. In the document, theDepartment for Transport also noted the need toenhance its analytical and modelling capabilities,especially with regard to land use & transportationmodelling.

Policy 45: A Regional Approach toBehavioural Change

Policy 45

The Regional Planning Body, withGovernment, public and local bodies, andservice providers, should work together toimplement measures for behavioural changeto encourage a reduction in the need to traveland to change public attitudes toward carusage and public transport, walking andcycling. Such measures should beco-ordinatedwith the implementation of otherpolicies in the RTS and in Local TransportPlans and Local Development Frameworks,and should include:

developing and enforcing Travel Plansfor both new and existing developmentsto reduce traffic movements andsafeguard transport infrastructure;quality public transport partnerships;travel awareness programmes;educational programmes;pilot projects promoting innovations inteleworking and personalised travelplans;reducing speed limits where appropriateto increase safety for all road users; andthe provision of safe routes forpedestrians and cyclists, convenientaccess to buildings and sufficient securecycle parking in new developments.

Targets:

Year on year increase in the number ofcompanies, schools and employees covered bytravel plansIncrease in journeys made by cycle

Indicators:

Number of businesses and schools with travelplansPercentage of workforce employed by companieswith travel plansPercentage of pupils attending schools with travelplansNumber and length of existing and new cycleroutesJourneys made by cycle



Results:

Table 7.4 Travel Plans 2005/06 to 2007/08

Schools with travel plansBusinesses with travel plansCounty/Authority

2007/082006/072007/082006/07

96792929Derby

297209N/R16Derbyshire

165867549GreaterNottingham

N/R467447Leicester

19416139*32Leicestershire


103745954NorthNottinghamshire

2632126082Northamptonshire

131100Rutland

Source: Local Authorities*Leicestershire figure only includes businesses with 250+ employeesN/R: Not returned

Table 7.5 Proportion of Pupils and Workforce covered by Travel Plans 2007/08 (percent)

PupilsWorkforce

*7140Derby

82N/RDerbyshire

6136Greater Nottingham

N/R34Leicester

66**11Leicestershire

90N/RLincolnshire

4525North Nottinghamshire

74N/RNorthamptonshire

490Rutland

Source: Local Authorities*Percentage of schools**Major employers (250+ employees) onlyN/R: Not returned

7.17 Tables 7.4 and 7.5 give details on EastMidlands businesses and schools with travel plans. Inthe region, 391 businesses and 1,468 schools havetravel plans (up from 356 and 1,179 respectively in2006/07). In Derby, 40 per cent of the workforce isemployed by businesses with travel plans. The lowestfigure is for Leicestershire with 11 per cent of the

workforce employed by a business with a travel plan,however it should be noted that Leicestershire figuresonly include large firms and will be an underrepresentation. The proportion of pupils attendingschools with travel plans varies from 45 per cent inNorth Nottinghamshire to 90 per cent in Lincolnshire.



Table 7.6 All Cycle Routes as of 31 st March 2008

Length of NewRoutes 2007/08 (km)

New Routes2007/08

Length of Routes(km )

Number ofRoutes

County/Authority

2311084Derby

31737449Derbyshire

1910748N/RGreater Nottingham

N/RN/RN/RN/RLeicester

2218N/RN/RLeicestershire

812196N/RLincolnshire

34N/RN/RNorth Nottinghamshire

N/RN/RN/RN/RNorthamptonshire

32279Rutland

109541,45362East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesN/R: Not returnedNote total figures for 31 st March 2008 include the figures for new routes in 2007/08

7.18 Only three Authorities were able to providefigures for the number of existing cycle routes and fivefor the total length of cycle routes. These figurestotalled 62 routes and 1,453km, but are likely to be a

large under representation of the true regional figures.In 2007/08 54 new cycle routes were developed,totalling 109km (Table 7.6).

Table 7.7 Usual method of travel to work – East Midlands and England:October-December 2006 and 2007 (per cent)

Num

berin

emplo

yment

('000s)

Other

mod

es

Walk

Allrail

Bus/

coach

Bicycle

M/cycle

Car

1,8361111631772006East Midlands

1,748-111731762007

20,9361118831702006England

21,055-118731692007

Source: ONS Labour Force Survey via DfT

7.19 Table 7.7 gives data on usual method of travelto work. In the final quarter of 2007, 3 per cent of theEast Midlands’ workforce travelled to work by bicycle.This figure has remained constant since the finalquarter of 2006 and is the same as the national level.

Policy Commentary

7.20 A change in methodology by the Departmentfor Children, Schools and Families (DCSF) may haveresulted in discrepancies in the data on school travelplans between 2006 and 2007. This aside, goodprogress has been achieved in terms of increasing the

number of schools with travel plans. However it isrecognised that to deliver a step change in the qualityof the overall ‘journey to school package’ for bothprimary and secondary pupils, securing sufficient gainsin modal shift requires considerable investment inpublic transport networks (for example throughdedicated ‘yellow school buses’) or through theprovision of revenue funding to provide concessionarytravel for young people. Some local authorities weredisappointed the DCSF decided not to progress anyof the Pathfinder bids submitted by a number of LocalAuthorities in the East Midlands to secure



improvements in home-to-school transport under the‘Sustainable Transport and Travel Strategy’programme.

7.21 The effectiveness of company travel plans insecuring modal shift, and concerns about lack ofmonitoring and enforcement remain a concern. TheRegional Plan Proposed Changes, paragraph 3.4.18,states that ‘Travel plans, particularly for newdevelopment, have a key role to play in reducing trafficgrowth and safeguarding infrastructure assets. It isimportant that Travel Plans are required and enforcedby Local Planning Authorities, supported by LocalTransport Authorities, and monitored by developers’.

Policy 46: Regional Priorities for ParkingLevies and Road User Charging

Policy 46

All Transport Authorities should examine thefeasibility and appropriateness of introducingfiscal measures to reduce car usage.

Particular consideration should be given tointroducing such measures in the Region’sPrincipal Urban Areas and Growth Towns,and environmentally sensitive areasexperiencing high levels of traffic or trafficgrowth such as the Peak District National Park.

Targets and Indicators:

None

Results and Policy Commentary:

7.22 The 6CsCongestionManagement Study resultsand conclusions were published on 24th April 2008.Details of the report can be accessed athttp://www.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk. At thecurrent time a decision has been made not to pursuefunding for further research on road user charging.

7.23 On 19 May 2008 Nottingham City Councilpublished notice that it has made The City ofNottingham Workplace Parking Levy Order 2008 andin July 2008 applied to the Secretary of State forTransport for confirmation of the Order. The cost foreach liable parking space provided would initially be

£185 in the projected start date of April 2010, risingwith increments and inflation in the early years until2015 (expected cost £364).

Policy 47: Regional Car Parking Standards

Policy 47

Local Planning Authorities should apply themaximum amounts of vehicle parking for newdevelopment as set out in PPG13. In theRegion’s Principal Urban Areas, GrowthTowns and environmentally sensitive ruralareas, opportunities should be taken todevelop more challenging standards basedon emerging public transport accessibilitywork. (see RSS Proposed Changes for the fullPolicy wording.)


To be developed.

Results:

7.24 Lack of monitoring systems has meant that nodata has been collected for this regional priority areawhich refers to new proposals for themaximum amountof vehicle parking for new developments which needto be reflected in local development frameworks anddevelopment plans.

Policy Commentary

7.25 Comments made in previous annual monitoringreports relating to this policy still apply. The RegionalPlan Proposed Changes notes that car parkingstandards for new developments were being appliedby only about half of the region’s Local PlanningAuthorities. Para 3.4.22 of the document states that‘All Local Planning Authorities should seek to applyPPG13 standards in all but exceptional circumstances,for example where there are road safety or amenityimplications that cannot be resolved by controls orenforcement or where a transport assessmentindicates that higher standards are appropriate.Particularly in the Region’s Principal Urban Areas andGrowth Towns, there is considered to be potential fordeveloping more challenging standards based onemerging public transport accessibility work’.



http://www.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk

Policy 48: A Regional Approach toDeveloping Public Transport AccessibilityCriteria

Policy 48

Local Authorities and service operatorsshould promote improvements in publictransport accessibility by using the RegionalPublic Transport Network in order to:

inform public transport investmentdecisions;inform strategic development decisionsas part of the Local DevelopmentFramework process; andpromote and market the use of publictransport generally.


None

Results:

7.26 Table 7.8 gives details on the accessibility ofpublic transport in the East Midlands. Two thirds ofhouseholds have access to a peak time bus servicewith at least an hourly frequency between 6am and9am within a 250km walk. Only 14 per cent ofhouseholds are within a 250m walk of a bus stop witha ten minute or better frequency between 6am and9am.

Table 7.8 Proportion of East Midlands Households within 250m walk of a bus stop2007 (per cent)

Proportion with AccessFrequency of Service

66An hourly bus service between 6am -9am

50A half hourly service between 6am -9am

14A 10min frequency service between 6am -9am

Source: Statement of Transport Conditions and Issues, Atkins, October 2008

Policy Commentary

7.27 Comments made in previous annual monitoringreports relating to this policy still apply. The conceptof accessibility planning - the notion of locatingdevelopment in the right places - lies at the heart ofthe debate of the linkage between land use andtransportation planning, and as such has strong linkswith other regional policies and targets, notably trafficgrowth reduction and behavioural change.

7.28 The location of new development in corridorswith good public transport accessibility influencesbehavioural change by increasing the transport choiceavailable for individuals. Also the location of newdevelopment and facilities in areas which are close tothe surrounding population, in other words encouraginga policy of dispersal of development as opposed tocentralisation, can reduce travelling distances andhence have an impact on the rate of traffic growth. TheRegional Plan Proposed Changes notes that toachieve a reduction in the growth of car usage,

‘investment is also required to support moresustainable patterns of future development’ (para3.4.23). It is hoped that the inclusion of cross-sectorbenefits in the policy and scheme appraisal processcovered under the ‘Delivering a Sustainable TransportSystem’ consultation document referred to inparagraph 7.16 above can make decisions in this areamore transparent.

7.29 The Regional Plan Proposed Changes alsonotes that ‘The integration of transport and land usepolicies is fundamental to delivering the Government’svision for transport. In particular, the RegionalTransport Strategy (RTS) has a critical role in providinga strategic framework for Local DevelopmentDocuments (LDDs) and Local Transport Plans (LTPs).By focusing on planning policy levels to assist indeveloping more sustainable travel patterns, the RTScan steer the policies included in LDDs and LTPs andthus help deliver more appropriate locations for newdevelopments in relation to the existing and plannedfuture transport network’ (para 3.4.4).



Policy 49: Regional Heavy Rail Priorities

Policy 49

DfT Rail, Network Rail, Local Authorities,public bodies, community rail partnershipsand train operating companies should worktogether to achieve improvements in railpassenger services. This will be supportedby:

the identification and implementation ofthe regional and sub-area based heavyrail investment priorities subject to fulland detailed appraisal;support for Community Rail Routes andservices;consideration of possible new highspeed rail routes serving the Region;andimprovements in the performance andreliability of existing rail services.

Target:

Punctuality and reliability of services improvedto at least 85 per cent by 2006 and furtherimproved by 2008

Indicator:

Punctuality and reliability of services

Results:

7.30 In the first quarter of 2008/09, 89.1 per cent ofEast Midlands Trains’ services were on time, comparedwith the national figure of 92.1 per cent (Table 7.9).Figures announced in autumn 2008 show averagepunctuality slightly up at 90.9 per cent. Due to changesin operating companies, time series data is notavailable.

Table 7.9 Public PerformanceMeasure Train Operating Companies East Midlands 2008(per cent)

March-June 2008

89.1East Midlands Trains

92.1All UK companies

Source: Office of Rail Regulation

Policy Commentary

7.31 Stagecoach Ltd. was awarded the EastMidlands Trains Franchise, covering the majority ofthe former Midland Mainline and Central Trains routesin the East Midlands, in summer 2007, andcommenced operations in November 2007. The trainoperator is committed to increase the PublicPerformance Measure (PPM) to 90.3 per cent, andthis figure was exceeded in autumn 2008 (90.9 percent).

7.32 A significant recast of the timetable for localservices occurred in December 2008, one of the aimsof this exercise being to improve the reliability and

punctuality of existing services whilst creatingadditional capacity on the network to accommodatenew services and to offer faster journey times onexisting services. New services introduced includeNottingham to Leeds (2 hourly service on weekdays),Lincoln to London via Nottingham (1 outward and 1return journey per weekday), and a Sunday servicebetween Nottingham, Mansfield and Worksop. Newstations planned for 2009 include East MidlandsParkway and Corby, and new services include directtrains between Oakham, Melton Mowbray and Corbyand London.



Policy 50: Regional Priorities for Bus andLight Rail Services

Policy 50

Local Authorities, public bodies and serviceproviders should work together to increasethe level of bus and light rail patronage at theregional level towards the national target of12 per cent by 2010 through:

improving the quality and quantity of busand coach services within and betweenthe Region’s Principal Urban Areas andclosely related settlements, the GrowthTowns and Sub-Regional Centresidentified in Policy 3, and meetingidentified local needs in rural areasdeveloping locally sensitive andinnovative transport solutions wheretraditional bus services proveinappropriate;developing opportunities for new lightrail and guided bus services;improving the quality and availability oftravel information; andintegrating bus and light rail serviceswith other transport modes.

Target:

To increase the level of bus and light railpatronage at the regional level towards thenational target of 12 per cent by 2010

Indicator:

Level of bus and light rail patronage (number ofboardings)

Results:

7.33 Figure 7.4 give details on bus and light rail(tram) journeys in the East Midlands. 2007/08 saw aslight fall in bus journeys from 232 million in 2006/07to 219 million. Light rail journeys remained constantat 10 million.

Figure 7.4 Bus and light rail journeys in the East Midlands 2000/01to 2007/08(millions)

Source: DfT Regional Transport Statistics



Policy Commentary

7.34 The introduction of the national concessionaryfare scheme for the over 60s, allowing free bus travelnationwide from April 2008, may generate an increasein public transport patronage from 2008/09.

7.35 The Regional Plan Proposed Changes statesthat in order to achieve a reduction in the growth ofcar usage ‘a huge step change increase in the quantityand quality of public transport will be needed’ (para

3.4.23). AnOffice of National Statistics (ONS) OmnibusSurvey reported in a recent edition of ‘Bus & Light RailStatistics’ (DfT, 2008) asked respondents to state threemain ways in which bus services could be improved.The responses given were cheaper fares (35 per cent),more reliable and punctual buses (25 per cent), morebuses during the day (22 per cent), more buses duringthe evenings (19 per cent) and more buses atweekends (18 per cent). The 2007 National TravelSurvey shows how bus use varies by settlement type:

Table 7.10 Frequency of use of local bus services,by rural/urban areas of residence,2007

RuralSmall urbanSmall/mediumurban

Medium UrbanLarge Urban% of individuals

1416152531At least once aweek

6056534638Less than once ayear or never

Source: National Travel Survey, 2007

7.36 Paragraph 7.12 notes the challenges inachieving reductions in the rate of road traffic growththrough transfer of demand to sustainable modes oftransport. The majority of road traffic growth in the EastMidlands is occurring on rural roads in rural areas, butas the table above shows it is in these areas that levelsof transport choice offered to facilitate transfer of trafficto sustainable modes of travel are low compared tourban areas.

Policy 51: Regional Priorities forIntegrating Public Transport

Policy 51

Local Planning Authorities, Local TransportAuthorities and public transport serviceproviders should:

promote the development ofmulti-modalthrough-ticketing initiatives and theintegration of public and other transportservices supporting health, educationand social care;promote the development of a hierarchyof public transport interchange facilitiesat key locations, starting with thePrincipal Urban Areas, the GrowthTowns and Sub-Regional Centresdescribed in Policy 3;

Policy 51 cont.

promote safe and convenient access onfoot and by cycle to public transportservices;consider settlements with existing orproposed public transport interchangefacilities as locations for newdevelopment andpromote the development of new parkand ride facilities in appropriatelocations to reduce traffic congestion onroutes into the Region’s Principal UrbanAreas and along strategic transportcorridors.

Targets:

To be developed.

Indicators:

New Public Transport Interchanges DevelopedNew Park and Ride Facilities

Results:

7.37 There were no new public transportinterchanges or park & ride facilities developed in theEast Midlands in 2007/08.



Policy Commentary

7.38 The Local Transport Act 2008 allows localauthorities to review the ‘effectiveness and efficiency’of governance in their area, and then, if legislativechanges are required, prepare a scheme setting outchanges they would like to make. This is thenconsidered by the Secretary of State, who, afterconsultation with relevant bodies, canmake a statutoryorder to implement changes. Areas outside of theMetropolitan areas will be able to apply for IntegratedTransport Authority (ITA) status. Other options whichwould not require legislation include creating apartnership board, joint committee or non-profit/profitdistribution entity. All ITAs will be levying (rather thanprecepting) authorities.

7.39 Taken as a whole package the Act has thepotential to deliver a significant improvement in busprovision. The combination of a strategic authorityholding the powers to co-ordinate bus provision, withstrengthened commissioners and a larger user group,in the same piece of legislation as a power to instigateroad charging and thereby unlock funding is powerful.

7.40 The ITAs are therefore seen by someauthorities as a possible first step towards strategicsub-regional authorities which would addressdifficulties which local and regional authorities currentlyface in achieving the vision of a fully integratedtransport system.

Policy 52: Regional Trunk Road Priorities

Policy 52

The Highways Agency, working closely withregional bodies and individual TransportAuthorities and Local Planning Authoritiesshould:

work to progress the identification andimplementation of trunk road investmentpriorities subject to full and detailedappraisal;ensure that any additional trunk roadschemes are consistent with RTSObjectives (Policy 42); andensure that all highway capacity ismanaged effectively to reducecongestion and improve safety.

Targets:

A decrease in fatal or serious accidents at theregional level towards the national target of 40per cent by 2010Reduction of congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routes

Indicators:

Number of people killed or seriously injured inroad accidentsCongestion in urban areas and inter-regionalroutesInvestment in road network



Results:Table 7.11 People Killed or Seriously Injured In East Midlands, All Road Users 2006and 2007

All Road Users 2007All Road Users 2006

Killed or SeriouslyInjured

KilledKilled or SeriouslyInjured

Killed

156131567Derby

4935347242Derbyshire

3762839333Greater Nottingham

8888816Leicester

2664930253Leicestershire


3193333234NorthNottinghamshire

4615644274Northamptonshire

287214Rutland



7.41 In 2007, 2,611 people were killed or seriouslyinjured on East Midlands roads, a small increase formthe 2006 figure of 2,605. The number of people killedon East Midlands roads decreased from 329 in 2006to 326 in 2007 (Table 7.11).

7.42 For data on congestion see policy 44.

7.43 In 2007/08, 34.5km of principal A and B roadswere improved or constructed. 16.4km of these werein Northamptonshire and 8.7km in Rutland. Derbyshire,Leicestershire and North Nottinghamshire reported noinvestment in principal roads. Please see the transportsupplementary data table T.10 on the data CD fordetails of these roads.

Policy Commentary

7.44 It has been suggested that the accidentreduction target may not be an appropriate target formonitoring trunk road investment. The reduction in

accidents is mainly due to other measures such asroad safety education, vehicle design, changes inhighway alignment and layout.

7.45 During 2007/2008 the following trunk roadschemes were being implemented:

A1 Junctions - Peterborough to BlythM1 widening - Junctions 25 to 28

7.46 Further work needs to be done to demonstratethat new regional trunk road highway capacity is beingplanned and effectively managed in order to helpmaximise the aims of this policy. Work has recentlybeen carried out on the second round of RegionalFunding Allocations and DfT have announcedadditional support towards half the cost of the A46Newark to Widmerpool scheme. This will enable workon the scheme to start during 2009.



Policy 53: Regional Major HighwayPriorities

Policy 53

Local Transport Authorities, working closelywith Local Planning Authorities and nationaland regional bodies should:

work to progress the identification andimplementation of highway investmentpriorities subject to full and detailedappraisal;ensure that any additional highwayschemes are consistent with RTSObjectives (Policy 42) and the relevantSub-area Objectives (Policy 43); andensure that all highway capacity ismanaged effectively to reducecongestion and improve safety.

Targets:

Reduction of congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routesA decrease in fatal or serious accidents at theregional level towards the national target of 40per cent by 2010

Indicators:

Congestion in urban areas and inter-regionalroutesNumber of people killed or seriously injured inroad accidentsPrincipal roads in LTP authority control wheremaintenance should be consideredNon-principal classified roads in LTP authoritycontrol wheremaintenance should be consideredInvestment in road network

Results:

7.47 For data on congestion please see Policy 44,for data on accidents and road investment please seePolicy 52.

Figure 7.5 Roads where maintenance should be considered 2007/08 (per cent)




7.48 Figure 7.5 gives information on the new nationalindicator NI 168 on roads where maintenance shouldbe considered. The proportion of principal road wheremaintenance should be considered varied from 1 percent in Rutland to 8 per cent in Nottingham andLeicester cities. For non-principal B and C roads,figures varied from 3 per cent in Leicestershire to 12per cent in Derbyshire.

Policy Commentary

7.49 See commentary on Policies 52 and 44.

Policy 54: Implementation of the RegionalFreight Strategy

Policy 54

TheRegional PlanningBody shouldworkwithemda, Transport Authorities, other publicbodies and representatives of the freightindustry to implement the Regional FreightStrategy . Key priorities include:

reducing the environmental impact of allfreight;improving the efficiency of the roadhaulage industry in ways that will alsoreduce the impact on the environment;expanding the usage of inlandwaterways and coastal navigation;achieving a significant modal shift fromroad to rail;

Policy 54 cont.

supporting the sustainable growth ofairfreight at EMA by improving railfreight connectivity and identifyingopportunities for model shift from air torail;identifying new strategic distributionsites, where these can be justified, inline with Policy 21 (StrategicDistribution);promoting a greater use of pipelines;andensuring integration with land-useplanning, environmental and economicstrategies.

Targets:

Targets set out in Regional Freight Strategy (July2005)

Indicators:

Freight transported by roadFreight lifted at East Midlands Airport

Results:

Table 7.12 Freight transport by road - Goods lifted by origin of goods –East Midlands1993 to 2007 (million tonnes)

200720062005200420031993Origin

203196180172158163East Midlands

Source: Continuing Survey of Road Goods Transport Regional Transport Statistics (2007)

7.50 Although this policy area is subject to separatemonitoring arrangements some information has beenobtained. Figure 7.6 shows that the amount of freightlifted at East Midlands’ airports has been steadily

increasing from 1993 and that in 2007, 275 milliontonnes of freight was lifted. Freight transported by roadalso saw a significant increase between 2006 and2007 (table 7.12).



Figure 7.6 Freight lifted at East Midlands airports: 1993-2007(thousand tonnes)

Source: Civil Aviation AuthorityFigures include some double counting because domestic traffic is counted at airport on arrival and departure and exclude mail andpassengers' luggage

Policy Commentary

7.51 Comments relating to this policy area inprevious annual monitoring reports still apply. Theability of the Regional Freight Strategy to influencecritical decisions about mode share and freightmovement does rely on the actions of the Assembly’spartner organisations, particularly Government, whichis now responsible for determining future rail policyand investment in the rail system. In relation to railfreight, preparation work is continuing for improvingthe rail gauge between Peterborough and Nuneaton;£80 million has been made available from theTransport Innovation Fund (TIF),which will helpencourage the future transfer of freight to rail.

7.52 emda have recently carried out a River TrentWater Freight Feasibility Study which identified thepotential for increasing freight traffic on the River Trent.

Policy 55: Regional Priorities for AirTransport

Policy 55

In the Three Cities Sub-area, LocalDevelopment Frameworks and LocalTransport Plans should:

provide for the further operationalexpansion of EMA within its boundariesand access improvements subject torigorous assessment of the full range ofimpacts;consider the surface access needs ofEMA as part of the wider transportstrategy for the area, paying particularregard to the role of public transport,walking and cycling;



Policy 55 cont.

assess the measures necessary toincrease the share of trips to EMAmadeby public transport in accordance withagreed targets;ensure that transport proposals arecompatible with the need to createeffective public transport links to EMAfor the long-term;identify and safeguard land forimproving access to EMA, particularlyby non-car modes, and including a fixedrail link to support expansion in thelong-term;give particular encouragement to thetransfer of freight traffic generated byEMA from road to rail;seek to ensure that travel plans arebrought forward for new development atEMA;and have regard to the EMAMasterplan.

Target:

Increase in passengers accessing East MidlandsAirport by public transport

Indicator:

Percentage of passengers accessing EastMidlands Airport by public transport

Results:

Figure 7.7 Air transport movements (aircraft landing or take-offs)at East Midlands airports 1993 to 2007 (thousands)

Source: Civil Aviation AuthorityFigures include some double counting because domestic traffic is counted at airport on arrival and departure



Table 7.13 Terminal passengers (arrivals or departures) at GB airports – East Midlands1993 to 2007 (millions)

200720062005200420032002200120001993Region

5.44.74.24.44.33.22.42.21.4East Midlands

Source: Civil Aviation AuthorityFigures include some double counting because domestic traffic is counted at airport on arrival and departure.

7.53 Figure 7.7, along with table 7.13 giveinformation on air travel in the East Midlands. EastMidlands Airport is a major UK airport, with 61,500aircraft movements and over a quarter of a milliontonnes of freight lifted in 2007 (see previous policy).Passenger numbers increased by 15 per cent with 5.4million terminal passengers in 2007, compared with4.7 million in 2006.

7.54 Information released by East Midlands Airportshows that passenger numbers grew by 36 per centon all East Midlands Airport Skylink bus services.

1,091,891 passengers used Skylink to East MidlandsAirport between April 2007 andMarch 2008, comparedwith 805,106 in 2006/07. Skylink services currentlyoperate day and night, 7 days a week to Nottingham,Leicester, Derby and Loughborough.

Policy Commentary

7.55 The opening of the new East Midlands Parkwaystation in January 2009 should lead to an increase inthe total number of passengers accessing EastMidlands Airport by public transport.



Chapter 8 Sub-Areas

ActionsKey Points

Urban areas

The Assembly will work with the PUA and SRCauthorities to identify spatial boundaries to assist inthe monitoring of Policy 3.




As elsewhere there has been a marked reduction innew housing starts and completions in the Sub-areaas a result of the credit crunch.


The Northern Sub-Region Employment Land Studywill help emda , local authorities and the SSP respondto the economic downturn by ensuring the right landis available to meet the needs of local business andthose wishing to invest in the area.

Although the Sub-area showed modest signs ofimproved economic performance prior to the creditcrunch, the economy remains vulnerable during theeconomic downturn.

Eastern Sub Regional Strategy

The Assembly in conjunction with Lincolnshire CountyCouncil will undertake to review all indicators for theSub-area during 2009.

Many of the indicators e.g. for Policy 4 do not give acomplete picture of development in the Sub-area.

Lincoln Policy Area

A definition of ‘central Lincoln’ has been agreed andboundary map provided to the Assembly to assistmonitoring in the Policy Area. It is also hoped to agreethe definition of the Lincoln PUA before the 2008/09monitoring round.


A Sub-Regional Housing Strategy for Lincolnshire willlook at the reasons for the low level of affordablehousing developed and how it might be increased tomeet the HMA target.

The development of affordable housing in the centralLincolnshire HMA is well below the regional average.

The Assembly in conjunction with Lincolnshire CountyCouncil will undertake to review all indicators for thePolicy Area during 2009.

Many of the indicators e.g. for Policies LPA SRS 6and LPA SRS 11 do not give a complete picture ofprogress in the Sub-area.


Chapter 8 . Sub-Areas

ActionsKey Points

Peak Sub-area

The Assembly will work with the Peak District NationalPark Authority and district councils to clarify the ‘outof Peak’ boundary to assist in the monitoring of Policy9.


Introduction

8.1 This chapter monitors the East Midlands Sub-Regional Strategies in the Secretary of State's ProposedChanges and additional Sub-area Policies and is split into a number of discrete sections. The first section (8a),deals with issues that relate to broad sub regional policies. The rest of the chapter covers issues relating toeach sub-regional planning area. Section 8b covers the 3 Cities Sub-area; section 8c the Northern Sub-area;section 8d the Eastern Sub-area; section 8e the Lincoln Policy area and section 8f the Peak Sub-area. TheSouthern Sub-area (Policy 11 and MKSM SRS Policy 1) is covered by the separate Milton Keynes and SouthMidlands Sub-Regional Spatial Strategy (MKSM) monitoring process.

Data Issues

8.2 In some cases the precise geographic sub-regional area to be covered has not been defined. In othercases where the geography is defined, there are issues over the availability of data to precisely match thoseareas. There are also some indicators where recent data is sparse.

8.3 Many of the data issues that have emerged in the sections dealing with Housing, Economy, Environment,Minerals and Waste and Transport are common to the material presented in this section.


Chapter 8 . Sub-Areas

Chapter 8 a East MidlandsGeneral Sub-areaPolicies and Indicators

SourcesProgressStatusTargetsCore/ContextualKey IndicatorsPolicy TitlePolicyNo.

-Geographicdefinitions beingdeveloped


RSS CorePercentage ofnew houses,employment

ConcentratingDevelopmentin UrbanAreas

3

land andfloorspacedevelopedwithin andoutside PrincipalUrban Areas(PUAs)

--Covered byseparate MKSMAMR

RSS CorePercentage ofnewdevelopment inNorthantsgrowth towns

-Geographicdefinitions beingdeveloped

RSS CorePercentage ofnew houses,employmentland andfloorspacedevelopedwithin andoutsideSub-RegionalCentres


Chapter 8 a . East Midlands General Sub-area

Policy 3 Concentrating Development inUrban Areas

Policy 3

Development and economic activity shouldbe distributed on the following basis:

a) new development will be concentratedprimarily in and adjacent to the Region’s fivePrincipal Urban Areas (PUAs), the five PUAsare the built up areas centred on Derby,Leicester, Lincoln, Northampton andNottingham;

b) significant levels of new developmentshould also be located in the three growthtowns of Corby, Kettering andWellingborough;

c) appropriate development of a lesser scaleshould be located in the Sub-Regional Centres(SRCs):

Eastern Sub-area: Boston,GranthamandSpalding;Northern Sub-area: Chesterfield,Mansfield-Ashfield, Newark andWorksop;Southern Sub-area: Daventry;Three Cities Sub-area: Coalville,Hinckley, Hucknall, Ilkeston,Loughborough, Market Harborough,Melton Mowbray and Swadlincote;

d) t he development needs of othersettlements and rural areas should also beprovided for. New development in these areasshould contribute to:

maintaining the distinctive character andvitality of rural communities;

Policy 3 cont.

respecting the quality of tranquillity,where that is recognised in planningdocuments;strengthening rural enterprise andlinkages between settlements and theirhinterlands; andshortening journeys and facilitatingaccess to jobs and services.

In assessing the suitability of sites fordevelopment priority should be given tomaking best use of previously developed landand vacant and under-used buildings,contributing to the achievement of a regionaltarget of 60 per cent of additional dwellingson previously developed land or throughconversions.

In applying this policy the influence of majorurban areas outside the Region should alsobe taken into consideration, particularly thosefulfilling the role of PUAs for parts of the EastMidlands, i.e. Peterborough, South Yorkshireand Greater Manchester, where policies inregional strategies for neighbouring regionswill be relevant.

Indicators:

per cent of new houses, employment land andfloorspace developed within and outside PUAsper cent of new development in Northants growthtownsper cent of new houses, employment land andfloorspace developed within and outsideSub-Regional Centres

Results:

8a.1 Work needs to be done on geographicaldefinitions.

Policy Commentary

8a.2 The Regional Assembly’s Monitoring & ReviewAdvisory Group will be continuing to refine a numberof Regional Plan spatial definitions during 2009. Thisshould help improve the monitoring of policies limitedby the lack of clear geographic boundaries, includingpolicy 3.

8a.3 The Assembly has approached the five PUAauthorities and has received boundaries files for Derby,Nottingham and Leicester cities, which will be enteredinto EMRAcdpvision to better enable site level



(employment) monitoring for policy 3. It is hoped thatthe remaining two PUAs in the region (Lincoln andNorthampton) will shortly be in a position to confirmtheir PUA boundaries.

8a.4 There are some sixteen sub-regional centres(SRCs) in the East Midlands as well as three growthtowns (Corby, Kettering and Wellingborough). Not all

have precise boundaries defined. The Assembly willshortly be approaching each of the authorities with asub-regional centre or a growth town to ascertain whichhave agreed boundaries and will work with theremainder to try agree the rest before 2009/10.



Chapter 8 b 3 Cities Sub-area8b.1 The 3 Cities Sub-area includes the Hucknall part of Ashfield district. In previous years it has not beenpossible to separate data collected for Ashfield district. As of the 2007/08 monitoring round, all housing datacollected through cdpVision is now split into Hucknall and the ‘rest of Ashfield’. This enables housing data forHucknall to be included in the 3 cities statistics.

8b.2 Using site coordinates provided by Ashfield, employment land data has also been split into Hucknalland ‘the rest of Ashfield’. Unfortunately it is not possible to split any of the secondary data sources in thismanner. Outside of this chapter Ashfield district is not split.




LocalAuthorities

Strongpre-creditcrunch level ofhousingdevelopment

Job creation,new retailfloorspaceand use ofpublic

Regional CoreNumber of newhouses built inPolicy Area

Developmentin the 3CitiesSub-area

12

transport all ABIIncrease innumber of jobsfrom previousyear

ContextualPer cent changein jobs in PolicyArea

greater thanregionalaverage

NeighbourhoodStatistics/LocalAuthorities

New retaildevelopment inDerby citycentre opened

Regional CorePer centincrease in retailfloorspace inCity Centre

anddevelopmentunderway inLeicester

DfT PublicTransportStatistics

Limited data butgrowth inNottinghamTram

RSS CoreIncreaseprovision anduse of publictransport inPolicy Area

NOMISSmall reductionin benefitclaimants fromprevious year

ContextualBenefit ClaimantCount

--Indicators to bedeveloped


RSS CoreTo bedeveloped

Sub-area (3Cities)transportobjectives

43

-----NoneDefinition ofPrincipalUrban Areas

3CitiesSRS1


Chapter 8 b . 3 Cities Sub-area



----RSS CoreBoundariesrevised as partof LDF process

SubRegionalPriorities forGreen BeltAreas

3CitiesSRS2

LocalAuthorities

Some increasein housingdevelopment

New targetsin ProposedChanges

Regional CoreHousingtrajectories atHMA level

HousingProvision

3CitiesSRS3 required in parts

of sub-area tomeet target

LocalAuthorities

Newemploymentland allocationsrequired in partsof sub-area

To meetlocal needsas set out inLDFs

Regional CorePer cent ofcompleted retail,office andleisuredevelopment intown centres

EmploymentLand

3CitiesSRS4

-SeeEconomysection

--RSS CoreLevel of servicefrom broadbandinfrastructure

emda 2006eAdoptionSurvey

New data notavailable

20 per centofbusinessestradingonline by2010

RSS CoreTake up anduse ofbroadbandservices

-Work is ongoingAs Keyindicators

RSS CoreEstablishment ofCharnwoodForest RegionalPark

GreenInfrastructure& theNationalForest

3CitiesSRS5

-Work is ongoingRSS CoreEstablishment ofTrent River Park



Figure 8b(i) 3 Cities Map



Policy 12: Development in the 3 CitiesSub-area

Policy 12

Development should support the continuedgrowth and regeneration of Derby, Leicesterand Nottingham, andmaintain and strengthenthe economic, commercial and cultural rolesof all three cities in accordance with thepolicies and proposals in Part 2 of theRegional Plan. This will be achieved byensuring that the agreed Growth PointProgramme of Delivery for the 3 Cities and 3Counties is achieved both in overall numbersof dwellings and in the agreed phasing ofdevelopment and that provision is made for:

a mix of housing types;a balance in the provision of jobs andhomes within urban areas to reduce theneed to travel;employment land to meet the needs ofindigenous manufacturing anddistribution uses and to encourage newinvestment;regeneration of deprived inner urbanareas and outer estates;enhancement of transport links andpublic transport accessibility bothwithinand between the cities, to reduce caruse, especially commuting;

Policy 12 cont.

retailing, office, residential,entertainment and service uses withincentral areas, to provide for a mix ofuses to support the vitality and viabilityof the city centres; andthe protection, development andenhancement of green infrastructure toaddress past environmental degradationand contribute to the development ofsustainable communities.

(see RSSProposedChanges for the full Policywording.)

Target:

Job creation, new retail floorspace and use ofpublic transport all greater than national average

Indicators:

Benefit claimant countNumber of new houses built in Policy AreaIncrease provision and use of public transport inPolicy AreaPer cent change in jobs in Policy AreaPer cent increase in retail floorspace in CityCentres

Results:

Table 8b(i) New Housing Developed Additional dwellings* 2006/07 and 2007/08 (newbuild, conversion and change of use)

2007/082006/07

2,6542,1343 Cities Derby

4,0264,2533 Cities Leicester

3,4013,0343 Cities Nottingham

10,0819,4213 Cities

Source: Local Authorities*figures shown are gross completions (excludes losses through demolitions, conversions and changes of use)Hucknall included in 3 cities data for 2007/08 only

8b.3 In 2007/08 there were 10,081 new dwellingsin the 3 Cities area. This is an increase on the 2006/07figure of 9,421, which follows the trend of a year on

year increase. There were 2,654 completions in the 3Cities Derby area, 4,026 in 3 Cities Leicester and 3,401in 3 Cities Nottingham (Table 8b(i)).



Figure 8b(ii) Proportion of Working Age Population Claiming anyBenefit February 2008 (per cent)

Source: NOMIS

8b.4 The proportion of population claiming a benefit,figure 8b(ii), is the same in the 3 Cities Sub-area asthe East Midlands as a whole (13 per cent in February

2008). Within the sub-area the claimant rate rangesfrom 6.5 per cent in Harborough up to 18.6 per centin Nottingham and 18.7 per cent in Leicester.

Table 8b(ii) Nottingham Tram 2006/07 to 2007/08

Passenger Kilometres (million)Number of Boardings (million)

4310.12006/07

4410.22007/08

Source: DfT Public Transport Statistics

8b.5 Public transport statistics are not available atthis geography. The Transport chapter has informationon public transport at regional level. According to DftPublic Transport Statistics, table 8b(ii) in 2007/08 the

Nottingham tram had 10.2 million boardings and 44million passenger kilometres, compared with 10.1million passenger boardings and 43million passengerkilometres in 2006/07.



Table 8b(iii) Number of jobs 2006 to 2007

Percentage Change 2006to 2007

20072006

5.2205,300195,100Derby HMA

1.5433,800427,200Leicestershire HMA

2.5335,400327,300Nottingham Core HMA

2.6974,500949,6003 Cities Sub-area (exc. Hucknall)

3.31,897,0001,837,100East Midlands

Source: Annual Business InquiryFigures are rounded to the nearest 100Data prior to 2006 are not comparable

8b.6 According to the Annual Business Inquiry (ABI)data presented in table 8b(iii), the 3 Cities Sub-areahas seen an increase of 2.6 per cent in the number ofjobs between 2006 and 2007. The largest percentage

increase was in the Derby HMA of 5.2 per centbetween 2006 and 2007. In the East Midlands as awhole, the increase in the number of jobs was 3.3 percent between 2006 and 2007.

Table 8b(iv) Retail Floorspace Local Authority Area 2001 to 2007 (thousand sqm)

Percentage Change 2001 to2007

20072001

-10.2495551Derby

2.3708692Leicester

5.1781743Nottingham

-0.33,7203,732Three Cities Sub-area

Source: Neighbourhood Statistics

8b.7 According to Neighbourhood Statistics, in 2007the total retail floorspace in Nottingham, Derby andLeicester cities was 3,720 square metres (sqm). Thisfigure has remained relatively constant since 2001.

Derby saw a decline in retail floorspace of 10.2 percent between 2001 and 2007, whilst Nottingham sawan increase of 5.1 per cent, with a smaller increase inLeicester of 2.3 per cent (Table 8b(iv).

Table 8b(v) Completed Floorspace 2007/08 (sqm)

Percentage in a CentralLocation

TotalCentral Location*

79.479,78063,348Three Cities Sub-area


* Includes city centre, town centre, local centre and edge of centre

8b.8 Local authorities returned information on 79,780sqm of retail development in 2007/08. 63,348 sqm(79.4 per cent) of this was in central locations (Table8b(v)).

Policy Commentary

8b.9 3 Cities Nottingham experienced an increasein dwellings and public transport use at a greater ratethan the sub-area as a whole in 2007/08. It also



experienced a decline in benefit claimants and anincrease in retail floorspace at a greater rate than the3 Cities overall.

8b.10 Work is currently underway to implement theGrowth Point Programme and align the Core Strategiesof the authorities across 3 Cities Nottingham.

8b.11 In Leicester there has been a markedreduction in housing completions during 2007/08 asthe effects of the ‘credit crunch’ have slowed downboth new housing starts and completions; city centreapartment developments have been most affected bythe housing market downturn.

8b.12 Although no new retail floorspace above thethreshold was recorded for Leicester during 2007/08it should be noted that a number of majordevelopments were under construction in the cityduring the reporting year. This includes a major citycentre mixed use scheme and two new conveniencegoods stores. The most significant is theHammerson/Hermes’ £350million Highcross Leicesterproject which has more than doubled the size of theformer Shires Shopping Centre (Highcross opened inSeptember 2008 and comprises a John Lewis store,a wide range of leading shops, restaurants, a multiscreen cinema and 120 apartments). HighcrossLeicester has created 2,500 new jobs in the servicesector; other job growth has been in construction jobsassociated with the regeneration activity in the City.

8b.13 The 2007/08 net additional dwellingsdeveloped in the Derby Housing Market Area (HMA)is 38% above the draft Regional Plan annualised2001-2026 housing provision target of 1,790. Takinginto account completions from 2001, the annualresidual requirement is 1,778 indicating that supplyover the period is a little above the average target.Outstanding planning permissions and allocationsprovide a further 12,615 dwellings and additionaldwellings have been identified through a PUAStrategicHousing Land Availability Study. Core Strategies andsite allocations documents will identify further sites toensure a continuing supply in the longer term.

8b.14 The opening of theWestfield Shopping Centrein Derby City Centre in October 2007 added 43,770sqm of quality retail floorspace. This contributedtowards the growth in Derby’s rental levels by 12.5%in the period May 07 – May 08, considerably abovethe 1.1% national average growth rate.

Policy 43 Sub Regional TransportObjectives: 3 Cities

Policy 43

T1 To reduce the use of the car in and aroundNottingham, Derby and Leicester and promotea step change increase in the quality andquantity of local public transport provision,and facilities to encourage walking andcycling.

T2 To improve public transport servicesbetweenDerby, Leicester andNottinghamandto London, the rest of the East Midlands, andother key national cities such as Birmingham,Leeds, Manchester and Sheffield.

T3 To develop the sustainable transportinfrastructure and services needed to improveaccess to jobs and services from deprivedinner urban areas and outer estates, and alsoto identified Regeneration Zones.

T4 To improve public transport surface accessto East Midlands Airport.

T5 To develop opportunities for modal switchaway from road based transport in themanufacturing, retail and freight distributionsectors.

T6 To reduce congestion and improve safetyalong the M1 corridor and the highwaynetwork generally.


Under development

Policy Commentary

8b.15 In Nottingham improvements to publictransport infrastructure and provision across theconurbation has seen a 10% increase in both bus andtram use since 2003, with 75.1 million passengerjourneys made in 2007/08. The first phaseimplementation of the primary pedestrian routes in thecity centre also took place along key pedestrian linesaimed at linking the city centre with the surroundinginner city communities. Continued Big Trackinvestment and improvements to cycling facilities alongstrategic corridors have resulted in creating safer andmore pleasant environments for cyclists.



8b.16 Improvements to East Midlands Trainsservices are to be delivered through the £55millionfunding approved by the ORR and Network Rail toprovide track upgrades along the Midland Mainline. Afurther £10million ORR funding was secured toupgrade signalling and track layout in the NottinghamStation area.

8b.17 Significant investment to Nottingham’s Linkbusnetwork has seen 13 new Linkbus services introducedsince April 2006. Over 5 million passengers use theservices annually, improving access to employment,learning, health and other essential services. The CityCouncil in partnership with Nottingham City Transportsuccessfully launched an operational trial for anethanol-powered ‘Ecolink’ bus service aimed atreducing emissions and testing whether the projectwas suitable for expansion into other areas. The trialis set to run until Autumn 2009.

8b.18 Works for the new East Midlands ParkwayStation are under construction with opening due forearly 2009. The Nottingham Skylink service is nowcarrying approximately 550,000 passengers annually– 66% above its annual passenger target.

8b.19 Works to widen 23km of the M1 betweenJunctions 25-28 commenced in January 2008 with aplanned completion for Autumn 2010. Consultation onthe remaining M1 sections in the sub-area is dueduring 2009. Progress of other regional HighwaysAgency and local authority major schemes is currentlysubject to the Regional Funding Allocation process.

8b.20 Achievements in Derby include the deliveryof an integrated transport scheme programme and themajor Inner Ring Road Integrated MaintenanceScheme. Progress has also been made on theConnecting Derby project to complete the City’s InnerRing Road by 2011. In the wider Derby HMA, keyissues include the constraints imposed by trafficcongestion on market towns and the continuing needto reduce casualties from road traffic collisions, whereprogress on rural roads has not kept pace with urbanareas. The rural nature of much of the area, particularlyin the west of both Amber Valley and South Derbyshiremean that access to essential services by walking,cycling or public transport can take significantly longerthan would be desirable. Access to employment withinDerby, Nottingham, Burton, the market towns andout-of-town locations such as the Dove Valley businesspriorities, are all identified as priorities, as are accessto Derby City hospitals and to education and trainingfacilities. Linking to the public transport element ofimproving accessibility are Bus Quality Partnershipson Burton-Swadlincote and Ripley-Nottinghamcorridors. The role of cycling is reflected in furtherdevelopments to the Greenway network including theGreat Northern Greenway.

Policy 3 Cities SRS 2 Sub RegionalPriorities for Green Belt Areas

Policy 3 Cities SRS 2

The principle of the Nottingham-Derby andBurton-Swadlincote Green Belts will beretained. However a comprehensive reviewof the most sustainable locations for growthwithin the Nottingham Core Housing MarketArea and Hucknall will be required urgentlyto consider how to accommodate futuregrowth requirements over at least the next 25years. As this may include consideringlocations within the Green Belt, whenimplementing this review through their LocalDevelopment Documents, local planningauthorities will have regard to:

the level of growth proposed in RegionalPlan Policy 13 and in 3 Cities SRS Policy3 identifying the locations for futuredevelopment;sustainable development principles;the principles and purposes of includingland in Green Belt set out in PPG2; andwhere changes to the Green Belt areproposed, the retention of existing, orcreation of new, defensible boundariesbased on natural features or otherbarriers such as major roads.

This reviewwill need to be done as part of theevidence base underpinning the next RSSreview.

Targets:

None

Indicators:

Boundaries revised as part of LDF process

Results and Policy Commentary

8b.21 The boundaries of the existing Green Belt inthe 3 Cities sub-area are shown on the map at thestart of this sub-section. Pennbury and 3 possible sitesin Rushcliffe - Newton/Bingham, Kingston andCotgrave Place - are shortlisted as potential eco-townsites, with housing being build on green-belt land. Afinal decision on which sites are taken forward isexpected in Spring 2009.



Policy 3 Cities SRS 3 Housing Provision


Within the context set by Regional Plan Policy13, provision for new housing will be made atthe following levels over 2001-2026:

DERBY HMA TOTAL:

44,750 dwellings, of which 24,760 should bewithin or adjoining the Derby PUA; mainly atAlfreton, Belper, Heanor and Ripley andincluding sustainable urban extensions asnecessary.

LEICESTER AND LEICESTERSHIRE HMATOTAL:

97,000 dwellings, of which 45,570 should bewithin or adjoining the Leicester PUA.

NOTTINGHAM CORE HMA AND HUCKNALLTOTAL:

74,050 dwellings, of which 54,720 should bewithin or adjoining the Nottingham PUA.

Targets:

As above

Indicator:

Housing trajectories at HMA level

Results:

8b.22 Table 8b(vi) gives details for net housingcompletions in Derby, Leicestershire and NottinghamCore HMAs. The targets given are from the RSSProposed Changes. A proposed annual completionrate has been given averaging the housing targetsover the whole 25 year period. The average completionrate over 2001 to 2008 in Nottingham Core andLeicestershire HMAs has been below this figure.Completions in Derby HMA have been slightly abovethis target, mainly due to increases during 2006/07and 2007/08.

8b.23 Table 8b(vii) gives details of future housingsupply via either planning permissions or allocationsin LDDs. In total the three HMAs in the sub-area willrequire an additional 94 thousand dwellings on top ofcurrent provision in order to meet the 2026 target.

Table 8b(vi) Housing Completions 2001-2008

ProposedAnnual AverageCompletionRate2001 to 2026

AverageAnnual


2008

NetCompletions2007/08

NetCompletions

2001-07

1,7901,8082,46110,193Derby HMA

3,8803,4393,80920,263Leicester & Leicestershire HMA

2,8202,2842,97013,021Nottingham Core HMA*

21,10918,96520,622112,130East Midlands

Source: Local AuthoritiesNOTE: Completion figures are net.*Excludes Hucknall



Table 8b(vii) Housing Provision and Supply, as of March 31 st 2008

AdditionalProvisionRequired toMeet Target

RequiredProvision 2001

to 2026

New dwellingsallocated in

local plans andLDDs

New dwellingswith

outstandingplanning

permission

Total Provision2001 to 2008

19,48144,7503,9708,64512,654Derby HMA

39,25297,00012,93120,74524,072Leicester & LeicsHMA

35,37770,5008,78510,34715,991NottinghamCoreHMA*

247,525527,72552,01995,429132,752East Midlands

Source: Local Authorities*Excludes Hucknall

Policy Commentary

8b.24 3 Cities Nottingham has experienced anincrease in dwellings at a greater rate than the 3 Citiesarea as a whole and in 2007/08 net completionsexceeded the RSS requirement.

8b.25 Work is currently underway to implement theGrowth Point Programme and align the Core Strategiesof the authorities across 3 Cities Nottingham.

8b.26 In Leicester there has been a markedreduction in housing completions during 2007/08 asthe effects of the ‘credit crunch’ have slowed downboth new housing starts and completions; city centreapartment developments have been most affected bythe housing market downturn. The local authoritieswithin the Leicester and Leicestershire HMA areworking closely with key stakeholders through the NewGrowth Point Partnership Programme to ensure thatfunding is focussed on increased housing delivery.

8b.27 In the Derby HMA, housing growth has beensupported by economic performance and job creation.However the housing completions and job creationfigures noted above predate the full impact of the creditcrunch and associated economic downturn. Housingcompletion forecasts for 2009/10 have been revisedsharply downwards. However, the local economy isrelatively well positioned for growth in themedium/longer term.

Policy 3 Cities SRS 4 Employment Land


In reviewing employment land allocations inthe Sub-area, Local Planning Authoritiesshould additionally have regard to RegionalPlan Policy 20 and a number of factorsincluding:

the housing distribution set out in Policy3 Cities SRS 3, in particular thesustainable urban extensions;s upporting the regeneration of the citycentres, including large scale officedevelopments, leisure and retail;t he need to provide for the regenerationof deprived communities;t he needs of high technology sectors,and to support Science City proposals;t he need to serve the airport relateddevelopment requirements of EastMidlands Airport;t he need to promote local employmentopportunities that will reduce outcommuting; ando pportunities to address the greeninfrastructure deficit in the sub-area.

Targets:

To meet local needs as set out in LDFs20 per cent of businesses trading online by 2010

Indicators:

Percentage of completed retail, office and leisuredevelopment in town centres



Level of service from broadband infrastructureTake up and use of broadband services

Results:

8b.28 There were three authorities with leisurecompletions recorded in the 3 Cities area in 2007/08.One D2 development in an out of centre location inAmber Valley of 4,375 sqm, three city centre sites inDerby totalling 8,400 sqm and in Nottingham there

was a 5,140sqm casino in the City Centre and 430sqmsui generis leisure out of centre. For information onretail completions, see policy 12.

8b.29 Residential broadband data is not availableat this geography. However the economy chaptershows that the vast majority of the East Midlands hasaccess to broadband, with 99.9 per cent having accessin 2005 (see economy chapter). The emda e-adoptionsurvey, table 8b(viii), shows that in 2006, over half ofbusinesses in Derbyshire, Leicestershire andNottinghamshire had broadband.

Table 8b(viii) Business Broadband Use 2006 (per cent)

Percentage of those with broadbandrequiring faster broadband speed in

future

Percentage of all businesses withbroadband

1752Derbyshire

1952Leicestershire

1654Nottinghamshire

Source: emda 2006 eAdoption Survey

Policy Commentary

8b.30 3Cities Nottingham has beenmore successfulthan the 3 Cities sub-area as a whole at implementingretail policy – it has experienced an increase in retailfloorspace whilst the sub-area has experienced anoverall decline.

8b.31 Although nomajor leisure developments wererecorded in Leicester it should be noted that Leicester’snew performing arts centre ‘Curve’ was nearingcompletion during the reporting year (it opened inNovember 2008) and a new Digital Media Centre iscurrently under construction and due to open in 2009.

8b.32 A recent Derby HMA employment land studybroadly concluded that, whilst there is a surplus ofemployment land in the HMA based on past take-uprates, new allocations will still be needed to providegood quality sites and premises for modern, growingbusinesses. Current major proposals such asCinderhill, Chellaston Business Park and Woodville,Swadlincote should continue to be progressed.Alternative uses should be considered for poorerquality sites.

Policy 3 Cities SRS 5 Green Infrastructure& the National Forest


In consideringmajor development proposals,especially those associated with the NewGrowth Point proposals, Local Authoritiesand implementing agencies will coordinatethe provision of enhanced and new greeninfrastructure.

Priorities include:-

The National ForestProposed Charnwood Forest RegionalParkProposed Trent River ParkTrent River ParkGreen Wedges; andCommunity forest proposals and‘greenways’ around Leicester

In the National Forest, Local Authoritiesshould work with other agencies acrossregional boundaries to promote thedevelopment of the National Forest in waysthat generate environmental, economic andsocial benefits of both local and nationalsignificance (see RSS Proposed Changes forthe full Policy wording).



Targets:

Establishment of Charnwood Forest RegionalParkEstablishment of Trent River Park

Indicators:

Establishment of Charnwood Forest RegionalParkEstablishment of Trent River Park

Results:

8b.33 The area under investigation for theCharnwood Forest Regional Park is shown on themapat the start of the sub-section. There is currently noformal designation of a Charnwood Forest RegionalPark. Existing planning policies for the CharnwoodForest seek to safeguard the area’s unique landscape

character and the area has been defined on the basisof an assessment of landscape character. Thedevelopment of the Trent River Park is still at an earlyplanning stage.

Policy Commentary

8b.34 A Green Infrastructure (GI) Study has beencommissioned for the 3 Cities Sub-area. This willprovide a basis for a green infrastructure delivery plan,based on a character assessment of existing assets.

8b.35 In the Derby HMA local policies define andprotect a number of the major elements of the GreenInfrastructure network, including Green Wedges andGreen Belt, main areas of public open space, river andwildlife corridors and areas of particular biodiversityvalue. There are several proposals to develop newand improved parks, which require additional fundingto be delivered.



Chapter 8 c NorthernSub-Regional Strategy8c.1 The Northern sub-area is comprised of the NottinghamOuter and Northern HMAs, excluding the 4 wardsof Hucknall in Ashfield. In previous years it has not been possible to separate data collected for Ashfield district.As of the 2007/08 monitoring round, all housing data collected through cdpVision is now split into Hucknall andthe ‘rest of Ashfield’. This enables housing data for the area of Ashfield excluding Hucknall to be included inthe Northern sub-region.

8c.2 Using site coordinates provided by Ashfield, employment land data has also been split into Hucknalland ‘the rest of Ashfield’. Unfortunately it is not possible to split any of the secondary data sources in thismanner. Ashfield is only split in the sub-area chapters, elsewhere in the document it is not split.




NOMISLittle changebetween 2006and 2007

Higher rateof increasethan regionalaverage

ContextualPercentagechange ineconomicactivity andemploymentrates

Regenerationof theNorthernSub-area

7

NOMISRecoverycontinuing

-ContextualBenefit ClaimantCount

--Targets to bedeveloped

--Sub-area(Northern)TransportObjectives

43

---AllAllAllSub-RegionalDevelopmentPriorities

North.SRS 1

LocalAuthorities

Significant out oftown retaildevelopment

Nosignificantdevelopment

Regional CorePercentage ofcompleted retail,office and

Supportingthe roles ofTown andVillageCentres

North.SRS 2

outsideappropriatecentres listedin policy

leisuredevelopment intown centres bylocal authorityarea

--See policy 7Higher rateof increasethan regionalaverage

ContextualPercentagechange ineconomicactivity andemploymentrates

Sub-RegionalEmploymentRegenerationPriorities

North.SRS 3


Chapter 8 c . Northern Sub-Regional Strategy



LocalAuthorities

GreenInfrastructureStrategies beingprepared


RSS CoreMeasurementsof Greeninfrastructurefrom EMRAbaseline

EnhancingGreenInfrastructureThroughDevelopment

North.SRS 4

LocalAuthorities

£10minvestment invisitor centre

As Keyindicators

RSS CoreFeasibility study,proposal andestablishment ofRegional Park

SherwoodForestRegionalPark

North.SRS 5

LocalAuthorities

Discussionsongoing

Policy forNatura 2000site (ifrecognised)

RSS CoreProtection policyestablished forNatura 2000 site

Figure 8c(i) Northern Sub-area



Policy 7 Regeneration of the NorthernSub-area

Policy 7

The economic, social and environmentalregeneration of the Northern Sub-area will bea regional priority. This should be achievedby:

ensuring that the agreed Growth PointProgramme of Delivery at Newark isachieved both in overall numbers ofdwellings and in the agreed phasing ofdevelopment;significantly strengthening theSub-Regional Centres ofMansfield-Ashfield, Chesterfield, andWorksop by providing new jobs, houses,services and facilities in and around theirurban areas;providing jobs and services in andaround other settlements that areaccessible to a wider area or serviceparticular concentrations of need;improving the social infrastructure ofthe sub-area;establishing a sustainable relationshipwith the Nottingham-Derby andSheffield-Doncaster-Rotherham areas,in particular to manage the pressuresfor development unrelated to theSub-area’s needs;promoting environmental enhancementas a fundamental part of the regenerationof the Sub-area;protecting and enhancing the naturaland historic assets of the Sub-area, inparticular the Birklands & BilhaughSpecial Area of Conservation; andimplementing the policies and proposalsin Part 2 of the Regional Plan.

Target:

Higher rate of increase in economic activity andemployment rates than regional average

Indicators:

Per cent change in economic activity andemployment ratesBenefit claimant count

Results:

8c.3 Figure 8c(ii) compares employment ratesacross the Northern sub-area whilst table 8c(i) looksat both economic activity and employment rates overtime. Economic activity rates in the Northern Sub-areaas a whole remained consistent between 2006 and2007: Mansfield showed a significant increase ineconomic activity while Chesterfield and North EastDerbyshire were the only local authority areas to showa decrease. 74 per cent of the working age populationwere in employment in the Northern Sub-areacompared to around 76 per cent in the East Midlands.

8c.4 Parts of the Northern Sub-area continue tohave relatively low employment rates. Bolsover hasrates that are consistently below the average for theEast Midlands but have shown increases since 2005,while only Newark & Sherwood’s rate has stayedabove the regional average over the past four years.Mansfield and Bassetlaw showed significant increasesin employment rates over the year.



Figure 8c(ii) Employment Rates (percentage working agepopulation) Jan 07 to Dec 07 Northern Sub-area (per cent)

Source: NOMIS Annual Population Survey0 decimal places for Northern Sub-area as calculated using rounded data

Table 8c(i) Economic Activity and Employment Rates 2006 and 2007 (per cent)

Employment RateEconomic Activity Rate

Jan-Dec 07Jan-Dec 06Jan-Dec 07Jan-Dec 06

72.973.678.578.5Ashfield

76.470.977.475.4Bassetlaw

71.871.280.177.6Bolsover

73.776.479.582.9Chesterfield

74.670.780.376.3Mansfield

76.076.983.080.3Newark & Sherwood

71.479.376.582.1North East Derbyshire

74747979Northern Sub-area

75.976.380.080.5East Midlands

Source: NOMIS Annual Population Survey0 decimal places for Northern Sub-area as calculated using rounded dataNote that this data is collected from a survey and is therefore subject to sampling errors



Figure 8c(iii) Proportion of Working Age Population Claiming anyBenefit February 2008 (per cent)

Source: NOMIS DWP Data

Table 8c(ii) Benefit Claimants Northern Sub-area February 2006 to 2008

EnglandEast MidlandsNorthern sub-area

4,296,520355,38071,520Number of working age claimants of anybenefit 2008

13.513.016.5Proportion of Working Age PopulationClaiming any Benefit 2008 (%)

-4.3-3.0-4.1Percentage Change in Benefit Rate 2006 to2008

Source: NOMIS

8c.5 Figure 8c(iii) and table 8c(ii) look at benefitclaimant rates. The Northern Sub-area had a relativelyhigh rate of working age residents claiming benefit inboth 2006 and 2008, although this period has shownan overall reduction of a similar size to that in the EastMidlands and England as a whole. All local authorityareas have rates above the regional average of 13.0per cent, ranging from 13.2 per cent (Newark &Sherwood) to 19.8 per cent (Mansfield).

Policy Commentary

8c.6 In the context of current economiccircumstances the target of a better economic activityand employment performance than the regionalaverage may well need to be a longer term aspiration.

It may not be realistic to have a rate of increase targetover the next few years either for the region or thesub-area. Whether the Sub-area, during the economicrecovery, can outstrip regional averages is highlyquestionable.

8c.7 Economic activity and employment rates aremaintaining their 2006 levels, and while not reducingas much as the Region as a whole, they are still belowaverage. It should be noted that the figures, beingsample survey results, do not give a meaningfulindication of trends. Also, with regard to job creation,jobs that residents have may be within or outside thesub-region.



8c.8 Benefit claimant and anecdotal information fromthe Alliance SSP supports the evidence that the areaappears to be continuing its recovery but is not yet inline with the Region as a whole.

Policy 43 Sub Regional TransportObjectives: Northern

Policy 43

N1 To develop the transport infrastructure,public transport, and services needed toimprove sustainable access from traditionalcommunities to jobs and services in adjacenturban centres such as Chesterfield,Mansfield-Ashfield, Newark and Worksop.

N2 To make best use of the existing railinfrastructure and proximity to the strategicroad network to develop new opportunitiesfor local jobs in the storage and distributionsector.

N3 To reduce congestion and improve safetyalong the M1 corridor.

N4 To overcome the problems of ruralisolation for those without access to a privatecar.

N5 To improve surface access, particularlyby public transport, to Robin Hood Airportnear Doncaster.


Targets and Indicators being developed.

Policy Commentary

8c.9 Probably the most significant developmentwith regard to transport is the progress being made inliaison over the Local Transport Bill along with SouthYorkshire Authorities. This is, as yet in its early stages,however.

8c.10 The Highways Agency has completed junctionimprovements on the A1 at Blyth, Apleyhead, andMarkham Moor. Work has also started on wideningthe M1 between junctions 25 and 28 and furtherimprovements between junctions 21 and 30,usingActive Traffic Management are expected to follow.

8c.11 Robin Hood Airport has recently published itsMaster Plan which includes consideration of futureimprovements to surface access.

Northern SRS Policy 1 Sub-RegionalDevelopment Priorities

Policy Northern SRS 1

Significant levels of growth will be providedfor in and adjoining the Sub-Regional centresof Chesterfield, Mansfield-Ashfield, Newarkand Worksop, which, subject to levels ofurban capacity, will require locations forurban extensions to be identified in LocalDevelopment Frameworks (LDFs).

Mansfield-Ashfield includes Mansfield,Mansfield-Woodhouse, Sutton-in-Ashfield andKirkby-in-Ashfield

Chesterfield is confined to Chesterfield only.

Newark includes Newark and Balderton.

Worksop includes Worksop , Shireoaks andRhodesia.

LDFs will identify and justify levels ofdevelopment for those ‘other urban areas’which are suitable for development due tourban capacity, Sub-area regeneration needsor the need to support the present role of thesettlement in servicing the surrounding area.The scale of development will be related tothe existing level of infrastructure, range ofcommunity facilities and job opportunities,availability of public transport, and existingcharacter of the settlement. (see RSSProposed Changes for the full Policywording.)


General statement of policy, no indicators.

Policy Commentary

8c.10 As LDF preparation is in its early stages, thereis no current evidence over delivering this policy.



Northern SRS Policy 2 Supporting theroles of Town and Village Centres


Regional Plan Policy 22 will be deliveredthrough locating retail development and otherappropriate town centre uses predominantlyin or on the edge of the following towncentres, defined as ‘Town Centres’ for thepurposes of national planning guidance, tosustain and enhance the role of those centreswithin the following hierarchy:

Sub-Regional Retail and Service Centres– Chesterfield, Mansfield, Newark,Sutton-in-Ashfield and WorksopRetfordOther Retail and Service Centres ofSub-Regional significance - Bolsover,Clay Cross, Dronfield, Eckington,Killamarsh, Kirkby-in-Ashfield, Retford,Shirebrook, Staveley, Clowne and SouthNormanton

Target:

No significant development outside appropriatecentres listed in policy

Indicator:

Percentage of completed retail, office and leisuredevelopment in town centres by local authorityarea

Results:

8c.13 There was no leisure development abovethreshold recorded in the Northern sub-area during2007/08. A total of 21,165 sqm of retail developmentwas recorded in the Northern sub-area. One of theretail developments was in an out of centre location;this was 9,168 sqm of mixed retail use in Bolsover(Table 8c(iii)).

Table 8c(iii) Town Centre Development in Northern Sub-area, floor space completed2007/08 (sqm)

Percentage in a CentralLocation

TotalCentral Location**

#00Ashfield (exc. Hucknall)

1005,5685,568Bassetlaw

09,1680Bolsover

1001,3091,309Chesterfield

1005,1205,120Mansfield*

#00Newark & Sherwood

#00North East Derbyshire

Source: Local Authorities*Mansfield return also included some sites of unknown area** Includes city centre, town centre, local centre and edge of centre

Policy Commentary

8c.14 The retail development in an out of centrelocation represents almost 50 per cent of the totalrecorded. This means that the aims of this policy havebeen severely threatened; while the decision predatescurrent policy, it does not predate PPS6. The possibilityof further out-of-centre developments remains, withsignificant brownfield opportunities for employmentdevelopment. This policy needs robust LDF policiesto support it.



Northern SRS Policy 3 Sub-RegionalEmployment Regeneration Priorities


In reviewing employment land allocations inthe Sub-area, Local Planning Authoritiesshould, in addition to the locations set out inNorthern SRS Policy 1, consider locations toassist the growth and regeneration objectivesof the strategy in the following areas:

Around Staveley, Markham Vale andwest of Bolsover in particular byexploiting the brownfield landopportunities in the area;Utilising brownfield opportunities alongthe A61 corridor through Chesterfield toClay Cross;Around Barlborough and eastwardstowards Clowne,Whitwell and Creswell,with an emphasis on brownfield land.Along the Mansfield AshfieldRegeneration Route (MARR) whileensuring the maintenance and integrityof Green Wedges;North of Worksop towards Robin HoodAirport Doncaster Sheffield (RHADS),concentrating on the former miningcommunities and mining operations.

Owing to the character of these areas specialconsideration will need to be given to theimpact of development outside settlementsand on former long-standing mining,manufacturing and extraction sites. In thisregard, special consideration will be given togreen infrastructure as in Regional Plan Policy28 and Northern SRS Policy 4.

Local Development Frameworks shouldensure that development does not intrudeinto areas which have been designated asGreen Belt and Green Wedges to maintainopen breaks between major urban centres.

Target:

Higher rate of increase in economic activity andemployment rates than Regional average

Indicator:

Percentage change in economic activity andemployment rates

Results:

8c.17 See the results and analysis for policy 7 whichcovers economic activity and employment rates.

Policy Commentary

8c.16 Supporting this and other policies, a NorthernSub-Region Employment Land Review wascommissioned and has proved useful in developmentmanagement and planning. LDF preparation work willuse the Employment Land Review to look at futureemployment land provision, the nature of potentialprovision and market response.

8c.17 Engagement with the Sheffield City RegionDevelopment Programme is also increasing in theNorthern (Sheffield-Rotherham) HMA, including waysof developing a spatial strategy that will inform thePartial Review of the RSS.

8c.18 In furthering one of the areas mentionedBassetlaw has commissioned work to look at theopportunities in and around Harworth for bothemployment and housing provision, with a view todeveloping an Area Action Plan for the settlement. Arecently published long term strategy for the RobinHood Airport focuses on the immediate area withinSouth Yorkshire but could inform planning over a widerarea including within the East Midlands.

8c.19 The newmotorway junction 29a giving accessto Markham Vale was opened in June 2008, withfurther development of the growth zone anticipatedduring 2009.

Northern SRS Policy 4 Enhancing GreenInfrastructure through Development


LDFs and other strategies will, whenidentifying the location and nature ofdevelopment or infrastructure provision,ensure that consideration is given to wherethe greatest public benefit would be gainedthrough the enhancement of GreenInfrastructure. For this purpose, the multiplebenefits identified in the East Midlands PublicBenefit Analysis project, the key strategicenvironmental opportunities set out in theNorthern Coalfields Environmental Study andother relevant work should be used. GreenInfrastructure Plans will be used wherepossible to achieve this.



Indicators:

Measurement of Green Infrastructure fromEMRAbaseline

Results:

8c.20 EMRA commissioned a report from HallamEnvironmental Consulting on Environmental Capacity,looking at which environmental themes are currentlymonitored by East Midlands authorities (see theenvironment chapter for details). The final report waspublished in December 2008.

Policy Commentary

8c.21 None of the local authorities in the NorthernSub-area have an adopted Green InfrastructureStrategy. However, Ashfield, Chesterfield, Mansfieldand North East Derbyshire are all currently preparingGreen Infrastructure Strategies. Bolsover hascompleted a Green Infrastructure Study and Newark& Sherwood have a Green Spaces Strategy.

Northern SRS Policy 5 Sherwood ForestRegional Park


Local authorities and other agencies shouldwork together to promote the creation of aSherwood Forest Regional Park whichgenerates environmental, economic andsocial benefits of both local and nationalsignificance by:

protecting and enhancing the distinctivelandscape, natural, cultural and historicassets;developing the recreational potentialboth for local communities and forvisitors;creating a world class visitor experiencewhich generates sustainable economicbenefits for local communities.

Targets:

Policy for Natura 2000 site (if recognised)

Indicators:

Feasibility study, proposal and establishment ofRegional ParkProtection policy established for Natura 2000 site


8c.22 Figure 8c(i) shows the boundaries of theproposed Sherwood Forest Regional Park and thearea that is being investigated . Consultants startedwork in December 2007 on a feasibility study for aSherwood Regional Park. A briefing reportsummarising phase one of the study, is now available:http://www.green-space.org.uk

8c.23 Sherwood Forest is recognised as being ofinternational importance for its wildlife, beingdesignated under European legislation as Birklandsand Bilhaugh SAC (Special Area of Conservation). InNovember 2008, Nottinghamshire County Councilapproved £10M plans to relocate the visitor centre onland near, rather than within, the Sherwood ForestNational Nature Reserve.



http://www.green-space.org.uk/downloads/regions/em/reports/Sherwood%20RP%20Stage%201%20Briefing%20Report%2020-3-08%20KH2%20(2).pdf

Chapter 8 d Eastern Sub-area8d.1 The Sub-area comprises Lincolnshire and Rutland and contains a relatively traditional settlementstructure comprised of dispersed towns with predominantly rural hinterlands. The only Principal Urban Area inthe Sub-area is Lincoln, which acts as a focus for employment and services.




-Data notavailable


RSS CoreUnemploymentrates in markettowns

Developmentin theEasternSub-area

4

NOMISUnemploymentincreasedbetween Jan 08

ContextualUnemploymentrates (measuredin January andAugust) incoastal area

and Aug 08 inparts ofsub-area

NOMISLittle changefrom previousyear

ContextualJob DensityEstimates

STEAMSlight increasein visitorspending inLincolnshire

RSS CoreVisitor spendingin coastal area

ABIJobs in food anddrink remainedvirtually static

ContextualNumber of jobscreated in foodand drinkproduction

LocalAuthorities

Production ofStrategyunderway

-RSS CoreProduction ofStrategy

Strategy forLincolnshireCoastalDistricts

5

LocalAuthorities

A158 Bypassopened Nov 07

Transportschemesimplemented

RSS CoreRelevanttransportimprovements

OvercomingPeripheralityin theEasternSub-area

6

-Sub-area datanot available

Access tobroadbandextended toall areas

RSS CoreAccess to anduse ofInformation andCommunicationTechnology(ICT)

---To meetRegionalBiodiversity

Regional CoreChange in areasof biodiversityimportance,

Priorities fortheManagement

34

Habitatincluding:of theManagementpriority habitatsLincolnshireandand species (byCoast (see

EnvironmentChapter)

RecreationTargetslisted inAppendix 4

type); and areasdesignated fortheir intrinsicvalue includingsites of


Chapter 8 d . Eastern Sub-area



international,national,regional orsub-regionalsignificance

-See Transportchapter


RSS CoreIndicators to bedeveloped

Sub-area(Eastern)TransportObjectives

43

Policy 4 Development in the EasternSub-area

Policy 4

Development in the Eastern Sub-area should:

significantly strengthen the role ofLincoln as one of the Region’s fivePrincipal Urban Areas (PUAs);ensure that the agreed Growth PointProgrammes of Delivery at Lincoln andGrantham are achieved both in overallnumbers of dwellings and in the agreedphasing of development;consolidate and where appropriatestrengthen the Sub-Regional Centres ofBoston, Grantham and Spalding;maintain and enhance the roles of thedefinedMain and Small Towns as locallysignificant service and employmentcentres;regenerate the towns of Gainsborough,Mablethorpe and Skegness;strengthen the role of the foodproduction and distribution industry;continue to promote sustainable tourismin historic settlements, including Lincolnand Stamford, and consolidate anddiversify the holiday industry at existingcoastal settlements;promote sustainable patterns ofdevelopment in those parts of theSub-area bordering major urban areasin other regions;protect the landscape and natural beautyof the Lincolnshire Wolds AONB;

Policy 4 cont.

protect and enhance the natural andhistoric environment of the coastalmargin including the Wash and HumberEstuary Special Protection Areas, andthe Saltfleetby-Theddlethorpe DunesSpecial Area of Conservation; andprotect and enhance the Rutland WaterSpecial ProtectionArea andGrimsthorpeand Baston Fen Special Areas ofConservation.

Targets:

To be developed

Indicators:

Visitor spending in coastal areaNumber of new jobs created in food and drinkproductionJob densityUnemployment rates in market townsUnemployment rates (measured in January andAugust) in coastal area

Results:

8d.2 Data from the STEAM (Scarborough TourismEconomic Activity Monitor) model has been providedin figure 8d(i). Unfortunately this provides informationfor Lincolnshire as a whole rather than for the coastalareas. Stage 1 Part 1 of the Lincolnshire CoastalStrategy produced in August 2008 highlights the needfor better tourism data for the Lincolnshire coastal area.



Figure 8d(i) Indexed visitor spend in Lincolnshire 2003 to 2007,2003=100

Source: STEAM Model www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk

8d.3 The STEAMmodel suggests that although thespend by day visitors fell between 2006 and 2007 thespending by staying visitors increased by 5 per cent,meaning that there was a slight increase in overall

visitor spending. In 2007 the total visitor spend inLincolnshire was £972 million; 60 per cent of this wasby overnight visitors.

Table 8d(i) Number of Jobs in Food and Drink Production 2006 and 2007

20072006

##Boston

400300East Lindsey

600700Lincoln

1,9002,000North Kesteven

##Rutland

6,1005,900South Holland

2,8003,000South Kesteven

800800West Lindsey

14,10014,000Eastern Sub Area


Source: Annual Business InquiryData prior to 2006 are not comparable# Sample size too small



8d.4 The number of jobs in food production in theEastern Sub-Area has remained virtually static; any

changes shown in the table for this area are notstatistically significant.

Table 8d(ii) Job Density , Number of Workforce jobs per Resident Working agePopulation 2006

2006

0.88Boston

0.76East Lindsey

1.06Lincoln

0.69North Kesteven

0.85South Holland

0.74South Kesteven

0.60West Lindsey

0.91Rutland

0.81East Midlands

0.88England

Source: NOMIS

8d.5 Job density is defined as the number of jobsper resident at working age (16-59/64). The latest datais for 2006 via NOMIS and is presented in table 8d(ii).A figure greater than 1, such as for Lincoln (1.06),indicates there are more jobs than there are workingage residents. In most cases the job density is below

1 which shows that the size of the working agepopulation is greater then the number of jobs. Thelowest value being West Lindsey at 0.60. As the jobsdensity value becomes larger it begins to provide anindication of the levels of commuting.

Table 8d(iii) Unemployment in Coastal Areas January and August 2008 (per cent)

Unemployment rate August 08Unemployment rate January 08

2.42.1Boston

2.02.6East Lindsey

1.91.6South Holland

2.32.0East Midlands

Source: NOMISClaimant count per head working age resident

8d.6 To compare labour market performance incoastal areas in the winter (January) and summer(August), claimant count unemployment data has beenused since this is available monthly. There is littleseasonal variability in the coastal Lincolnshire districts.In fact unemployment rates in Boston and SouthHolland increased from January 2008 to August 2008,in line with national and regional trends. The exceptionto this is East Lindsey where the unemployment rate(Claimant count per head resident working agepopulation) was 2.6 per cent in January 2008 and 2.0per cent in August 2008 (Table 8d(iii)).

Policy Commentary

8d.7 It is difficult to comment on the indicators dueto the age of some of the data and the absence oftargets. They do not, however, provide a completepicture of whether the policy is being implemented,due to their narrow focus. Policy commentaryelsewhere in this Annual Monitoring Report helps togive a broader picture, in particular:

Policy 13 (Section 3: Housing) Regional HousingProvision;



Policy 17 (Section 3: Housing) on joint workingwith Peterborough;Policy 34 (Section 5: Environment) Priorities forthe Management of the Lincolnshire Coast;Policy LPA SRS6 (Section 8: Sub-Areas) ontourism and cultural developments in the LincolnPolicy Area.

8d.8 Also since the last Annual Monitoring Reportthere has been significant progress in that:

Gainsborough has been provisionally designatedas a New Growth Point. In practice this meansthat the whole of West Lindsey now falls withineither the Lincoln or Gainsborough New GrowthPoints;Lincoln and Grantham New Growth Points havebeen awarded significant funding towardsimplementation and infrastructure.

Policy 5 Strategy for Lincolnshire CoastalDistricts

Policy 5

A strategy will be agreed between theRegional Planning Body, the threeLincolnshire coastal districts (East Lindsey,Boston and South Holland), LincolnshireCounty Council, the Environment Agency andother relevant regional organisations. Thiswill consider primarily:

flood risk and flood defence works;housing needs;regeneration needs, including social andeconomic factors;other infrastructural needs; andthe protection of the integrity ofdesignated nature conservation sites ofinternational importance.

Policy 5 cont.

The strategy should also consider how anyinfrastructure will be funded and the timingof such works. New housing and other newdevelopment will need to be carefully phasedin accordancewith the provision of necessarynew infrastructure.

The agreed strategy will form part of the nextRSS review and if agreed before the adoptionof the next review it will form a guide to thepreparation of local development documentsin the three districts until the regional strategyis rolled forward.

Indicator:

Production of strategy

Results:

8d.9 Production of a coastal strategy is currentlyunderway and is expected to be completed in 2010.Stage 1 Part 1 was completed in August 2008 and isavailable from the EMRA website (w w w . e m r a . g o v . u k / w h a t - w e - d o /housing-planning-transport/regional-spatial-strategy-rss/rss-partial-review-2008/supporting-documents ). Thiswas circulated at the Regional Plan Partial ReviewLaunch Seminar in October 2008.

8d.10 The same consultants (Atkins) have sincebeen appointed to carry out the main study (Stage 2),and a Technical Group has been set up to assist theSteering Group.

Policy Commentary

8d.11 This is a new Policy in the Proposed Changesfollowing the recommendation of the Panel Report -action on which has been mainly since April 2008. Thelocal authorities named are fully committed to carryingit out.



http://www.emra.gov.uk/what-we-do/ housing-planning-transport/regional-spatial-strategy-rss/ rss-partial-review-2008/supporting-documents



Policy 6 Overcoming Peripherality in theEastern Sub-area

Policy 6

Peripherality and lack of accessibility in thecentral and eastern parts of the Sub-areashould be addressed through:

a programme of infrastructureimprovements that concentrates onpublic transport and road improvementsin existing key transport corridors;improved connections both between theRegion and its ports and between itsports and mainland Europe; andimprovements to its telecommunicationsnetworks; andmulti-modal accessibility improvementsboth within and beyond the Sub-area.

Targets:

Transport schemes implementedAccess to broadband extended to all areas

Indicators:

Relevant transport improvementsAccess to and use of ICT

Results:

8d.12 The A158 Burgh Le Marsh Bypass openedin November 2007. This is a length of 4.5km and willimprove strategic access to the tourism industry onthe Lincolnshire coast.

8d.13 Broadband data is not available at thisgeography, however for the East Midlands in 2005,according to Ovum, 99.9 per cent of households hadaccess to broadband (see economy chapter).

Policy Commentary

8d.14 See the Economy section regarding accessto ICT and broadband.

Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives:Eastern Sub-area

Policy 43

E1 To develop the transport infrastructure,public transport and services needed tosupport Lincoln’s role as one of the Region’sfive Principal Urban Areas in a sustainablemanner.

E2 To develop opportunities formodal switchaway from road based transport in thenationally important food and drink sector.

E3 To make better use of the opportunitiesoffered by existing ports, in particular Boston,for all freight movements, and improvinglinkages to major ports in adjacent Regionssuch asGrimsby, Imminghamand Felixstowe.

E4 To improve access to the LincolnshireCoast, particularly by public transport.

E5 To reduce peripherality, particularly to theeast of the A15, and overcoming ruralisolation for those without access to a privatecar.

E6 To reduce the number of fatal and seriousroad traffic accidents.

Targets, Indicators and Results:

8d.15 Targets and indicators to be developed. Seepolicy 6 for information on transport improvements.

Policy Commentary

8d.16 There is a need to develop specific indicatorsfor this policy by next year, following publication of thefinal Regional Plan. Some relevant analysis is alreadyavailable in the Transport section, however, forinstance on road traffic accidents



Chapter 8 e Lincoln Policy Area8e.1 The Lincoln Policy Area covers the City of Lincoln and parts of North Kesteven and West Lindseydistricts.




---All-AllSpatialPriorities for

LPASRS1 the Lincoln

Policy Area

LocalAuthorities

Increase inhousesdeveloped onpdl

Contribution tothe Regionaltarget of 60per cent ofadditionaldwellings onPDL orthroughconversions

Regional CoreProportion ofhousingcompletionsachieved onpreviouslydeveloped landor throughconversions

SiteSelection inthe LincolnPolicy Area

LPASRS2

-GIS boundariesbeingdeveloped

-RSS Core% of newhouses,employment landand floorspacedeveloped withinor adjoiningurban areas

LocalAuthorities

Majority ofdevelopment onnew sites

To meettargets set outin LDFs

Regional CoreNet change inoffice andindustrialland/floorspaceand proportionon PDL

LocalAuthorities

Work isongoing

-RSS CoreGreen wedgesmaintained/

Protection ofLincoln’s

LPASRS3 defined as part

of LDF processUrbanFringe

LocalAuthorities

On track tomeet housingtargets

30,740 newdwellings by2026

Regional CoreHousingtrajectories

HousingProvision

LPASRS4

LocalAuthorities

GIS boundariesbeingdeveloped

Higherproportion ofB1, lower of

RSS CoreProportion ofnewdevelopment in

EmploymentDensity

LPASRS5

B2/B8 inCentral Lincoln,CentralLincoln

remainder ofurban area thatis B1, B2 and B8

--See Policy LPASRS 3 and

-RSS CoreVisitor spendingin region

Tourism,Culture &Education

LPASRS6 economy

section


Chapter 8 e . Lincoln Policy Area



--See Policy LPASRS 3 and

-RSS CoreNo. of overnightstays in region

economysection

LocalAuthorities

Rise inintermediate

To meetinterim

Regional CoreAffordablehousing

DeprivationandExclusion

LPASRS7 but fall in social

rented housingaffordablehousing

completions inCentral LincsHMA targets for the

CentralLincolnshireHMA inProposedChangesPolicy 14

EnvironmentAgency

Data notavailable


Regional CorePlanningpermissions

Flood Riskand WaterManagement

LPASRS8 granted contrary

to EnvironmentAgency adviceon flood riskgrounds

LocalAuthorities

Projectinvolvementongoing


LocalAuthorities

Targetachieved but

100 per centCoverage inPolicy Area

RSS CoreStrategic FloodRiskAssessmentundertaken further work

ongoing

Ofwat/LocalAuthorities

Data not yetavailable

At or aboveregional targetof 25 per cent

RSS CoreWater efficiencytargets in newdevelopment

LocalAuthorities

Work isprogressing

All relevantstrategies tocontain polices

RSS CorePolicies todevelop SubRegional

SubRegionalCountryPark

LPASRS9

Country Park inLDFs,CommunityStrategies andother relevantstrategies

--See LPA SRSpolicy 3

All LDFs tocontainpolicies

RSS CorePoliciesconsistent withLPA SRS 10 inLDFs

LincolnCathedral

LPASRS10





LTPmonitoring

Year on yeartrends difficultto determine

Reduction incongestion inurban areas

RSS CoreScale ofcongestion inurban areas and

Sub-RegionalTransportPriorities

LPASRS11

and onon inter-regionalroutes inter-regional

routes

-Data notavailable forsub-area

Increase injourneysmadeby cycle

RSS CoreJourneys madeby cycle

LocalAuthorities

12 new cyclepaths providedin 07/08

-RSS CoreNo. and length ofnew cycle routesprovided

LPA SRS Policy 1 Spatial Priorities for theLincoln Policy Area

Policy LPA SRS 1

In order to significantly strengthen Lincoln’srole as a Principal Urban Area within the EastMidlands, Local Development Frameworks,Local Transport Plans, community, housing,economic development and other relevantstrategies should:

seek to deliver the overall amount of newdevelopment required through theimplementation of a more sustainablepattern of development throughout thePolicy Area;develop phased strategic urbanextensions co-ordinated with thenecessary infrastructure provision;provide for economic regeneration andemployment growth, includingnecessaryinfrastructure requirements, in anappropriately co-ordinated and phasedmanner;provide for a well designed andsustainable range and mix of newhousing, including sufficient affordablehousing to meet identified need;promote the further development ofappropriate tourist, education andcultural facilities;

Policy LPA 1 cont.

protect and/or enhance the characterand quality of the built and naturalenvironment, including greenspace, andthe wider surrounding countryside;reduce deprivation and promote socialinclusion concentrating primarily on theareas most in need;allocate development at locations whichhelp minimise additional travelrequirements;provide for increased accessibility andtransport choice including theconstruction of eastern and southernbypasses for Lincoln;promote the priority re-use of suitablepreviously developed land withinexisting settlements;facilitate mixed use development; andand protect and enhance the dominanceand approach views of Lincoln Cathedralon the skyline.


General statement of policy, no indicators.



LPA SRS Policy 2 Site Selection in theLincoln Policy Area

Policy LPA SRS 2

Appropriate sites for new development willbe allocated in Local DevelopmentFrameworks having regard to the followingorder of preference:

Central Lincoln;elsewhere in the built up area of Lincolnand North Hykeham where they areaccessible to local facilities, and are wellserved or are capable of being wellserved by public transport, and/or theyare within convenient walking or cyclingdistance of central Lincoln;on the edge of the built up area havingregard to the environmental factors setout in LPA SRS Policy 3 and elsewherein the Regional Plan, and where they areaccessible to local facilities or are wellserved or are capable of being wellserved by public transport, cycling andpedestrian links to existing localfacilities;in appropriate settlements elsewhere inthe policy area which have a range ofexisting services and facilities includingregular access by public transport andhaving regard to regeneration needs andthe environmental factors set out in LPASRS Policy 3 and elsewhere in theRegional Plan.

Policy LPA SRS 2 cont.

The suitability of previously developed landshould be assessed as first priority within thesequential preference above beforeconsideration is given to greenfield sites.

Land will be subject to phasing whereappropriate and consistent with this strategyso as to ensure that its release is inaccordance with the above order ofpreference and priority.

Targets:

Contribution to the Regional target of 60 per centof additional dwellings on PDL or throughconversionsTo meet targets in LDFs

Indicators:

Proportion of housing completions achieved onpreviously developed land or through conversionsPercentage of new houses, employment landand floorspace developed within or adjoiningurban areasNet change in office and industrialland/floorspace and proportion on PDL

Results:

Table 8e(i) Housing Developed on Previously Developed Land (PDL) 2007/08

Percentage on PDLTotal DwellingsDwellings on PDL*

71502358Lincoln

54365197North Kesteven

1610917West Lindsey

59976572Total LPA

Source: Local Authorities*includes conversions

8e.2 Table 8e(i) gives figures for 2007/08, where atotal of 572 dwellings were built on previouslydeveloped land. This amounts to 59 per cent of the

total new dwellings. This is an improvement on thefigure of 48.5 per cent in 2006/07 (when the pdl statusfor a very small number was not recorded).



Table 8e(ii) Industrial and Office Land Use in Lincoln Policy Area by Use Class 2007/08

TotalMixed

B8-Storage/Distribution

B2-GeneralIndustrial

B1-Office &Light

Industrial

200.3159.91.21.337.9Area (hectares)Land Commitments

2.72.00.20.00.5Area (hectares)Land Under Construction

14,3519,1812,29002,880Floorspace (sqm)

11.68.82.20.40.2Area (hectares)Land Developed

43,87428,02211,8783,556418Floorspace (sqm)

Source: Local AuthoritiesMissing or incomplete floorspace data:

Under construction new build site in LincolnUnder construction and developed new build sites in West Lindsey

Table 8e(iii) Industrial Land in Lincoln Policy Area 2007/08 by Development Type(hectares)

DevelopedUnder ConstructionCommitted

10.42.7193.4New Build*

0.80.00.0Extension

0.40.06.9Redeveloped

Source: Local Authorities*land not previously used as employment land

8e.3 Tables 8e(ii) and 8e(iii) give details onemployment land developed, under construction andcommitted during 2007/08. During 2007/08 11.6 ha ofemployment land were developed in the Lincoln PolicyArea, creating 44 thousand sqm of floorspace. The

majority, 10.4 ha (90 per cent), was on new build sites.A total of 200.3 ha of employment land is committed,the majority of this is for Mixed B use. Of the committedland, 193.4 ha (97 per cent) is for new builds.

Table 8e(iv) Previously Developed Land in Lincoln Policy Area 2007/08 (%)

DevelopedUnder ConstructionCommitted

5.01.781.1Brownfield Area (hectares)

43.161.540.5Percentage Brownfield


8e.4 Details on development on previouslydeveloped sites are given in table 8e(iv). In 2007/08,43.1 per cent of the land developed in the LincolnPolicy Area was brownfield.

8e.5 A GIS boundary for Central Lincoln has beenprovided, but work is under way to define one for thePUA. Once this has been completed an analysis ofsite level data from cdpVision will be possible fordevelopments within or adjoining urban areas.

Policy Commentary

8e.6 The percentage of housing completions onbrownfield land has increased almost to the regionaltarget of 60 per cent. Implementation of the GrowthPoint strategy will, however, depend partly on urbanextensions which will be mainly greenfield sites. Thepercentage is much higher in the urban area than inthe extensive rural parts of the Lincoln Policy Area. As2007/08 was the first year that employment land



development has been analysed few conclusions canbe drawn, but the level of development activity didappear to be healthy.

LPA SRS Policy 3 Protection of Lincoln’sUrban Fringe

Policy LPA SRS 3

Local Development Frameworks shouldensure the protection of Lincoln’s urbanfringe through the designation of GreenWedges in and around Lincoln in order to:

protect the historic setting of the cityfrom inappropriate development on itsurban fringes;protect structurally important areas ofopen land that influence the form anddirection of urban development, preventcoalescence and maintain the physicalidentity of adjacent settlements; andensure that open areas of land extendoutwards from Lincoln to preserve linkswith the open countryside.

Targets:

None

Indicator:

Green wedgesmaintained/defined as part of LDFprocess

Results:

8e.7 The four authorities covering CentralLincolnshire are exploring ways of delivering a JointCore Strategy. In themeantime existing GreenWedgesare retained in the Lincolnshire Structure Plan andDistrict Local Plans.

8e.8 The following map (figure 8e(i)) indicates thelocation and scale of green wedges in the LincolnPolicy Area:



Figure 8e(i) Lincoln Policy Area



LPA SRS Policy 4 Housing Provision

Policy LPA SRS 4

Within the context set by Regional Plan Policy13, Local Development Frameworks shouldmake provision for about 30,740 newdwellings in the Lincoln Policy Area (LPA)over the period 2001 to 2026, as follows:

City of Lincoln: 21,850*

North Kesteven: 5,470

West Lindsey: 3,420

* The figures for Lincoln include any provisionmade in urban extensions whichmay need toextend across local authority boundaries oron sites adjacent to the built up area in NorthKesteven or West Lindsey. Such provisionwould be additional to the provision figuresfor these districts.

Target:

30,740 new dwellings by 2026

Indicator:

Housing trajectories

Results :

Figure 8e(ii) Lincoln Policy Area (Lincoln Growth Point) HousingTrajectory at April 2008

Source: Growth Point Housing Trajectory

8e.9 Figure 8e(ii) above shows a housing trajectoryfor Lincoln Policy area. The blue line shows theaverage annual requirement of 1,230 dwellings neededto meet the target of 30,740 new dwellings between2001 and 2026 (although there is no phasingrequirement). In past years (with the exception of

2006/07) completions have been below this level;2007/08 saw the completion of 976 dwellings. Thegrey bars show projected completions based on landavailability and short term market conditions; the redline the completion rate required to meet the 2026target given past performance. Projected completions



for 2011/12 to 2018/19 are well above the requiredannual rate and mean that the Lincoln Policy area isprojected to meet its 2026 target.

Policy Commentary

8e.10 Whilst completions are projected to dip in theshort term due to the downturn in market conditionsthey are expected to recover strongly in the mediumterm. This is dependant on the location, capacity andphasing of urban extensions, but even if any of thesewere to change there is leeway to meet the 2026target. The trajectory also includes significant urbancapacity, which is currently being updated through ajoint SHLAA.

LPA SRS Policy 5 Employment Density

Policy LPA SRS 5

Local Development Frameworks shouldensure that higher density employmentgenerating new development should belocated within Central Lincoln or, if nosuitable sites are available, within theremainder of the existing built up area ofLincoln and at North Hykeham or within anynew sustainable urban extensions.

Target:

Higher proportion of B1, lower of B2/B8 in CentralLincoln

Indicator:

Proportion of new development in CentralLincoln, remainder of urban area that is B1, B2and B8

Results:

8e.11 GIS boundaries for Central Lincoln wereprovided in early 2009. An analysis of site level datafrom cdpVision will now be possible in subsequentmonitoring rounds. Work is under way to define onefor the Principal Urban Area. Once this has beencompleted an analysis will also be possible for otherdevelopments within it.

Policy Commentary

8e.12 Although there has been some progress,further work is needed to define the areas involved,including urban extensions.

LPA SRS Policy 6 Tourism, Culture &Education

Policy LPA SRS 6

Local Development Frameworks, economic,community and other strategies shouldencourage and promote the role of Lincolnas a centre for tourist, cultural andeducational development. Local DevelopmentFrameworks should facilitate land usedevelopment either serving or expandingthese functions consistent with amenity,traffic, environmental and heritageconsiderations.

Targets:

None

Indicators:

Visitor spendingNumber of overnight stays

Result:

8e.13 Reliable data is not available at thisgeographic level. Information on tourism is providedin the sub-area section dealing with the Easternsub-area and in the economy section.

Policy Commentary

8e.14 The indicators are not well related to thepolicy, which again is partly about progress on LocalDevelopment Frameworks (see results on Policy LPASRS 3). They will be reviewed following publication ofthe final Regional Plan.

8e.15 This policy is, however, also about tourist,cultural and educational development on the ground.Last year’s Annual Monitoring Report listed someachievements since 2001. Since then there have alsobeen the following developments:

The EPIC Centre was opened at the LincolnshireShowground, as a Lincolnshire centre ofenvironmental innovation that aims to explorelow carbon technologies and responses to globalwarming, and to provide updated exhibition andconference facilities using “green” constructiontechniques. It has already hosted a number ofmajor events, including the East Midlands EXPO2008;A Lincoln to Boston multi-user path is beingconstructed beside the River Witham. It features



a variety of art works along its length of 20 milesoff-road and 13 miles on lanes and it forms partof NCN Route 1 which connects Hull to Harwich.Usage to date on the finished sections is farhigher than anticipated;Through the Lincolnshire WaterwaysPartnership's regeneration of the county's rivercorridors further new and improved mooringshave been installed or will be completed in 2009.

LPA SRS Policy 7 Deprivation andExclusion

Policy LPA SRS 7

Local Development Frameworks, community,economic, housing and other strategiesshould seek the development of moresustainable communities by:

maximising the opportunities affordedby growth to facilitate the regenerationof deprived communities;improving skills levels, enterprise andinnovation support;ensuring a supply of housing of the righttypes, sizes and tenure that meets thequantitative and qualitative need foraffordable housing throughout the policyarea;


providing the social (i.e. primary,secondary, further and higher education,health and social care) infrastructure tomeet additional needs;promoting and facilitating communitydevelopment through the activeinvolvement of the voluntary sector andcommunity sectors;ensuring improved community safety;andpromoting adequate, equitable and easilyaccessible sport and recreation facilities.

Target:

To meet interim affordable housing targets forthe Central Lincolnshire HMA in draft ProposedChanges Policy 14

Indicator:

Affordable housing completions in the CentralLincolnshire HMA

Results:

Table 8e(v) Affordable Housing 2007/08

Percentage of total additionsto dwelling stock

Number of affordabledwellings

TotalInter-mediate

Socialrented

TotalInter-mediate

Socialrented

2.702.714014Lincoln

12.710.81.9796712North Kesteven

6.46.10.343412West Lindsey

7.561.513610828Central Lincolnshire HMA

15.76.69.13,3951,4271,968East Midlands


8e.16 During 2007/08, 136 affordable dwellings werebuilt in the Central Lincolnshire HMA. This is 7.5 percent of all additions to dwelling stock, considerablylower than the East Midlands average of 15.7 per cent(Table 8e(v)). It is, however, an increase on the evenlower figure of 3.4 per cent the previous year.

Policy Commentary

8e.17 Since the previous year there has been alarge increase in intermediate housing provided anda fall in social rented. Whilst still valuable, intermediatehousing is by definition affordable to fewer people inneed.



8e.18 The Central Lincolnshire HMA is theappropriate area for monitoring in this case asindicative targets are available in Regional PlanProposed Changes Policy 14. A Strategic HousingMarket Assessment for Central/Coastal Lincolnshirehas been completed. EMRA are match funding aSub-Regional Housing Strategy for Lincolnshire, whichwill need to address the considerable shortfall identifiedin affordable housing provision.

LPA SRS Policy 8 Flood Risk and WaterManagement

Policy LPA SRS 8

Local Authorities, the Environment Agency,Internal Drainage Boards and other relevantbodies should adopt a strategic approach tosustainable water and flood riskmanagementthroughout the Lincoln Policy Area, includingcoordinated infrastructure provision. LocalDevelopment Frameworks should takeaccount of the best available information onflood risk (including climate change) andapply it in making decisions on the locationand design of new development, and ensurethat such development makes a positivecontribution to flood risk management.

Targets:

100 per cent Strategic Flood Risk Assessmentcoverage in Policy AreaWater efficiency at or above regional target of25 per centOther targets to be developed

Indicators:

Planning permissions granted contrary toEnvironment Agency advice on flood risk groundsDevelopments with Sustainable DrainageSchemes (SuDS)Strategic Flood Risk Assessment undertakenWater efficiency targets in new development

Results:

8e.19 Figures for the Environment Agency’s2007/08 objections on flood risk grounds are not yetavailable. In any case they are based on whole districtsand therefore it would not be clear whether they areinside the Lincoln Policy Area or not.

8e.20 North Kesteven, West Lindsey and LincolnCity all reported that no developments had taken placewith Sustainable Drainage Schemes. The City ofLincoln Council together with Lincoln Policy Areapartners took part in one of fifteen nation-wide UrbanDrainage pilot projects being led by Defra - the LincolnIntegrated Urban Drainage (LIUD) Project. This projectidentified ways to solve urban drainage and floodingproblems where there is an involvement of a numberof organisations responsible for the issue (for furtherdetails please see www.defra.gov.uk/environ/fcd/policy/strategy/ha2/Lincoln/finalreport.pdf )

8e.21 The City of Lincoln Council, together withLincoln Policy Area partners, is also taking part in aWater Cycle Study. The Study will look at the impactof Lincoln's growth in relation to water services andwill focus on water supply, sewage disposal, flood riskmanagement and surface water drainage. The finalreport is expected in mid-2010.

8e.22 In November 2002 the Lincoln Policy AreaPartners (Lincoln City, North Kesteven and WestLindsey Councils) commissioned JBA Consulting tocarry out a Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA)of the Lincoln Policy Area. This also provides anin-depth assessment of known potential developmentareas targeted by the above councils. An update ofthe SFRA, in light of the publication of PPS25, is beingcarried out and will be a full level 1 and 2 SFRA. Thetarget of 100 per cent coverage by SFRA has alreadybeen achieved.

8e.23 Ofwat has introduced voluntary waterefficiency targets for water companies, which will applyin 2008/09 and 2009/10. Targets proposed by Ofwatare for all water companies to save one litre of waterper property per day through efficiency measures.

Policy Commentary

8e.24 The studies referred to above are a key partof the evidence base for the possible Joint CoreStrategy and the Lincoln Growth Point Programme ofDelivery. They are all evidence of partnership workingon these important issues.

8e.25 Parts of the existing urban area of Lincoln arein flood zones 2 and 3. It is not possible or appropriateto avoid all further development in these areas e.g. onbrownfield sites.



http://www.defra.gov.uk/environ/fcd/policy/strategy/ha2/Lincoln/finalreport.pdf

http://www.defra.gov.uk/environ/fcd/policy/strategy/ha2/Lincoln/finalreport.pdf

LPA SRS Policy 9 Sub Regional CountryPark

Policy LPA SRS 9

Local Development Frameworks, communitystrategies and other relevant strategiesshould actively promote the development ofa ‘Sub Regional Country Park’ serving theLincoln Policy Area. The Sub-RegionalCountry Park will be based upon the existingWhisby Nature Park, the Whisby/NorthHykeham complex of former gravel pits,linking in Hartsholme Park and the openspaces in the proposed Western GrowthCorridor development. Opportunities shouldalso be sought to promote ‘greenways’ linkingthe complex with other informal recreationareas in the vicinity.

Targets:

All relevant strategies to contain polices

Indicators:

Policies to develop Sub-Regional Country Parkin LDFs, Community Strategies and otherrelevant strategies

Results:

8e.26 The development of the Sub Regional CountryPark is already in the Adopted Structure Plan. CurrentLDF progress is covered under Policy LPA SRS 3.North Kesteven District Council has appointed aSub-Regional Country Park Project Officer and NaturalEngland has supported the development of a conceptstatement for the Project.

Policy Commentary

8e.27 Public consultation on ideas for theSub-Regional Country Park will take place in February2009. The local authorities and partners are alsodeveloping a Green Infrastructure Strategy to set astrategic context for it and for otherconservation/recreation projects in the Lincoln PolicyArea.

LPA SRS Policy 10 Lincoln Cathedral

Policy LPA SRS 10

Development which would adversely affectthe dominance and approach views of LincolnCathedral on the skyline will not be permitted.

Indicators:

Policies consistent with LPA SRS 10 in LDFs


8e.28 Current LDF progress is given in LPA policy3.

LPA SRS Policy 11 Sub-RegionalTransport Priorities

Policy LPA SRS 11

Successive Local Transport Plans, LocalDevelopment Frameworks, economic,community and other strategies shouldconsistently seek to:

improve the management of traffic,protect the environment and promoteefficient and convenient movement byvarious modes of transport;reduce the negative impacts of throughtraffic, particularly heavy goods vehicles,in the centre of Lincoln;develop transport infrastructureschemes, including eastern andsouthern bypasses, which developmentparts of whichwill provide access to newurban extensions and would enhancesafety and local amenity;encourage and develop movement bypublic transport, cycling and walking aspart of an overall strategy designed toincrease sustainability and widentransport choice;




increase accessibility for all sections ofthe community;minimise additional travel requirements;create a safer, healthier and moreattractive environment;manage vehicular parking (includingpotential park and ride) in a way thatrecognises differing urban and ruralneed whilst facilitatingmore sustainablepatterns of movement.

Targets:

Reduction in congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routesIncrease in journeys made by cycle

Indicators:

Scale of congestion in urban areas and oninter-regional routesJourneys made by cycleNumber and length of new cycle routes provided

Results:

8e.29 As part of the Local Transport Plan (LTP)monitoring, inbound traffic flows at 20 sites on a cordonaround Lincoln city centre (in line with DfT Guidance)

weremeasured. Each site is counted 10 times between7am and 10am and then averaged and a total for thewhole cordon produced. The 2008 figure is 23,266(compared with 23,452 for 2007 and 23,411 for 2006).Although this is actually a slight decrease (-0.6%) fromthe previous year, there is some statistical error. Thepurpose of the counts is to monitor longer term trendsrather than year to year changes.

8e.30 Lincolnshire has a total length of 196km ofcycle routes. In 2007/08 12 new cycle paths weredeveloped of total length 8,020 metres.

8e.31 Journeys made by cycle are not available atthis geography - see the Transport chapter for regionaldata.

Policy Commentary

8e.32 A target is still to be developed for the trafficflows recorded above. Provision of cycle paths andestimates of journeys made by cycle are both availablefor the whole of Lincolnshire, but not yet for the LincolnPolicy Area. (Journeys made on cycle paths are notrecorded in the cordon survey).

8e.33 Action will be taken to refine the indicators forthis policy following publication of the final EastMidlands Regional Plan.



Chapter 8 f Peak Sub-area8f.1 Due to the unique status of the Peak National Park Authority, there is difficulty collecting some of thedata required by the regional monitoring process. The Peak District National Park Authority is working withpartners towards improving their databases as far as possible, particularly for the 2008/09 monitoring round.

8f.2 Data collected via cdpVision includes the whole of the Peak District National Park in this sub-area, asfar as possible. Data collected via other sources is usually only available at district level so the two districts ofDerbyshire Dales and High Peak are used. The Peak District National Park Authority continues to seekimprovements in data provision by the relevant authorities and organisations to enable a more complete pictureto be presented.

8f.3 All authorities in Derbyshire are working towards the launch of the cdpSmart monitoring system, whichwill cover the whole county. It will for the first time include the Peak District National Park within Derbyshiremonitoring procedures, as recommended by the Roger Tym study of regional monitoring arrangements (May2005). It will do much to improve the efficiency and accuracy of data in the Peak Sub-area.

8f.4 Joint working also took place on studies to better understand the situation in the area for policy making.These have reported since or are imminent and will be reported in future Annual Monitoring Reports.


Chapter 8 f . Peak Sub-area




NOMISDecline inemploymentrate inDerbyshireDales


ContextualWorking ageemploymentrate

SpatialPriorities inthe PeakSub-area

8

LocalAuthorities

Above regionalaverage in levelof affordablehousing

Regional CoreNumber of newaffordablehouses built

STEAMVisitor spendingshows anincrease

RSS CoreVisitor spending

ABIIncrease in jobsin DerbyshireDales

ContextualNumber of newjobs created

-Spatial definitionof ‘out of park’required


RSS CoreWorking ageemploymentrate

SpatialPrioritiesoutside the

9

Peak DistrictNationalPark

-Regional CoreNumber of newaffordablehouses built

-ContextualVisitor spending

-RSS CoreChange innumber of jobs

-See policy 8above


ContextualNumber ofvisitors andamount ofspend per visitor

ManagingTourism andVisitors inthe PeakSub-area

10

-Data notavailable

RSS CoreNumber of newvisitorattractions inareasimmediatelyoutside NationalPark

ABIRate of jobs insector remainsabove regionalaverage

ContextualNumber of jobsin tourismrelated activities

-Indicators andtargets to bedeveloped

---Sub-area(Peak)transportobjectives

43



Policy 8 Spatial Priorities in the PeakSub-area

Policy 8

The preparation of policies and programmesin and around the Sub-area should:

help to secure the conservation andenhancement of the Peak DistrictNational Park, respecting the statutorypurposes of its designation;address the social and economic needsof the Park's communities, for example,by the provision of appropriate businesspremises and affordable housing and;protect and enhance natural and culturalheritage of the Sub-area, in particularthe Peak District Moors SpecialProtection Area, and the Special Areasof Conservation covering the SouthPennine Moors, Peak District Dales, theBee’s Nest and Green Clay Pits andGang Mine and the Peak District MoorsSPA/SAC.

Policy 8 cont.

In accordance with the South PenninesIntegrated Transport Strategy (SPITS),wherever practicable:-

routes for long distance traffic shouldbe developed to avoid the National Park;andaccess to and across the National Parkby public transport and other non-carmodes should be improved.

Targets:

To be developed

Indicators:

Working age employment rateNumber of newjobs createdVisitor spendingNumber of new affordable houses built

Results:

Table 8e(i) Employment Rates in Derbyshire part of Peak Sub-area Jan 07 to Dec 07(per cent)

Employment Rate

70.7Derbyshire Dales

79.9High Peak

75.9East Midlands

Source: NOMIS Annual Population Survey

8f.5 Employment rates for January to December2007 are given in table 8e(i). The employment rate inthe High Peak was 79.9 per cent; higher than theregional figure of 75.9 per cent. The employment rate

in Derbyshire Dales was below the regional figure at70.7 per cent with a reduction from 76 per cent in 2006,despite an increase in jobs in the area, as shown inthe following table.

Table 8e(ii) Number of Jobs in Derbyshire Dales and High Peak 2006 and 2007

PercentageChange 2006to 2007

20072006

1.933,10032,500Derbyshire Dales

0.129,80029,800High Peak

3.31,897,0001,837,100East Midlands

Source: Annual Business InquiryData prior to 2006 are not comparableFigures rounded to the nearest 100



8f.6 The ABI data in table 8e(ii) shows that between2006 and 2007, the number of jobs in High Peakremained fairly constant, while in Derbyshire Dales

there was an increase of 1.9 per cent in the numberof jobs. This compares with a regional figure of 3.3 percent.

Table 8e(iii) Tourist spending in Derbyshire Dales and High Peak 2003 to 2007

Total Tourism Spend(million pounds)

Average spend per dayvisitor (pounds)

Average spend perstaying visitor (pounds)

1,287261322003

1,293261272004

1,285261282005

1,368281372006

1,404281402007

Source: STEAM Model www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk

8f.7 The STEAM model (Scarborough TourismEconomic Activity Monitor) provides estimates oftourism spend for Derbyshire Dales and High Peak,therefore excluding part of the Peak Sub-area. Figuresfor 2003 to 2007 are presented in table 8e(iii). The

figures show a gradual increase from 2003 to 2007with the average spends per staying and day visitorincreasing by 6 and 7 per cent respectively. Over thesame period the total visitor spend increased by 9 percent.

Table 8e(iv) Affordable Housing in the Peak, Dales & Park HMA in 2007/08

Percentage of All Additions toDwelling Stock

Number of dwellings built

TotalInter-mediate

SocialRented

TotalInter-mediate

SocialRented

40.120.619.4995148Derby Dales

17.63.414.2631251High Peak

12.16.16.1422Peak District National Park


8f.8 A total of 166 affordable houses were built inthe Peak, Dales and Park HMA in 2007/08, 26.0 percent of all additions to dwelling stock. This is abovethe East Midlands average of 15.7 per cent. Theaffordable housing target for the Peak, Dales and ParkHMA, set in the RSS Proposed Changes, is for a totalof 7,300 affordable dwellings between 2001 and 2026.This figure gives an average annual requirement of292 dwellings, requiring a significant increase in thenumbers built compared to current levels in order tomeet the 2026 target (Table 8e(iv)).

Policy Commentary

8f.9 The provision of housing within the PeakSub-area remains a sensitive issue given the need tobalance the demands to provide housing for localneeds against the conservation requirement within the

Peak District National Park. Within the National Park,housing continues to be provided where it is requiredfor local needs and is deemed acceptable within theenvironment or considered to enhance the area.

8f.10 Outside the National Park, housingdevelopment is being brought forward on its merits,taking into account the relevant local plan policies. Itincludes both open market and affordable housing forlocal needs .

8f.11 Overall, the level of completions of affordablehousing in the Sub-area was below the amountnecessary to deliver the affordable housingrequirements of the RSSProposedChanges. However,authorities continue to work together with the housingenabler to bring forward development opportunitiesfor affordable housing in the more rural settlementsand communities of the sub-region.



http://www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk/

8f.12 Within the National Park the number ofdwelling completions fluctuates significantly from yearto year. 2007-08 was the lowest since monitoringstarted in 1991, although there are a significant numberof commitments under construction or on which a starthas yet to be made, and which continue to comeforward.

8f.13 Outside the National Park, where policies areless restrictive and allow for provision of open markethousing, 73% of the additional dwellings provided werefor the open market. There were a number ofsignificant housing developments, including 79affordable dwellings completed at Ashbourne andpermission granted for 58 at Bakewell Road, Matlock.

8f.14 The findings of the Strategic Housing MarketAssessment and a Joint Strategic Housing LandAvailability Assessment for the area, jointlycommissioned between Derbyshire Dales, High Peakand the Peak District National Park Authority, are dueimminently. They will complement the existing HousingNeeds Survey, to better understand the drivers of thehousing market and act as background to developingpolicy in Local Development Frameworks.

8f.15 Partnership work continues in the PeakSub-area between local government and privateenterprise to ensure a stable economy withoutdetriment to the National Park. Grant schemes andawards are available for local businesses who striveto be sustainable while promoting the area.

8f.16 Significant new developments were outsidethe National Park, including the Sainsbury’s store andthe relief road at Matlock, which opened in October2007.

8f.17 Progress continued on the development of thepolicies for the Local Development Frameworks. ALandscape Character Assessment was prepared forthe Peak District, to inform the Landscape Strategy.A number of joint projects continued to protect andenhance the natural and cultural heritage of theNational Park, including the Moors for the Future, LeadRakes, Peak Birds and Biodiversity Vision Projectsand there was also ongoing support foragri-environment schemes through the Peak DistrictLand Management Advisory Service; and work todeliver the Sites of Special Interest Public ServiceAgreement target led by Natural England .

Policy 9 Spatial Priorities outside the PeakDistrict National Park

Policy 9

The preparation of policies and programmesin the Peak District towns outside the NationalPark should aim to meet local needs whilstreducing past levels of in-migration,discouraging additional commuting to, andsupporting the regeneration of, the nearbyconurbations. The emphasis should be on:

retaining and generating localemployment. In particular, policiesshouldmake provision for the growth ofindigenous firms and attracting inwardinvestment to support their ownpopulation and the population of thesurrounding rural hinterland; andrestraining new housing developmentexcept where the local need for modestgrowth is identified.

Care must be taken to ensure that all newdevelopment respects and enhances the highquality environment of the area, notably thebuilt heritage, particularly in Buxton,Ashbourne and Wirksworth, and the settingof the National Park, the Derwent Valley MillsWorld Heritage Site, and the areas of highlandscape and nature conservation value.

Targets:

To be developed

Indicators:

Working age employment rateNumber of new affordable houses builtVisitor spendingChange in number of jobs

Results and Policy Commentary:

8f.18 Due to the need for a definition of the area towhich this policy relates there is no data providedspecifically for this policy. However, data and policycommentary presented for policy 8 is relevant. Workis proposed to refine the 'out of park' definition to assistwith monitoring of this policy.



Policy 10 Managing Tourism and Visitorsin the Peak Sub-area

Policy 10

Local Authorities and responsibleorganisations should seek tomanage tourismand visitor pressures in accordance with theprinciples of sustainable development, givingparticular attention to improved publictransport, walking and cycling links andrespecting National Park purposes andpriorities.

Local Authorities and other relevant publicbodies in areas adjacent to the National Parkshould encourage and promote tourismopportunities that could ease pressures onthe Park itself, providing this would notincrease pressure on areas of biodiversityinterest. Coordinated approaches andinter-regional efforts may be needed tosupport required habitat and accessmanagement measures in the South PennineMoors and Peak District Dales designatednature conservation sites of internationalimportance.

Targets:

To be developed

Indicators:

Number of visitors and amount of spend pervisitorNumber of visitor attractions in Peak Sub-areaimmediately outside the National ParkNumber of jobs in tourism related activities

Results:

8f.19 See the results for policy 8 that cover touristvisitor numbers and spend. Data is not available onthe numbers of visitor attractions.

Table 8e(v) Employment in tourism related industries 2006 and 2007

Percentage of alljobs in 2007

Percentage of alljobs in 2006

Jobs in 2007Jobs in 2006

12.412.74,1004,100Derbyshire Dales

9.38.72,8002,600High Peak

7.57.5142,900137,400East Midlands

Source: Annual Business InquiryData prior to 2006 are not comparable

8f.20 The ABI data in table 8e(v) shows that between2006 and 2007 there was no significant change in thenumber of tourism related jobs in Derbyshire Dales orthe High Peak nor in the percentage of total jobs inthese areas which were tourism related. In both areasthe percentage of all jobs which were tourism relatedwas higher than the average for the East Midlands.

Policy Commentary

8f.21 See the results in Policy 41 in the EconomyChapter (Tourism) for further details.

8f.22 The Peak District and Derbyshire DestinationManagement Partnership, which comprises partnersfrom local government, national bodies and privateenterprise, continues to work together to help increase

occupancy levels for quality accommodation providersand attract more customers to visitor attractions,venues, restaurants, shops and events.

8f.23 There have been many enquiries for hoteldevelopments in Derbyshire Dales. Work started onclearing the site at the Marquis of Granby at Bamford,which received planning permission in 2006/07.Permission was granted for the development of a newPublic House at Chapel- en-le- Frith.



Policy 43 Sub-area Transport Objectives:Peak

Policy 43

P1 To implement key proposals of the SouthPennines Integrated Transport Strategy(SPITS).

P2 To develop opportunities for modal shiftaway from road based transport including forthe quarrying and aggregates sector.

P3 To overcome the problems of ruralisolation for those without access to a privatecar, particularly in the National Park itself.

P4 To improve transport linkages to the NorthWest Region and the rest of the EastMidlands, particularly by public transport,whilst having due regard to the statutorypurposes of the Peak District National Park.

Indicators and Targets:

To be developed

Policy Commentary

8f.24 Transport interests affecting the PeakSub-Area continued to work together to implement theSouth Pennine Integrated Transport Strategy (SPITS).A business plan has been agreed for 2005-2015.

8f.25 The SPITS Public Transport Group, consistingof Transport Authorities, Public Transport Providersand the Peak District National Park Authority,commissioned a Rural Transport Study in June 2007.A draft report, published in January 2008 is being usedto inform future planning and provision of rural busservices within the area.

8f.26 The Peak Connections Project wasre-launched in March 2007 to improve public transportinformation .

8f.27 The review of Rural Transport Partnerships inDerbyshire was completed in 2007/08. This hasresulted in revised/new partnerships replacing theexisting partnerships from April 2008 in the area.

8f.28 The Derwent Valley Community RailPartnership secured a new hourly service by EastMidland Trains on the Derby-Matlock line.

8f.29 The Peak District National Park Authorityobjected to the proposed A57/A628 Mottram toTintwhistle Bypass Scheme and A628/A616 RouteRestraint Measures. However, High Peak BoroughCouncil supported the development of the proposedBypass and associated Glossop Spur to alleviate thecurrent problems arising from heavy traffic in theLongdendale Valley. A Public Inquiry has still to beconcluded.



Appendix 1 Data Sources and ReferencesThis section outlines the sources for the data used in the Report. Where available web references have beenincluded, in some instances to specified documents and in others to a general website for a particularorganisation.

Section 3 – Housing:

Local Authorities, 2008

CLG Housing Statistics

www.communities.gov.uk/corporate/researchandstatistics/statistics/subject/housingstatistics

CLG Planning Statistics

www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningbuilding/planningstatistics/

EMRA Updated Appendix 2 with HMA Housing Trajectories

www.emra.gov.uk/files/updated-appendix-2-with-hma-housing-trajectories.pdf

Section 4 – Economy:


DWP Benefits Data

www.nomisweb.co.uk

DEFRA

www.defra.gov.uk/rural/ruralstats/rural-definition.htm

Neighbourhood Statistics

neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk

CLG Planning Statistics

www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningbuilding/planningstatistics/

VAT registrations data, local ONS team

www.statistics.gov.uk/about/ons/regional-statisticians/east-mid/default.asp

Annual Business Inquiry, local ONS team


STEAM Tourism Data

www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk/text.asp?PageId=123

Broadband OVUM 2005 for DTI

www.dti.gov.uk

Valuation Office Property Reports

www.voa.gov.uk

emda e Adoption Survey 2006


Appendix 1 . Data Sources and References

http://www.communities.gov.uk/corporate/researchandstatistics/statistics/subject/housingstatistics

http://www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningbuilding/planningstatistics/

http://www.emra.gov.uk/files/updated-appendix-2-with-hma-housing-trajectories.pdf

http://www.nomisweb.co.uk/

http://www.defra.gov.uk/rural/ruralstats/rural-definition.htm

http://neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk/

http://www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningbuilding/planningstatistics/

http://www.statistics.gov.uk/about/ons/regional-statisticians/east-mid/default.asp


http://www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk/text.asp?PageId=123

http://www.dti.gov.uk/

http://www.voa.gov.uk/

www.ebusinessclub.biz/projects/eAdoption_Survey.html

Section 5 – Natural and Cultural Resources:


DEFRA Wild Birds Indicator

www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/wildlife/research/rwbi.htm

The Forestry Commission

www.forestry.gov.uk/eastmidlands

English Heritage

www.english-heritage.org.uk/server/show/nav.1424

Energy Trends

www.berr.gov.uk/energy/statistics/publications/trends/index.html

County Energy Data, 2006

www.emra.gov.uk/files/summary-current-renewables-capacity-county-level.pdf

Environment Agency

www.environment-agency.gov.uk

Natural England SSSIs

www.english-nature.org.uk/special/sssi/reportIndex.cfm

BERR Regional Energy Consumption Statistics

http://www.berr.gov.uk/whatwedo/energy/statistics/regional/index.html

End user carbon dioxide emissions

www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/globatmos/galocalghg.htm

Environmental Capacity in the East Midlands: an evidence base fit for purpose: Draft Final ReportHallam 2008

The National Forest

www.nationalforest.org

The Strategic Partnership in river corridors

www.sparc-project.org/

Ofwat water efficiency targets

www.ofwat.gov.uk

East Midlands Urban and Regional Creative Industries Data Study for Culture East Midlands, BOP2008

www.culture-em.org.uk/



http://www.ebusinessclub.biz/projects/eAdoption_Survey.html

http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/wildlife/research/rwbi.htm

http://www.forestry.gov.uk/eastmidlands

http://www.english-heritage.org.uk/server/show/nav.1424

http://www.berr.gov.uk/energy/statistics/publications/trends/index.html

http://www.emra.gov.uk/files/summary-current-renewables-capacity-county-level.pdf

http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/

http://www.english-nature.org.uk/special/sssi/reportIndex.cfm

http://www.berr.gov.uk/whatwedo/energy/statistics/regional/index.html

http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/globatmos/galocalghg.htm

http://www.nationalforest.org/

http://www.sparc-project.org/

http://www.ofwat.gov.uk

http://www.culture-em.org.uk/

Section 6 – Minerals, Aggregate Production and Waste Management:


East Midlands Aggregates Working Party Survey, 2006

www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/emrawp2006

DEFRA Waste Data Flows

www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/waste/index.htm

C&I survey, 2002/03

Survey of Arisings and Use of Alternatives to Primary Aggregates in England, 2005 Construction,Demolition and Excavation Waste Final Report (DCLG February 2007)

www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/survey

Environment Agency

www.environment.gov.uk

Waste Planning Guidance for EMRA by SLR Consulting

www.emra.gov.uk/regionalplan/documents/Waste_Planning_Guidance.pdf

Section 7 – Transport:


Civil Aviation Authority

www.caa.co.uk/default.aspx?categoryid=80&pagetype=88&pageid=3&sglid=3

Office of Rail Regulation

www.rail-reg.gov.uk/server/show/nav.1527

DfT Transport Statistics

www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/statistics/datatablespublications/

Atkins Economic Costs of Congestion in the East Midlands July 2007, emda

www.emda.org.uk/uploaddocuments/TechReport2Measurement-finalversion.pdf

6cs Congestion Study

www.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk

Annual Population Survey

Section 8 – Sub-Areas:

Local Authorities 2008

SERRL, 2008. Rural Services Series.

www.ruralcommunities.gov.uk//projects/ruralservicesseriesdata/overview

Claimant Count NOMIS

www.nomisweb.co.uk



http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/emrawp2006

http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/waste/index.htm

http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/survey

http://www.environment.gov.uk/

http://www.emra.gov.uk/regionalplan/documents/Waste_Planning_Guidance.pdf

http://www.caa.co.uk/default.aspx?categoryid=80&pagetype=88&pageid=3&sglid=3

http://www.rail-reg.gov.uk/server/show/nav.1527

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/statistics/datatablespublications/

http://www.emda.org.uk/uploaddocuments/TechReport2Measurement-finalversion.pdf

http://http:\www.6cscongestionmanagement.co.uk

http://www.ruralcommunities.gov.uk/projects/ruralservicesseriesdata/overview

http://www.nomisweb.gov.uk/

Job densities NOMIS

www.nomisweb.co.uk

Lincolnshire Biodiversity Action Plan

www.lincsbap.org.uk

LPA Growth Point Delivery Plan

Lincolnshire Local Transport Plan (LTP)

www.lincolnshire.gov.uk

STEAM Tourism Data

www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk/text.asp?PageId=123

Annual Business Inquiry, local ONS team


Annual Population Survey (Labour Force Survey)

www.nomisweb.co.uk

EMRA Updated Appendix 2 with HMA Housing Trajectories

www.emra.gov.uk/files/updated-appendix-2-with-hma-housing-trajectories.pdf

DWP Benefits Data

www.nomisweb.co.uk

Neighbourhood Statistics

neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk

Draft Regional Plan Part 2: Sub Regional Strategies (maps)

www.emra.gov.uk/files/file1019.Pdf

emda e Adoption Survey 2006

www.ebusinessclub.biz/projects/eAdoption_Survey.html



http://www.nomisweb.gov.uk/

http://www.lincsbap.org.uk/

http://www.lincolnshire.gov.uk/

http://www.eastmidlandstourism.co.uk/text.asp?PageId=123



http://www.emra.gov.uk/files/updated-appendix-2-with-hma-housing-trajectories.pdf


http://neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk/

http://www.emra.gov.uk/files/file1019.pdf

http://www.ebusinessclub.biz/projects/eAdoption_Survey.html

App

endix2Bou

ndaryMaps

Thissectionoutlinestheboundariesused

fordatacollectionthroughoutthewholereportforD

istricts&Housing

MarketAreas,Sub-Areas

andSu

bRegionalStrategy

Areas.


Appendix 2 . Boundary Maps


Appendix 2 . Boundary Maps